ALBERT R m
LIBRARY
sorheu mQK 572.5.CB5C7iniVere"yLibrary
of Bermuda,
3 1924 001 608 904
3192400160890458.3(729.9!
O
CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL STATION
FOR RESEARCH.
No. 69.
THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
By Frank S. Collins and Alpheds B. Hervey.
With Six Plates.
From the Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences,
Vol.LIII, No. 1.
CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A.
August, 1917.58.3(729.9)
CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL STATION
-	FOR RESEARCH.
No. 69.
THE ALGAE OF- BERMUDA.
By Frank S. Collins and Alpheds B. Hervey.
With Six Plates.
From the Proceedings op tiie American Academy of Arts and Sciences,
:	Vol. LIII, No. 1.
CAMBRIDGE, MASS., U. S. A.
August, 1917.CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL STATION
FOR RESEARCH, No. 69.
THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
By Frank S. Collins and Alpheus B. Hervey.
Bermuda consists of a little group of islands of not more than twenty
square miles of dry land, lying in latitude 32° 14'-32° 23' north and
longitude 64° 38,-64° 53' west, about -700 miles southeast of New
York, and 600 miles east of the coast of South Carolina. They are
some three or four hundred miles south and east of the Gulf Stream.
This situation accounts for the very marked uniformity as well as the
mildness of the climate of the islands.
All of Bermuda now above sea level consists of limestone, from a
fine sand to hard crystalline rock. The lime comes from the various
organisms inhabiting the water, in part animal but more largely
vegetable;1 many of these lime-producing algae are included in the
following pages, but Lithothamnium and its allies, stony algae be-
longing to the Florideae, which furnish the larger part of the material,
we have not been able to include here. The fine powder formed from
the remains of these various organisms is carried by the wind and
spread out over the ground. Rainwater dissolves a certain amount
of it, which when the water dries up is deposited and acts as a cement.
Crystallization goes on more or less within the masses after formation,
and so some parts become much harder than others. Erosion from
rain or from the sea is continually going on, and its action being
greater in the softer than in the harder parts, we have a great variety
of fantastic forms along the shore, and many caves underground.
It has long been supposed that there was a core of solid rock under
the limestone, but only recently have any definite data been obtained
in regard to it. Pirsson, 1914, gives the particulars in regard to a
boring made in the hope, which was not fulfilled, of obtaining a supply
of fresh water. The boring was in Southampton parish, about a mile
west of Gibbs Hill Lighthouse, 135 feet above sea level. To 380 feet
l For a summary of the results of investigations as to the parts taken in the
formation of “coral” islands, by animal and vegetable organisms, see Howe,
1912.4
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
below the surface it was the ordinary soft limestone; then to 695 feet,
earthy, decomposed lava, in the lower part of the range with frag-
ments of solid lava, sometimes waterwom; then to 1413 feet, the
lowest point reached, solid lava. Considering these data in connec-
tion with our knowledge of the present under-wrater Bermuda, the
slope from the present island to the ocean floor, the conclusion is
reached that a great volcanic cone was formed, perhaps in the early
Eocene, with its summit where the present island is, rising about
11,000 feet above the sea. The 718 feet above the bottom of the
boring and an unknown distance below consist of the unchanged lava
of the cone; the 315 feet layer above this was produced by the dis-
integration of the upper part of the cone; the foraminifera found in
the 380 feet of limestone indicate that its formation, by the same
processes that are now at work, began before the end of the Eocene;
while the occurrence of the limestone 245 feet, and the decomposed
lava 560 feet below sea level, indicate a long-continued subsidence.
At the present time there are no bodies of fresh water on the islands;
rain water sinks almost immediately into the porous soil, which is
also honeycombed by large and small caves and passages; brackish
water can be obtained at sea level anywhere, but strictly fresh water
nowhere. A curious instance of this permeability was told us by Mr.
Reid Trott, owner of the aquarium known as the Devil’s Hole; this
is on the shore of Harrington Sound, distant a quarter of a mile, rather
high ground, from the south shore; in a southerly storm the surf is
very heavy on the south shore, and white from the fine lime of the
beaches; within a day or two the water in the aquarium becomes
milky. The only visible outlet of Harrington Sound is by the nar-
row passage at Flatts Bridge; but though the rise and fall of the
tide in the Sound is only a few inches, it has been calculated that it
represents a flow through unseen passages of much more than passes
under the bridge. Devonshire Marsh forms a sort of bowl, with
higher ground on all sides; surface drainage into this fills the ditches
with practically pure fresh water after rains, but it soon disappears,
and only a few species of fresh water algae are able to avail themselves
of the short opportunity.2
A few species of “ Fucus ” are mentioned by Turner, leones Fucorum,
1808-1819, but actually our knowledge of the algae of Bermuda
2 A * is placed before the name of each fresh water or terrestrial species
listed, including some Myxophyceae found here within range of tides, though
not normally marine.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
5
begins with the list published in the Canadian Naturalist by the Rev.
Alexander F. Kemp (Kemp, 1857), who visited the islands in 1856
and collected somewhat extensively. Sixteen years later J. J. Rein,
who had been a tutor in an English family at Bermuda, published two
papers on the vegetation of the islands, one of them with a list of the
algae (Rein, 1873). In 1881 Prof. W. G. Farlow made quite extensive
collections, and some of the material obtained was distributed in the
set of exsiccatae, Farlow, Anderson & Eaton, Algae Exsiecatae Boreali-
Americanae. At a later visit, in 1900, Farlow collected additional
species, a few of which were distributed in Collins, Holden & Setchell,
Phycotheca Boreali-Americana, but otherwise no publication has been
made of the material collected by him. The Challenger Expedition
visited Bermuda, and the results are given in a preliminary paper
(Dickie, 1874) and in a volume of the Results of the Challenger
Expedition. In these are included the species listed by Kemp and
Rein and those distributed by Farlow, with comparatively few addi-
tions. In the Journal of Botany George Murray published a Cata-
logue of West Indian marine algae (Murray, 1889), including in it
the Bermuda lists above mentioned; noting that Bermuda did not
belong to the West Indies, geographically or politically, but might
be considered as having a similar flora. Setchell, 1912, is a paper
calling attention to several species in the Farlow herbarium. Longer
or shorter lists of algae occur in local publications, traveller’s guides
etc., but based on the papers above noted, and adding nothing to
what is found in them. Occasional references to Bermuda occur in
general works, but only as citations from the works mentioned, or
referring to some specimen collected by Farlow.
Through the kindness of Mrs. Jane A. Sutherland, daughter of Mr.
Kemp, we have been able to examine his collection, which still includes
nearly all the species listed by him. Professor M. Mobius very kindly
sent us for examination the Rein algae, now preserved in the collection
of the Senckenbergischer Gesellschaft at Frankfurt a/m.; by the
favor of Dr. D. Prain, Director of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew,
we have examined specimens of the species added by the Challenger
expedition; and Professor Farlow has given every facility for the
study of his rich material, including beside his own collecting, speci-
mens collected by G. Tucker in 1856 and Walter Faxon in 1882. In
the collection of one of the writers is a considerable number of algae
collected in 1890 by W. S. Wadsworth.3 Miss Wilkinson of Ripleigh,
3 A similar set is in the herbarium of the University of California.6
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Hamilton, has kindly allowed us to refer to an interesting collection
she has made, and we are also much indebted to her for information
as to stations of some of the rare species. In 1882 ^liss Kate Peniston,
now Mrs. Matthews, sent one of us some algae from the Harrington
Sound region; comparatively few specimens, but including some of
much interest. Several species from Bermuda are recorded by Dr.
M. A. Howe in his papers in the Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical
■Club, and some of them have been distributed in the Phycotheca
Boreali-Americana. An occasional specimen from some other col-
lector will be noted in its appropriate place. Collections were made
by ourselves in the years from 1911 to 1917, during which period one
or the other of us has been in Bermuda rather more than half of the
time, collecting in practically all parts of the islands and in all months
except June. While future additions are of course to be expected,
we think that the main characters of the algal flora are fairly settled,
and the greater part of the species determined. A special effort has
been made to distribute in the Phycotheca Boreali-Americana as full
a representation as possible of Bermuda algae, and fascicles XXXVIII,
XXXIX, XLI, XLII and XLIV consist entirely of specimens from the
islands.4 We have distributed in this way every species of which
sufficient material was available.
A number of new species are described and figured in the following
pages, and we have tried to give all details of value in regard to them.
In case of other species, whenever we could add anything to previous
knowledge of them, we have tried to do so, but no full descriptions
have been given except for new species, varieties etc. Concise keys
however, have been furnished, and we think will prove useful. We
have been rather full in notes as to character of station, as this is
something sadly lacking in many floras. Exact localities have been
given, for the aid of future students, and the date of collecting is
given by month, but it has not seemed necessary to give the year.
No full synonymy is given, but pains have been taken to give for
each species the proper name under the international rules; the ori-
ginal name, if published under another genus; and when possible
reference to a good figure. Whenever specimens from Bermuda have
been distributed in the Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc. or in the P. B.-A.,
reference is given by number. Other references are given in cases
i A set of these fascicles will be found at the Bermuda Agricultural
Station, to whose Director, Mr. E. J. Wortley, we are indebted for many
kindnesses during our visits to the islands.THE ALGAE OP BERMUDA.
7
where it seemed desirable, especially from distinctively American
works, like Harvey, Nereis Boreali-Americana and Borgesen, The
Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies. The latter is specially
useful in connection with the present work, being a careful study of
the marine flora of a small group of islands, of character not unlike
Bermuda, though somewhat farther south. As Borgesen’s work is
still incomplete as this paper goes to press, full comparisons are not
yet possible.
We had hoped to publish with the present paper somewhat full
comparisons of the floras of Bermuda and other regions, but the list
for the Danish West Indies, perhaps the most instructive, is not
fully available. We have reluctantly had to omit from our list the
families Rhizophyllidaceae, Squamariaceae and Corallinaceae; with-
out careful study of the types any conclusions in these critical families
would be uncertain, and in the present European conditions such
study has not been practicable. In view of this we have made only a
short statement, by classes, showing the percentage of the Bermuda
species common to nine of the best known regions where a similarity
might be expected. If later we are in position to take up the families
now omitted, and a full account of the algae of the Danish West Indies
is available, the proposed full comparison may be made. In the
present comparison we have not included the Class Myxophyceae;
first because the species of this class are largely cosmopolitan, second
because in many regions where the other classes are fairly well known,
the Myxophyceae have been little studied. We have considered a
species as common to two regions, though represented by different
forms or varieties in each; pelagic species, known only as washed
ashore, have not been included.
Perce?itage of Bermuda algae represented in other floras.
	Chlorophyeeae Phaeophyceae		Rhodophyceae	Total
Great Britain	28	34	26	27
N. and NW. France	24	30	26	25
Bay of Biscay	11	20	25	IS
Mediterranean	29	34	33	31
Canaries	19	28	23	21
New England	22	24	16	19
Florida	32	43	44	40
Jamaica	38	63	32	41
Barbados	33	41	32	33COLLINS AND HERVEY.
The nine regions used in the above comparison are not equally well
known; the affinity to an intensively studied region like Great Britain
is somewhat overstated, that to a less thoroughly studied region, like
the Canaries, understated; but some general indications may be ob-
tained. Perhaps the most striking is the distinctness of the Bermuda
flora, having only 41 per cent in common with Jamaica, and not so
much in common with any of the others. Taking the three classes
represented, there is only one in which more than half the species are
common to another region' again Jamaica, which has 63 per cent of
the Bermuda brown algae. Taking all the regions, the similarity is
greatest in the brown algae, least in the green. The affinities of the
Bermuda flora are evidently strongest with the Florida-West India
region, next with the Mediterranean, and after that with more north-
ern localities. New England has probably the least in common with
Bermuda of all the regions compared, its slight numerical superiority
over the Canaries being probably due to the less thorough exploration
of the latter.
The following list of important stations, with indication of the
characters of each, will, we think, be of use to future collectors; in a
region where the coast line is so long in proportion to the surface area,
many such stations must exist, but we think we have listed the more
important ones.
In this list of stations we aim to conduct our readers around the
whole island and point out the places where we have found certain
forms of algae most common. Driven in on all sides by the winds
one will find abundance of Sargassum, natans “ gulfweed” of which
the farmers make so profitable use as a fertilizer. This grows in mid-
ocean and is never found attached to the shores. Other species of
the same genus are found growing all about the island along with other
litoral plants. Many other forms such as Ulva, Bryopsis, Caulerpa,
Codium, Laurencia, Dictyota, Padina, Spyridia etc. will be found al-
most everywhere, and so will not require special mention. We will
start from Hamilton, going west to Fairyland and Grasmere; there
we shall find shallow water and abundance of plants. Breaking into
the land opposite Agar’s Island is a large bay; as we first come to it
on our left we shall find a large growth of mangrove trees among the
roots of which in shallow water we will find abundance of the endemic
Halymenia bermudensis, the loose, small form. Farther along in
front of a cottage is rich collecting ground; another of the new plants,
Chondria curvilineata occurs here, and very large masses of Valonia
macrophysa; a larger form of the Halymenia was gathered in abundanceTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
9
in a little bay that comes up in front of the Grasmere Hotel. Beyond
the hotel is a water called Mangrove Creek, lying between the hotel
and Spanish Point, where good collecting may be had. At the ex-
treme end of Spanish Point are two little bays, the larger of which is
called Stovel Bay; this furnished good specimens of Dudresnaya
crassa and Liagoras in the spring. It is well to make a careful search
all about Spanish Point as far east as the Admiralty House. Beyond
that as far as the Ducking Stool the shore is for the most part high
and precipitous, and we did not find much to reward the climb down
and up; but coming in a boat one finds a fairly rich flora, Liagora etc.,
at the base of the cliffs.
From the Ducking Stool to the Inlet of Harrington Sound most of
the collecting was of the smaller forms, some of them microscopic.
At one point, perhaps half a mile from the Inlet, was found at one
time an abundance of Coelarthrum Albertisii, as it was also on the
outer point of the Gibbet Islands. These two islands and the little
beaches on either side, being near our place of abode, were carefully
studied, and yielded from time to time several interesting things,
among them the new Lopkosiphonia Saccorhiza, growing on a Codium;
Halymmia Agardhii and Antithamnion cruciatum var. radicans also
occurred here. The Inlet of Harrington Sound is good collecting
ground for several species; on the south side is plenty of Ceramium
nitens, and on the wall of the Frascati Hotel may be found at all times
a fine growth of Callithamnion Halliae; Heterospora Vidovichii also
grew on this wall, and Avrainvillea nigricans grows buried in the mud
in the lower part of the Inlet. Over on the north side in the shallow
water one may find abundance of Udotea and Penicillus. Within the
Sound near the bridge is always an abundance of Wrangelia penicillata,
and always also Griffithsia tenuis; in Tucker’s Bay at the west end of
the Sound we first found Neomeris annulata, afterwards found at
several other stations; farther to the north, in Major’s Bay, were
two or three species of Bryopsis. At the farther end of the Sound in
a little cove near Walsingham House, called Dingle Bay, we found
rich collecting; it is the best station for characteristic Hypnea musci-
formis and for Champia parvula, rare in Bermuda, and the only station
for the new Dosya spinuligera, also the original station for Nitophyl-
lum Wilkinsoniae; on the south side of the Sound we found our best
growth of Acetabularia crenulata in a little pool near the chapel;
the species is common in many other places, however; the shores
of the Sound everywhere abound in species of Bryopsis and Laurencia.
About a mile north of Flatts Village we come to Shelly Bay, a fine12
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
famous as a rich station; here in a single day in 1S81 Farlow found
Dudresnaya caribaea, D. bermv.den.sis, Calosiphonia verticillifcra and
Kallymenia perforata, none of which except the second have been
found in Bermuda since; we have made several visits to the island in
the hope of finding them, but in vain, but each trip was rewarded by
unexpected good things.
From Tucker’s Town way along the South Shore to Ely’s Harbor,
a distance of some fifteen miles, the shore presents an alternation of
long beaches and high precipitous rocks, with but here and there a bay
where one can collect algae. The reef runs along parallel to the shore,
from a quarter to a half a mile outside. There are two or three little
bays in Southampton which we have not explored; but we have found
that the flora of the west end of the island is not nearly as rich as that
of the east end. On the south shore east of the meridian of Hamilton
are a few bays that should be mentioned; these are in the neighbor-
hood of Devil’s Hole, viz., Pink Bay, Smith’s Bay and Gravelly Bay;
a reference to the text will show what plants have been collected in
these localities; special attention is called only to the last of the three,
Gravelly Bay. It is not more than a quarter of a mile across the
island from Devil’s Hole; it has proved a remarkabty fertile place;
it is the only station where we have found Gracilaria horizontalis,
Turbinaria tricostata and Dilophus guineensis, though the latter was
found by Farlow in Paget. The place is rich in several species of
Didyota, also in Zonaria lobata and Didyopteris Justii in their seasons.
Here also we first found Trichogloea Herveyi, and we have found it
there every season since; a little cave near the bay has yielded a
number of species, rarely found elsewhere.
About a mile farther along towards the west we come to what is
known as Spanish Rock; here at the foot of a high precipice, Col-
pomenia sinuosa and Hydrodathrus cancellatus cover the rocks, and
may be collected at low tide; another mile along in the same direction
we come to Harris Bay, another good station; here several species of
Spyridia and Liagora abound, also two species of Sphacelaria, Wrigh-
tiella Bhdgettii, Digenea simplex and others; it is the only station for
Udotea conglutinata and Rosenvingia intricata. Devonshire Bay just
beyond we did not find very productive, but a mile and a half farther
on is Hungry Bay, which will reward several visits at different seasons;
Dictyotas and Dictyopteris abound here in summer, and in the tidal
creek Howe collected Acicularia Schenckii, the only time it has been
found in Bermuda; in this creek also is excellent Ernodesmis verti-
cillata. Geminella scalariformis forma marina was found in a pool in
the rocks on the west side of the bay.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
13
Ely’s Harbor and Mangrove Bay towards the west end of the
group are noted for nothing in particular, but are by no means barren;
in the former we found a better growth of Porphyra atropurpurea
than elsewhere. Now crossing the land to the shore on the inside of
the great hook that this end of the group makes, and going along to
the neighborhood of Gibbs Hill light, we come to Jew’s Bay and
Heron Bay, in both of which good collecting may be had, especially
in the latter, with its shallow still water and sunny exposure; we
found it very fertile with several species of Gracilaria, Laurencia,
Spyridia, Chondria curvilineata and other things. Coming back to
Hamilton we may find something at Salt Kettle. The wall of the
quay at Hamilton below low tide is well covered with algae, and a big
timber float lying there yielded a rich harvest of Polysiphonia foeti-
dissima. This brings us round to the point of beginning.14
COLLIXS AND HEHVEY.
Class MYXOPHYCEAE.
Family CHROOCOCCACEAE.
Chroococcus Nageli.
1. Cells 3-8 ix diam.,	1. C. membraninus.
1. Cells 13-25 ix diam.	2. C. turgidus.
*1. C membraninus (Menegh.) Nageli, 1849, p. 46; P. B.-A.,
No. 2151; Pleurococcm membraninus Meneghini, 1842, p. 34, PI. IV,
fig. 1. In brackish pool near race course, Aug.; in ditch in South
Shore marshes, Sept., Collins. In the material from the locality first
named the cells were dividing rapidly, and average smaller than in
P. B.-A., No. 1201, about like Wittrock, Nordstedt & Lagerheim,
No. 1538. Sometimes the division of the cells goes on so much
faster than the separation of families that a mass resembling a
Microcystis is formed.
2. C. turgidus (Kiitz.) Nageli, 1849, p. 46; Protococcus turgidus
Kiitzing, 1845-49, p. 5, PI. VI, fig. 1. In gelatinous masses in brackish
pools, and in films on decaying algae near Flatts Bridge, April, Collins.
Synechocystis Sauvageau.
*	S. aquatilis Sauvageau, 1892a, p. CXVI. On rocks near Hungry
Bay, April; in cave, Agar’s Island, Aug., Collins.
Synechococcus Nageli.
*	S. aeruginosus Nageli, 1849, p. 56, PI. I. E, fig. 1. Among other
algae in brackish pool near race-course, Aug., Collins. Cells about
14 X 7 y, which is rather small for this species.
Chroothece Hansgirg.
1. Cells seldom under 20 fi diam.	1. C. Richteriana.
1. Cells not over 3 m diam.	2. C. cryptarum.
1. C. Richteriana forma marina Hansgirg, 1889, p. 5; P. B.-A.,
No. 702. Farlow; rather common on shaded stone work and on sides
of caves, Collins.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
15
2. C. cryptarum Farlow in P. B.-A., No. 752; Forti, 1907, p. 30.
Farlow; on walls and roofs of caves, often in company with C. Rich-
teriana. Gloeothece rupestris often occurs in company with these two
species, the whole forming a continuous stratum, generally one or two
mm. thick, extending from just above low water mark to much above
high water mark. Between tide marks it is a rich green and gelatinous,
but beyond the range of tides it is yellowish or whitish and crumbly.
Gloeocapsa Kiitzing.
1. Cell without wall, 1.5-2 m diam.; tegument yellow or brown.
1. G. fuseo-lutea.
1. Cell without wall, over 2 m diam.; tegument colorless or nearly so. 2.
2. Colony amorphous, soft; cell without wall, 2-5 n diam.
2. G. montana.
2. Colony subspherical, firm; cell without wall, 4-6 m diam.
3. G. atrata.
*1. G. fusco-lutea (Nag.) Kiitzing, 1849, p. 224; P. B.-A., No.
2153. G. ambigua var. fusco-lutea Nageli, 1849, p. 50. On rocks,
Hungry Bay, in company with Synechocystis aquatilis, April, Collins.
The color of the tegument varies from dark brown to pale yellow.
*2. G. Montana Kiitzing, 1843, p. 173; 1845-49, p. 14, PI. XIX,
fig. 2. On wall of cave near Causeway, high up, April, Collins.
*3. G. atrata (Turp.) Kiitzing, 1843, p. 174, PI. VI, fig. 1; Globu-
lina atrata Turpin, 1830, PI. V, fig. 6. On cliff, away from the sea,
in company with Scytonema etc., Aug., Collins. The colonies are
usually quite regularly spherical; they range from about 30 y diam.,
containing only two cells, to above 140 y diam., with hundreds of cells.
The contents is bright green, somewhat granular; the surface inside
the wall is usually thickly set with very short, bristle-like projections;
bacterial?
Gloeothece Nageli.
1. Cell without tegument, about 2 m wide.	1. G. confluens.
1. Cell without tegument, about 5 m wide.	2. G- rupestris.
*1. G. confluens Nageli, 1849, p. 58, PI. I. G, fig. 1. On wall
of shallow cave, by inland road, April, Collins.
*2. G. rupestris (Lyng.) Bornet in W. & N., No. 399, 1880;
Palmella rupestris Lyngbye, 1819, p. 207, PI. LXIX, fig. D; G. mem-
branacea Bornet, 1892, p. 175. Common all about the islands in16
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
clefts of rocks, rock pools, roadsides, within reach of salt water or far
from it. As noted by Bomet, 1892, p. 175, it varies much in the
appearance of the stratum, from thick gelatinous masses to thin
films, also in the development of the concentric walls; in a rock pool
of fresh water, near the Old Ferry road, we collected a form quite
without these walls, closely resembling Aphanothece microscopica,
P. B.-A., Xo. 552; but it seems probable that it is merely a state of
the present species corresponding to Bornet’s section I, in which he
includes Microcystis microspora Menegh. This form distributed as
P. B.-A., No. 2154. Lyngbye’s specific name, used by Bornet in
1880, is the oldest, and must supersede the name used by Bornet in
1892.
Entophtsalis Kiitzing.
E. granulosa Kiitzing, 1843, p. 177, PL XVIII, fig. 5; Bornet &
Thuret, 1876, PI. I, figs. 4 & 5. On rocks, North Shore, Aug., Collins.
Microcystis Kiitzing.
*M. marginata (Menegh.) Kiitzing, 1845-49, p. 6, PI. VIII;
Anacystis marginata Meneghini, 1836, p. 6; 1842, p. 93, PI. XIII,
fig. 1. With other algae on wall of cave near Causeway, April,
Collins.
Merismopedium Meyen.
1. Families 50-150 n square.	1. M. glaucum.
1. Families 1-4 mm. square.	2. M. convolutum.
*1. M. glaucum (Ehrb.) Nageli, 1849, p. 55, PI. I. D, fig. 1;
Gonium glaucum Ehrenberg, 1838, p. 56, PI. Ill, fig. 5. Among other
algae in pool by race course, Aug., Collins.
*2. M. convolutum Brebisson in Kiitzing, 1849, p. 472; 1855,
p. 13, PI. XXXVIII, fig. IX. Among various algae in Harrington
Sound; in cave at Gravelly Bay, Jan., Hervey.
Oncobyrsa Agardh.
0. marina (Grun.) Rabenhorst, 1865, p. 68; Hydrococcus marinus
Grunow, 1861, p. 420. On Dictyopteris Justii, Gravelly Bay, Aug.,
Collins; on Sphacelaria, Spanish Rock, March, Hervey.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
17
Chlorogloea Wille.
C. tuberculosa (Hansg.) Wille, 1900, p. 5, PI. I, figs. 1-6; Pal-
viella f tuberculosa Hansgirg, 1892, p. 240, PI. VI, fig. 9. On Bostry-
chia, Catenella etc., in company with other minute Myxophyceae.
Family CHAMAESIPHONACEAE.
Pleurocapsa Thuret.
P. conferta (Kiitz.) Setchell, 1912, p. 229; Palmella conferta
Kiitzing, 1845, p. 149; 1845-1849, p. 12, PI. XVI, fig, IV. On
Rhodochorton speluncarum, in cave, Agar’s Island, Aug.; on Gelidium
pusillum, Harrington Sound, April, Collins.
Hyella Bornet & Flahault.
H. caespitosa Bornet & Flahault, 1888a, p. 162; 1889, p. CLXV,
PI. X, figs. 7-8, PI. XI. In dead shells, in company with Gomontia,
Mastigocoleus and Plectonema, but usually the least abundant of the
four.
Dermocarpa Crouan.
1. Cells scattered.	1. D. solitaria.
1. Cells laterally united in pulvinate expansions.	2. D. prasina.
1. D. solitaria sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2155. Cellula solitaria,
clavata, circa 8 yu diam., supra discum basale paullo majus; superne
uniformiter incrassata, vel interdum prope basin parvam expansio-
nem annulatam ferente, usque ad apicem rotundatam, circa 20 y
diam.; longitudine ad 75 yu; ad maturitatem in duas cellulas divisa,
superiore in gonidangium subsphaericum mutanda, gonidia pro more
8-12, 5-6 y diam., continente; cellula inferiore obconica, supra plana
vel concava, contentu laete aeruginoso; membrana crassa, sublamel-
losa.
Cell solitary, clavate, about 8 y diam. above the slightly larger basal
disk, increasing in diameter upwards uniformly, or sometimes with a
slight ring-like expansion near the base, to the rounded apex, about
20 yu diam.; height up to 75 y. At maturity dividing into two cells,18
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
the upper a subspherical gonidangium, containing gonidia, 5-6 p.
diam., usually 8-12 in number; the lower cell obconical with flat or
concave upper surface, contents bright blue-green; wall thick, some-
what lamellate.
On older parts of fronds of Spermothamnion gorgoneum and Cera-
mot hamnion Codii, which grew on Codium decorticatum, in company
with Xenococcus Schousboei, Lyngbya Meneghiniana and other small
algae. The cells are always scattered, never forming cushion-like
masses, as is the case with most species of Dermocarpa. The general
appearance of the plant is not unlike that of some small species of
Codiolum, except for the shade of color, and that the colorless stipe
is shorter.
2. D. prasina (Reinsch) Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 75, PI. XXVI;
P. B.-A., No. 2051. Sphaenosiphan prasinus Reinsch, 1875, p. 73,
PI. XII. Not I). prasina P. B. A., No. 1, which is D. Farlowii Borgs.
On Catenella Opuntia var. pinnaia generally.
Xenococcus Thuret.
X. Schousboei Thuret in Bornet & Thuret, 18S0, p. 74, PI.
XXVI, figs. 1-2; P. B.-A., No. 2052. On Lyngbya conferooides, in
ditch back of Shelly Bay, Aug., Collins. Cells mostly separate
and exactly spherical; but sometimes closely packed and compressed.
Var. pallida Hansgirg, 1889, p. 5. On algae on roof of cave,
Gravelly Bay, April, Collins. What may be a species of Xenococcus
with minute cells was found on Oedogonium from Devonshire marshes,
but could not be specifically identified.
Family OSCILLATORIACEAE.
Spirulina Turpin.
1. Trichome rose-color.	1. S. rosea.
1. Trichome aeruginous.	2.
2. Trichome less than 1 p diam., spiral loose.	2. S. tenerrima.
2. Trichome over 1 n diam., spiral close. 3. S. subsalsa f. oceanica.
1. S. rosea Crouan ex Gomont, 1893, p. 273. Forming a pinkish
film on Amphiroa between tide marks, North Shore, Sept., Collins.
*2. S. tenerrima Kiitzing ex Gomont, 1893, p. 272; Kiitzing,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
19
1845-49, p. 25, PI. XXXVII, fig. I; P. B.-A., No. 2054. Among
other algae in a coating on rock between tide marks, North Shore,
Sept., Collins.
3.	S. subsalsa forma oceanica Gomont, 1893, p. 274; P. B.-A.,
No. 2053. Among other algae at various stations.
Oscillatoria Vaucher.
1.	Filaments torulose.
1.	Filaments not torulose.
2.	Trichomes 18-36 p diam., loosely spiral.
2.	Trichomes not spiral.
3.	Trichomes and stratum dull red.
3.	Trichomes and stratum not red.
4.	Limicolous; trichomes 17-29 p diam.
4.	Trichomes 6-11 p diam.
5.	Limicolous or saxicolous; black-olive.
5.	Epiphytic; aeruginous, light green or light brown.
6.	Trichomes not attenuate at tip.
6.	Trichomes attenuate at tip.
7.	Trichomes 4-10 p diam.
7.	Trichomes less than 3 p diam.
8.	Apical cell capitate.
8.	Apical cell not capitate.
9.	Trichomes 3 p diam. or more.
9.	Trichomes less than 3 p diam.
10.	Distinctly marine.
10.	Plant of fresh water pools.
2.
6.
1. O. Bonnemaisonii.
3.
2. O. miniata.
4.
3. O. margaritifera.
5.
4. O. nigro-viridis.
5. O. Corallinae.
7.
8.
6. O. tenuis.
7. O. amphibia.
8. O. amoena
9.
10.
11. O. longeartieulata.
9. O. laetevirens.
10. O. formosa.
1.	O. Bonnemaisonii Crouan ex Gomont, 1893, p. 235, PI. VI,
figs. 17-18; P. B.-A., No. 2055. Forming floating masses in ditch
in Pembroke Marsh, Aug., Collins.
2.	0. miniata Hauck ex Gomont, 1893, p. 236; P. B.-A., No. 2156.
Hungry Bay, April, May, Collins. Forming a deep red film on the
bottom, also floating clots adhering to everything. The filaments are
usually about 20 p diam., but occasionally as high as 45 p.. The plant
decays very quickly, and even when put on paper with a promptness
ample for most Oscillatorias, the coloring matter stains the paper pur-
ple, and the filaments remain nearly colorless.
3.	O. margaritifera Kiitzing ex Gomont, 1893, p. 236, PI. VI,
fig. 19. In brackish pool with other algae, April, Sept., Collins.
4.	O. nigro-viridis Thwaites ex Gomont, 1893, p. 237, PI. VI,
fig. 20. On rocks wet by salt water, Jan., Farlow.20
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
5. 0. Corallinae Gomont, 1S93, p. 238, PI. VI, fig. 21. On
Codium tomentosum, Cooper’s Island, April, Collins.
*6.	0. tenuis Ag. var. tergestixa Rabenhorst ex Gomont, 1893,
p. 241. Among other algae in a ditch in meadow by Shelly Bay, Aug.,
Collins.
*7. 0. amphibia Gomont, 1893, p. 241, PL VII, figs. 4-5; P. B.-A.,
Xo. 1852. In brackish pool among other algae, April, Aug., Collins.
*8. O. amoena Gomont, 1893, p. 245, PL VII, fig. 9. Forming a
thin coating on rock at Inlet, Aug., Collins.
*9. 0. laetevirens Crouan ex Gomont, 1893, p. 246, PL VII,
fig. 11. Among other algae, Tucker’s Town, May, Collins.
*10. 0. Formosa Bory ex Gomont, 1893, p. 250, PL VII, fig. 16.
In a puddle of rain water in road, April, Collins.
11. O. longearticulata Hansgirg ex Forti, 1907, p. 176. On
Codium, near Causeway, April, Hervey. We have not seen an au-
thentic specimen of this species, but our plant agrees with the original
description, with no description in Gomont, and with none but this
in Forti.
Trichodesmium Ehrenberg.
T. Thiebautii Gomont, 1893, p. 217, PL VI, figs. 2-4; Wille, 1904,
p. 57, PL I, figs. 17-22. Hamilton Harbor, Wille, 1. c.6
Phormidium Kiitzing.
1.	Trichomes strongly moniliform.
1.	Trichomes not moniliform.
2.	Stratum purple or pink.
2.	Stratum greenish or blackish.
3.	Trichomes 3 y diam. or less.
3.	Trichomes 4-12 p diam.
1. P. fragile.
2.
2. P. luridum.
3.
3. P. valderianum.
4. P. Retzii.
1. P. fragile Gomont, 1893, p. 183, PL IV, figs. 13-15. Among
other algae in an incrustation in rock between tide marks, April,
Collins.
*2. P. luridum Gomont, 1S93, p. 1S5, PL IV, figs. 17-18; P. B.-A.,
6 Catagnymene pelagica Lemmermann var. major Wille, 1904, p. 51, pi. I,
fig. 7, is reported by Tilden, 1910, p. 159, as occurring at Bermuda, but we
are unable to obtain any confirmatory evidence. Wille, 1. c., reports it from
open sea, at several points. Dermacarpa Leibleinii (Reinsch) Bomet var.
pelagica Wille, also appears in Tilden, 1910, p. 55, as from Bermuda, on
authority of Wille, 1904, p. 50; but Wille’s record is 39° 4' X., Long. 57° 8' W.,
“ ungefahr in der Mitte zwischen den Bermuda-Inseln und Xew Foundland.”THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
21
No. 2056. Forming a pinkish film over rocks between tide marks,
North Shore, Aug., Collins.
*3. P. valderianum Gomont, 1893, p. 187, PI. IV, fig. 20; P. B.-A.,
No. 2157. Among other algae in a blackish coating on rocks and
on Bostrychia, Aug. In thick wrinkled sheets on brackish water,
near old race course Dec. Collins.
*4. P. Retzii Gomont, 1893, p. 195, PI. V, figs. 6-9; P. B.-A.,
No. 2057. Forming a light green, firm coating on rock between tide
marks, North Shore, Sept., Collins.
Lyngbya Agardh.
1.	Filaments attached at the middle.	1. L. Meneghiniana.
1.	Filaments attached at one end or free.	2.
2.	Trichomes over 5 diam., usually over 7 m-	3.
2.	Trichomes 4 /x diam. or less, seldom over 3 m-	5.
3.	Trichomes 16-60 n diam., dissepiments not granulate. 2. L. majuscula.
3.	Dissepiments granulate.	4.
4.	Trichomes 9-25 m diam., apex not attenuate nor capitate.
3.	L. confervoides.
4.	Trichomes 5-12 /x diam., apex usually attenuate and capitate.
4.	L. semiplena.
5.	Trichomes 2.5—4 jx diam., straight or flexuous, not regularly spiral.
5.	L. lutea.
5.	Trichomes about 2 jx diam., more or less spiral. 6. L. Lagerheimii.
1.	L. Meneghiniana Gomont, 1893, p. 145. Mangrove Creek,
Farlow; on Codium, Cooper’s Island, Collins; Gibbet Island, March,
Hervey. The only representative here of the subgenus Leibleinia,
the filaments bent hairpin-shape, attached in the middle, both ends
free.
2.	L. majuscula Harvey ex Gomont, 1893, p. 151, PI. Ill, figs.
3-4; Harvey, 185S, p. 101, PI. XLVII. A; P. B.-A., No. 2001. Rein;
Moseley; Walsingham Grotto, March, Alden Fish pond, Dec., Hervey.
Usually blackish green, occasionally reddish or violet.
3.	L. confervoides Agardh ex Gomont, 1893, p. 156, PI. Ill,
figs. 5-6; including forma violacea Collins, P. B.-A., No. 1853. Com-
mon in floating masses in quiet waters, as attached tufts in more
exposed places, nearly everywhere. A brownish or yellowish green
is the more usual color, but violet and reddish shades are not uncom-
mon. These are in striking contrast to the normal color, but from
mu1 observations on the species of Lyngbya found at Bermuda, we are22
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
of the opinion that there is no justification for keeping color forms
distinct taxonomically. Both colors occur in nature, both in dried
material; plants originally aeruginous may change to red, plants
originally red fade to pale green. We have no suggestion to make as
to the causes determining these changes, except the general principle
in regard to filamentous Nostocaceae, that red forms generally occur
where the plant is always under water, not left exposed at low tide.
4.	L. semiplena J. G. Agardh ex Gomont, 1893, p. 158, PI. Ill,
figs. 7-11. Not uncommon among other small algae; rarely pure.
5.	Lyngbya ltjtea Gomont, 1893, p. 161, PI. Ill, figs. 12 & 13.
Among various small algae, not found pure; bright red form on
Codium, Harris Bay, Dec., Hervey.
*6. L. Lagerheimii Gomont, 1893, p. 167, PI. IV, figs. 6-7. On
decaying Sargassuvi, near Shelly Bay, April, Collins.
*1. S. muscorum Gomont, 1893, p. 130, PI. II, fig. 9. On rock by
roadside, Aug., Collins.
2. S. violacea Hauck ex Forti, 1907, p. 311; Hauck, 1885, p. 507,
fig. 224. On ground near margin of pool in woods by Walsingham,
April, Collins. This appears to have been overlooked by Gomont in
his monograph either as an accepted species or among “species in-
quirendae” or “species excludendae.” Hauck’s record is included
by Forti in the Sylloge, and by the international rules, which fix
Gomont’s monograph as the point of departure for homeocysted
filamentous Nostochineae, 1907 is the date of publication. The
Bermuda plant agrees with Hauck’s description and figure; the violet
color and short cells distinguish it from all other marine species.
*P. Nostocortjm Bornet ex Gomont, 1893, p. 122, PI. I, fig. 11.
Common in gelatinous masses of algae of various kinds.
Porphyrosiphon Kutzing.
*P. Notarisii Kutzing ex Gomont, 1893, p. 69, PI. XII, figs. 1-2.
On Juniperus bermudiana, Aug., Collins.
Symploca Kutzing.
1. Cells 1-2 diam. long, aeruginous.
1. Cells much shorter than their diam., violet.
1. S. muscorum.
2. S. violacea.
Plectonema Thuret.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
23
Microcoleus Desmaziferes.
1. Terrestrial.	3. M. vaginatus.
1. Marine.	2.
2. Trichomes 2.5-6 m diam.	1. M. chthonoplastes.
2. Trichomes 1.5-2 m diam.	2. M. tenerrimus.
1.	M. chthonoplastes Thuret ex Gomont, 1893, p. 91, PI.
XIV, figs. 5-8; P. B.-A., No. 1854. Common among other small
algae in incrustations on rocks, and on bottoms of shallow pools;
occasionally nearly pure, as a thin, blackish coating; also in fresh
water reservoir near Spanish Rock, Hervey.
2.	M. tenerrimus Gomont, 1893, p. 93, PI. XIV, figs. 9-11.
Occasional filaments among M. chthonoplastes, less commonly among
other small algae.
*3. M. vaginatus var. monticola Gomont, 1893, p. 94. On
moist ground at roadside near Flatts Bridge, Dec., Hervey.
Hydrocoleum Kutzing.
1. Trichomes 14-24 n diam.	2.
1. Trichomes 8-14 m diam., rarely to 16 /i; sheaths irregular, gelatinous,
often quite diffluent.	2. H. lyngbyaceum.
2. Color of mass of violet shade; sheaths cylindrical, distinct.
1. H. comoides.
2. Color of mass dull green or yellowish; sheaths irregular, becoming
shapeless and diffluent.	3. H. glutinosum.
1.	H. comoides Gomont, 1893, p. 73, PI. XII, figs. 3-5. Farlow,
fide Gomont, 1. c.; on rocks, Hungry Bay, April, Collins.
2.	H. lyngbyaceum Kutzing ex Gomont, 1S93, p. 75, PI. XII,
figs. 8-10; P. B.-A., No. 2058. Farlow, fide Gomont, 1. c.; occasional
in pools, Collins. The latter resembling var. rupestre Gomont, 1. c.
3.	H. glutinosum Gomont, 1893, p. 77. Rocks east of Elbow
Bay, Dec., Collins, forming a thin, tubercular coating on rocks
between tides.
Schizothrix Kutzing.
1. Among algae in pools; trichomes 2-3 m diam.	1. S. vaginata.
1. On damp walls; trichomes 1-1.7 ju diam.	2. S. calcicola.
*1. S. vaginata Gomont, 1893, p. 40, PI. VII, figs. 1-4. In a
gelatinous mass with other algae, North Shore, Sept., Collins; Har-
rington Sound, Nov., Hervey.24
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
*2. S. calcicola Rabenhorst ex Gomont, 1S93, p. 45, PL A HI,
figs. 1-3; P. B.-A., No. 2158. On shaded wall of house near South
Road, Dec., Collins.
Family NOSTOCHACEAE.
Anabaena Bory.
1. Spores ovoid, not contiguous to heterocysts.	1. A. variabilis.
1. Spores subeylindrical, contiguous to heterocysts.	2. A. torulosa.
*1. A. variabilis Kiitzing ex Bornet & Flahault, 1888, p. 226,
P. B.-A., No. 2059. Sphaerozyga Thwaitesii Harvey, 1846-51, PI.
CXIII. B. Brackish pool, April, Collins; in reservoir near Spanish
Rock, Jan., Hervey. In the material from the latter station the
filaments were sometimes straight, but oftener curved as in A. flos-
aquae Breb.; the spores were those of A. variabilis.
2. A. torulosa Lagerheim ex Bornet & Flahault, 1888, p. 236.
Among other algae, North Shore, Aug., Collins.
Sterile filaments of an Anabaena or Cylindrospermum were found on
ground wet by rain, near Flatts Bridge, Aug., Collins. The cells
were about 4 y diam., spherical, or just after division discoid.
Hormothamnion Grunow.
H. convolutum sp. nov. Trichomatibus pallide aerugineis, in-
terdum rubescentibus, parallelis, elongatis, 3-5 y diam.; cellulis 1-4
diam. longis, cylindricis, nodis leviter constrictis; heterocystis ovoi-
deis vel sphaericis, 8-10 y diam.; sporis ?; fasciculis tenuibus, inter
utriculis hospitis penetrantibus, curvatis.
Trichomes pale aerugineous, sometimes with a shade of red, parallel,
long, 3-5 y diam.; cells 1-4 diam. long, cylindrical, slightly constricted
at the nodes; heterocysts ovoid to spherical, 8-10 y diam.; spores ?;
fascicles slender, winding among the utricles of the host. On Codiurn
iomeniosum, Cooper’s Island, Aug. 29, 1913, F. S. Collins. Type in
Collins herb., No. 7239.
More slender than the other species of the genus, the cells relatively
longer. The cluster of filaments winds about among the utricles of
the host, the continued growth of the two plants causing the endophyte
to turn and twist very sharply.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
25
Nostoc Vaucher.
*N. commune Vaucher ex Bornet & Flahault, 1888, p. 203; P. B.-A.,
No. 1901; N. ciniflonum Bornet & Thuret, 1880, p. 102, PI. XXVIII,
fig. 13. Common everywhere, especially on sandy soil; thin brittle
skins in dry weather, expanded thickish soft masses in wet weather.
No spores seen. Native name, “Devil’s Tobacco.”
Family SCYTONEMACEAE Kiitzing.
Microchaete Thuret.
M. vitiensis Askenasy ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 85. Scat-
tered filaments on Wrangelia penicillata, Harris Bay, Jan., Hervey.
Scytonema Agardh.
1.	Sheaths not lamellate.
1. Sheaths lamellate.
2.	Trichomes 5-7 ju diam.
■ 2. Trichomes 6-14 ij. diam.
3.	Branches usually geminate, free and divergent.
3. Branches frequently solitary, adherent at base.
4.	Filaments 15-21 ^ diam.; sheath thin at apex.
4. Filaments 18-36 m diam.; sheath thick throughout.
2.
3.
1. S. varium.
2.	S. oeellatum.
4.
5. S. crustaceum.
3.	S. figuratum.
4. S. myochrous.
*1. S. varium Kiitzing ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 97; Kiitzing,
1850-52, p. 6, PI. XXIII, fig. II. High up on walls of a cave at Wal-
singham; shore of pool near Walsingham, April, Collins.
*2. S. ocellatum Lyngbye ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 95;
P. B.-A., No. 711, on dunes, Paget, Farlow.
*3. S. figuratum Agardh ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 101;
S.	thermale Kiitzing, 1850-52, p. 5, PI. XVIII, fig. III. High up on
wall of cave near Walsingham, April, Collins.
Bornet, 1889a, p. 155, shows that Conferva mirabilis Dillwyn, 1807,
PI. XCVI, is identical with Scytonema figuratum of Agardh, and of
earlier date, and therefore changes the name to S. mirabile (Dillw.)
Bornet. But as the starting point for nomenclature of the hetero-
cysted Nostochaceae is definitely fixed at the Bornet & Flahault
monograph, it appears as if the later name by Bornet cannot be sub-
stituted.26
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
*4. S. myochrous Agardh ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 104;
Kutzing, 1850-52, p. 7, PI. XXV, fig. Ill; P. B.-A., Xo. 1902. On
perpendicular cliff, Paget, Aug., Collins; and common in company
with Calothrix species etc. on rocks between tides. This species has
a very wide distribution as a plant of rocks etc., dripping with fresh
water, but in Bermuda it is commonly found with distinctly marine
species, in mats on flat rocks in the litoral zone.
*5. S. crustaceum Agardh ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 106.
On sand near Mangrove Creek, Hamilton, Jan., Farlow.
Tolypothrix Kutzing.
*T. teXcts Kutzing ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 122; Kutzing,
1850-52, p. 9, PL XXXI, fig. II. Among Oedogonium, in ditch in
Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins.
Hassallia Berkeley.
*H. byssoidea Hassall ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 116. On
bark of Juniperus bermudiana, rather common.
Family STIGOXEMACEAE Hassall.
MAstigocoletts Lagerheim.
M. testaroi Lagerheim ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 54; 1889,
p. CLXII, PI. X, fig. 4. In dead shells of mollusks, with Gomontia
etc.
Hapalosiphon Xageli.
*H. intricatus TV. & G. S. West, 1895, p. 271, PL XV, figs. 16-28;
P. B.-A., Xo. 1855. In ditch in Devonshire Marsh, April, Dec.,
Collins.
Stigoxema Agardh.
*S. informe Kutzing ex Bornet & Flahault, 1887, p. 75; Kiitzing,
1850-1852, p. 15, PL XXXVIII, fig. 3. Feb., H. Kennedy in Farlow
herbarium.
Fischerella Gomont.
*F. ambigua Gomont, 1895, p. 49, PL III. On stone wall, Jan.,
Farlow.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
27
Family RIVULARIACE AE.
Calothrix Agardh.
1.	Heterocysts basal only.
1.	Heterocysts basal and intercalary.
2.	Trichomes violet.
2.	Trichomes olivaceous or aerugineous.
3.	More or less endophytic.
3.	Not endophytic.
4.	Filaments in stellate tufts on other algae.
4.	Filaments not in stellate tufts; saxicolous.
5.	Trichomes olivaceous.
5.	Trichomes aerugineous.
6.	Filaments attached at the middle.
6.	Filaments attached at one end.
7.	Filaments 9-10 m diam.
7.	Filaments 12^0 fi diam.
2.
6.
1. C. fusco-violacea.
3.
3.	C. parasitica.
4.
6. C. confervicola.
5.
2. C. scopulorum.
4.	C. aeruginea.
7. C. pilosa.
7.
4.	C. aeruginea.
5.	C. Crustacea.
1.	C. fusco-violacea Crouan ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 352;
P. B.-A., No. 2060. On Enteromorpha, Ectocarpus etc., rock pool,
South Shore, Jan., Hervey.
2.	C. scopulorum Agardh ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 353;
Bornet & Thuret, 1880, p. 159, PI. XXXVIII; P. B.-A., No. 1856.
On flat rocks between tides, Causeway, Shelly Bay, etc., common.
3.	C. parasitica Thuret ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 357;
Bornet & Thuret 1880, p. 157, PI. XXXVII, figs. 7-10. In Trichogloea
Herveyi, Cooper’s Island, April, Collins; in gelatinous mass of various
algae, in drip from Aquarium outlet, Aug., Collins. Occasionally
found in various loose-tissued algae.
4.	C. aeruginea Thuret ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 358;
Bornet & Thuret, 1880, p. 157, PI. XXXVII, figs. 1-6. On rocks,
North Shore, mixed with Schizothrix etc., Nov., Hervey.
5.	C. Crustacea Thuret ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 359;
Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 13, PI. IV. Spanish Rock, April; on
Sargassum, Gravelly Bay, Dec., Hervey.
6.	C. confervicola Agardh ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 349;
Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 8, PI. III. On Cladophora crystallina,
Harrington Sound, Collins.
7.	C. pilosa Harvey ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 363; Harvey,
1858, p. 106, PI. XLVIII. C. Common in shallow pools and on flat
rocks between tides.28
COLLI XS AXD HEKVEY.
Dichotheix Zanardini.
1. On rooks; filaments 15-20 n in brandies of last order. 1. D. Baueriana.
1. Epiphytic; filaments 20—30 n in branches of last order. 2. D. fucicola.
*1. D. Batteeiaxa Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 376. On rocks
between tides, North Shore, Oct., Nov., Hervey; Hamilton Harbor,
Nov., Collins. Known heretofore only as a fresh water species, but
the Bermuda plant is distinctly marine, though agreeing in characters
with European and American specimens from fresh water stations.
2. D. fucicola Bornet & Elahault, 1886, p. 379; Schizosiphon
fucicola Kiitzing, 1850-52, p. 18, PL LV, fig. II. On various algae
forming a mat at the bottom of a pool, Gibbet Island, Hervey.
Polythbix Zanardini.
P. coeymbosa Grunow ex Bornet & Flahault, 1886, p. 380; P. B.-A.,
No. 1903; Microcoleus corymbosvs Harvey, 1858, p. 109, PI. XLVHI.
B. Common on rocks between tides in quiet water all around the
islands.
Rivulaeia Roth.
R. polyotis Bornet & Flahault, 1886a, p. 360; P. B.-A., No. 1904;
R. hospita Bornet & Thuret, 1880, p. 168, PI. XLI. Rocks near high
water, South Shore, Feb., April, Collins; grotto, Tucker’s Town,
Dec., Hervey.
Beachythichia Zanardini.
B. maculans Gomont, 1901, p. 127, PI. V, figs. 5-7; P. B.-A.,
No. 2159. Forming a thin film on roots etc. of mangroves between
tides, in company with Dichothrix and Calothrix species, Fairyland,
Dec., Collins.
Originally described from material collected in Siam, this species
now makes its second appearance half way round the globe.
Family CRYPTOGLENACEAE.
Ceyptoglexa Ehrenberg.
C. ameeicaxa B. XL Davis, 1894, p. 101, PI. XI; P. B.-A., No. 1851.
Among Cladophora expansa and other algae, in a brackish pool be-
tween Harrington Sound and the North Shore, April, Collins.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
29
Class CHLOROPHYCEAE.
Family DESMIDIACEAE.
Closterium Nitzsch.
1.	Apices subacute; median diam. 17-37 m-	1. C. Leibleinii.
1. Apices obtuse; median diam. 33-50 m-	2. C. moniliferum.
*1. C. Leibleinii Kiitzing ex Ralfs, 1848, p. 167, PL XXVIII, fig.
4; Wolle, 1884, p. 46, PI. VII, figs. 13,14, 20; G. S. West, 1904, p. 141,
PI. XVI, figs. 9—14; P. B.-A., No. 2061. In small quantity in an
artificial reservoir for fresh water, near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey.
*2. C. moniliferum Ehrenberg ex Ralfs, 1848, p. 166, PI. XXVIII,
fig. 3; Wolle, 1884, p. 45, PI. VII, fig. 15; G. S. West, 1904, p. 142, PI.
XVI, figs. 15-16; P. B.-A., No. 1961. Very abundant in an artificial
reservoir for fresh water, near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey.
Cosmarium Corda.
1. Uniformly granulate; semi-cell ovate-pyramidal, 51-68 m wide.
4. C. botrytis.
1. Smooth.	2.
2.	Semi-cell semicircular to semielliptic; 34-36 y. broad. 1. C. Cucumis.
2. Semi-cell truncate-pyramidal, 19-30 ^ broad.	2. C. granatum.
2. Semi-cell trapezoidal to truncate-pyramidal; about 33 m broad.
3.	C. pseudonitidulum.
*1. C. Cucumis Corda ex Ralfs, 1848, p. 93, PI. XV, fig. 2; G. S.
West, 1905, p. 152, PI. LIX, figs. 18-20; P. B.-A., No. 1858. Among
Sphagnum in a ditch, Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins. Distributed
as C. subcucumis Schmidle, but agreeing better with C. Cucumis.
*2. C. granatum Brebisson in Ralfs, 1848, p. 96, PI. XXXII,
fig. 6; Wolle, 1884, p. 60, PI. L, fig. 13; G. S. West, 1905, p. 186, PI.
LXIII, figs. 1-3. Rather scanty, among Oedogonium Itzigsohnii, ditch
in Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins.
*3. C. pseudonitidulum Nordstedt, 1S73, p. 16, PI. I, fig. 4;
Wolle, 1884, p. 62, PI. XVIII, fig. 19; G. S. West, 1905, p. 195, PI.
LXIII, fig. 26; P. B.-A., No. 2063. Among various algae: in a ditch
in South Shore marshes, Sept., Collins.30
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
*4. C. botrttis Meneghini ex Ralfs, 1848, p. 99, PI. XVI, fig. 1;
Wolle, 1884, p. 74, PI. XIII, fig. 5; G. S. West, 1911, p. 1, PL XCVI,
figs. 1, 2, 5-15; P. B.-A., No. 2062. In artificial reservoir for fresh
water near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey.
Mesotaenium Nageli.
*AI. Endlicherianum Nageli, 1849, p. 109, PI. VI. B; G. S. West,
1904, p. 56, PI. IV, figs. 20-21; P. B.-A., No. 1857. Among other
algae in a ditch, fresh water or nearly so, Devonshire Marsh, April,
Collins.
Family ZYGNEMACEAE.
Spirogyra Link.
S. submarina (Collins) Transeau, 1915, p. 25; S. decimina var.
submarina Collins, 1909, p. 110; 1912, p. 72. Ditch in South Shore
marshes, Sept., Collins. This was first described as a variety of
S. decimina, which it considerably resembles, and it was known from
three widely separated stations in New England. The Bermuda
material emphasizes the differences from S. decimina; the long cells,
up to 8 diam., and the considerably swollen fertile cells; the material
from the Elizabeth Islands, Collins, 1912, p. 72, has cells as small as
21 fi diam.
Family YOLVOCACEAE.
A Chlamydomonas was found in abundance in the water of an old
tank, near Trott’s Pond, Aug., Collins, but we have not been able to
determine the species.
Family TETRASPORACEAE.
Tetraspora Link.
*T. lubrica (Roth) Agardh, 1824, p. 188; Collins, 1909, p. 139,
fig. 26; 1 Viva lubrica Roth, 1806, p. 168. On dead leaves in ditch in
Devonshire Marsh, Dec., Collins.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
31
Family PROTOCOCCACEAE.
Protococcus Agardh.
*P. viridis Agardh, 1824, p. 13; Pleurococcus vulgaris Nageli, 1849,
p. 65, PI. IV. E, fig. 2; Collins, 1909, p. 304, fig. 106. On shady side
of trees, walls etc., all over the island; it occurs in similar stations in
all temperate regions, and possibly also in tropical. Wille, 1913, p. 3,
PI. I, fig. 1, has pointed out the confusion that has long existed in
regard to this species and Pleurococcus vulgaris Meneghini, and by
examination of type specimens, cleared up the matter.
Chlorocystis Reinhard.
C. Cohnii (Wright) Reinhard, 1885, p. 4, PL I; Moore, 1900, p. 100,
PI. X; Collins, 1909, p. 148, fig. 35; Chlorochytrium Cohnii Wright,
1877, p. 367, PI. IV-V. In Viva Lactuca, Hungry Bay, April, Collins.
Spores, apparently the smaller kind, had been formed in some of the
cells.
Family SCENEDESMACEAE.
Oocystis Nageli.
*0. Borgei Snow, 1903, p. 379, PI. II, fig. VII; Collins, 1909, p. 160.
Among Oedogonium Itzigsohnii, in ditch in Devonshire Marsh.
Scenedesmus Meyen.
*S. bijuga (Turp.) Wittrock, Nordstedt & Lagerheim, Alg. Exsicc.,
No. 1567; Collins, 1909, p. 168; Achnanthes bijuga Turpin, 1828, p.
310, PL XIII, fig. 4. Among Rhizoclonium hieroglyphicum in an
artificial reservoir near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey.
Family ULOTHRICHACEAE.
Geminella Turpin.
G. scalariformis forma marina G. S. West in litt.; P. B.-A., No.
2002. Forming a floating gelatinous mass in an upper tide pool,32
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
at the entrance to Hungry Bay, April, Collins. The typical form of
this species is a fresh water plant from Barbados, described and
figured as Hormospora scalariformis by G. S. West, 1904a, p. 282, PI.
CCCCLXIV, figs. 6-7. In the Bermuda plant the cells are some-
times longer in proportion to the diameter, and the wall of the fila-
ment shows no differentiated portion about the individual cell. It is
probable that Hormotrichum bermudianum Harvey is the same plant,
but the specimens of the latter cannot be found. Rein, 1873, p. 153,
gives this name as Harvey, sp. n. Dr. Mobius has kindly looked for
it in the collection at Frankfort, and was unable to find it. Professor
Dixon of the University of Dublin tells us that he cannot find it in the
Harvey herbarium. The nomen nudum cannot of course stand against
West’s name, but it would be of interest to recover the material.
Stichococcus Nageli.
*S. subtilis (Kiitz.) Klercker, 1896, p. 103; Hazen, 1902, p. 162,
PI. XXI, figs. 10-13; Collins, 1909, p. 191; Ulothrix subtilis Kutzing,
1845, p. 197. Among other algae, in a ditch in South Shore marshes,
Aug., Collins. Straight filaments a few cells long, scattered among
Spirogyra, Rhizoclonium etc.
Microspora Thuret.
1. Cells thick-walled, 20 n or more diam.	1. M. Wittrockii.
1. Cells thin-walled, 11-14 ^ diam.	2. M. Willeana.
*1. M. Wittrockii (Wille) Lagerheim, 1887, p. 417; Hazen,
1902, p. 172, PI. XXIII, figs. 5-7; Collins, 1909, p. 193; P. B.-A.,
No. 2066; Conferva Wittrockii Wille, 1887, p. 461, PI. XVII, figs. 35-
41. Fresh water pool near Shark’s Hole, Feb., Hervey.
*2. M. Willeana Lagerheim in De Toni, 1S89, p. 228; Hazen,
1902, p. 175, PI. XXIV, figs. 5-7; Collins, 1909, p. 194. Among
Oedogonium etc. in ditch in Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins.
Family ULVACEAE.
Exteromorfha Link.
1. Cells not in longitudinal series except in the very youngest parts. 2.
1. Cells mostly in longitudinal series.	3.
2. Cells 10-20 ju diam.	6. E. intestinalis.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
33
2. Cells 5-7 n diam.	2.	E. minima.
3. Fronds simple or with a few proliferations.		4.
3. Fronds more or less branched.		5.
4. Fronds inflated and flexuous.	5.	E. flexuosa.
4. Fronds compressed-filiform.	3. E. marginata.	
5. Branches largely monosiphonous.	1.	E. plumosa.
5. Branches not monosiphonous, except occasional proliferations.		
	4.	E. prolifera.
1.	E. plumosa Kiitzing, 1843, p. 300, PL XX, fig. 1; Collins, 1909,
p. 198; Borgesen, 1913, p. 7; P. B.-A., No. 2065; E. Hopkirkii
Vickers, 190S, PI. V. Rein, as E. percursa; North Shore, Jan.,
Gibbet Island, Feb., March, Devonshire Bay, Feb., Harris Bay,
March, Hervey; Tucker’s Town, Harrington Sound, Shelly Bay,
April, Hungry Bay, May, Inlet, Aug., Collins. The most frequent
species of the genus here and quite distinct from our other forms, by
the rather large, longitudinally seriate cells, and the many branches
of a few series or a single series of cells. Sometimes long, subsimple
branches occur, of two series of cells, much resembling E. percursa
(Ag.) J. Ag, with which a plant of this kind was identified by Rein.
It is the E. plumosa of Borgesen, the E. Hopkirkii of Vickers, as shown
by authentic specimens; whether the plants passing under these
names in the North Atlantic are identical with this and with each
other may be questioned. If there should prove to be two species,
an examination of original specimens would be needed to decide what
names to use.
2.	E. minima Nageli ip Kiitzing, 1849, p. 482; 1856, p. 16, PI.
XLIII, fig. 3; Collins, 1909, p. 201; P. B.-A., No. 2005. Grasmere,
March, Hervey; on old fish car, Hungry Bay, April, in drip from
outlet of aquarium, Agar’s Island, Aug., Collins.
3.	E. marginata J. G. Agardh, 1842, p. 16; Kiitzing, 1856, p. 15,
PI. XLI, fig. 1; Collins, 1909, p. 202. On old Sargassum, below
Flatts Bridge, May, Collins.
4.	E. prolifera (FI. Dan.) J. G. Agardh, 1882, p. 129, PI. IV,
figs. 103-104; Collins, 1909, p. 202; Ulva prolifera Flora Danica,
Vol. V, p. 5, PI. DCCLXIII, 1782. Rein, as E. compressa. Rein’s
specimen is the only one of the species that we have seen from Ber-
muda, but it may be not uncommon. Little branched forms might
easily be mistaken for E. minima or E. flexuosa, until examined micro-
scopically.
5.	E. flexuosa (Wulf.) J. G. Agardh, 1882, p. 126; Collins, 1909,
p. 203; P. B.-A., No. 2004; Conferva flexuosa Wulfen, 1803, p. 15.
Miss Peniston; Harrington Sound, Feb., Dec., Devonshire Bay, Feb.,34
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Inlet, March, Hervey; Harrington Sound, April, Collins. In some
specimens cells may be found as large as 20 ,u square, but in other
parts of the same individual they are of normal dimensions, little
over 12 p.
Forma submarina f. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2161. Natans: frondi-
bus inflatis, contortis.
Floating; fronds inflated, contorted. In extensive floating mats in
brackish water, near old race course, Dec., Collins.
6. E. intestinalis (L.) Grev. forma tenuis Collins, 1903, p. 23;
1909, p. 205; P. B.-A., No. 2003. In brackish water, South Shore
marshes, Aug., Collins. The thickness of the frond, 20-30 n, is
greater than that of the plant on which this form was founded. The
latter grew in fresh water, remote from the sea; the present form,
growing in brackish water, may be considered as intermediate between
the form from fresh water and the typical species growing in the sea.
A specimen in the Kemp herb., marked Viva linza, seems to be typical
E. intestinalis, but it is not in good enough condition for certainty.
Monostroma Thuret.
1. Frond 25 m thick or less, cells more or less in twos and fours.
1. M. latissimum.
1. Frond 30 m thick or more; cells not in twos or fours. 2. M. orbiculatum.
1.	M. latissimum (Kiitz.) Wittrock, 1866, p. 33, PI. I, fig. 4;
Collins, 1909, p. 211; P. B.-A., No. 1859; Viva latissima Kiitzing,
1856, p. 7, PI. XIV. On mangroves just below Flatts Bridge; on
Salicornia, Hungry Bay, April, Collins. This plant made its first
appearance at Flatts Bridge about the middle of April, 1912, and grew
rapidly. None was to be seen at the same station from July to Sep-
tember, 1913, nor elsewhere during those months.
2.	M. orbiculatum Thuret, 1854, p. 388; Wittrock, 1866, p. 37,
PI. II, fig. 6; Collins, 1909, p. 212; Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 173.
The material collected and distributed by Farlow is all that is recorded
for Bermuda.
Ulva Linnaeus.
1. Frond divided into linear lobes.	2. U. fasciata.
1. Frond rounded or of irregular outline.	1. U. Lactuca.
1. U. Lactuca L. var. latissima (L.) De Candolle, 1805, p. 9;
Collins, 1909, p. 215. Rein; Moseley; April, June, Kemp, as U.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
35
latissima; in high pool near Tucker’s Town, April, Collins; in quiet
waters elsewhere, but less common than var. rigida.
Var. RiGiDA(Ag.) Le Jobs, 1863, p. 38; Collins, 1909,p. 215; P. B.-A.,
No. 2064; U. rigida Agardh, 1822, p. 410. Rein; Kemp, as U.
Laetuca; Tobacco Bay, Grasmere, March, Harrington Sound, July,
Hervey; Inlet, Aug., Collins. Rather common both in sheltered
and exposed places; sometimes quite near to U. fasciata.
2. U. fasciata Delile, 1813, p. 153, PI. LVIII, fig. 5; Collins, 1909,
p. 216. Miss Wilkinson; Harrington Sound, March, Hervey. Ap-
parently not common; not easy to distinguish from forms of U.
Lactuca var. rigida, but generally of darker color, especially near the
margin of the linear, dentate or crenate lobes; the frond is thicker
than in most forms of U. Lactuca, and the cells more elongate verti-
cally.
Protoderma Kiitzing.
P. marinum Reinke, 1889, p. 81; Collins, 1909, p. 217. On pebbles,
North Shore near Inlet, Aug., Collins. Probably common everywhere
but inconspicuous.
Family CYLINDROCAPSACEAE.
Cylindrocapsa Reinsch.
*C. involuta Reinsch, 1867, p. 66, PI. VI, fig. 1; P. B.-A., No.
2067; C. geminella Wolle, 1887, p. 104, PI. XCI, figs. 1-17; Collins,
1909, p. 222; C. geminella var. minor Hansgirg, 1886, p. 224, fig. 122;
Hormospora geminella, Wolle, 1877, p. 140. In artificial reservoir near
Spanish Rock, among Rhizoclonium hieroglyphicum etc., Feb., Hervey.
In explanation of the synonymy just given, we must go into a little
detail. The genus Cylindrocapsa and the species C. involuta were
founded by Reinsch on vegetative characters only; the fructification
was discovered by Cienkowski, described and well figured by him, 1876,
p. 560, PI. IX, figs. 50-65. Wolle, 1877, p. 140, described Hormospora
geminella, vegetative characters only; in 1887, p. 104, Cylindrocapsa
geminella with description of fructification. PI. XCI, figs. 1-17 is
supposed to represent the latter, but is not very instructive. No
reference is made to Hormospora geminella. Hansgirg, 1886,7 p. 223,
7 The date on the first title of the Prodromus is 1886; a second title, intro-
ducing a “Schlusswort” with separate paging, is dated 1888; under C. gemi-
nella there is a reference to the author’s “Phyc. u. algol. Studien, 1887.”36
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
records for Bohemia “C. geminella Wolle (Hormospora geminella
Wolle Bull, of the Tor. Bot. Club 1877)” and describes var. minor.
The diameter of cells given for the typical C. geminella, 20-24 p, does
not agree with Wolle’s figures, 16-21 yu for Hormospora, 14-16/x for
Cylindrocapsa, but are nearer C. involuta Reinsch, 23-30 p. Hans-
girg’s var. minor is said to be 12-15 p, diam., exceptionally 18-25 p, in
very young filaments 9-12 p, which would certainly include Wolle’s
C. geminella. On comparing all the descriptions and figures, we can
find no real distinction between C. involuta, C. geminella and C.
geminella var. minor; and in the Bermuda material we can match
practically every figure. We have therefore used the oldest name.
Family OEDOGONLACEAE.
Oedogonium Link.
1. Oogonium with a, whorl of conical projections.	3. O. Itzigsohnii.
1. Oogonium without whorl of projections.	2.
2. Filaments 14-20 y diam.	1. O. Pringsheimii.
2. Filaments seldom over 12 y diam., usually in stellate clusters.
2. O. consociatum.
*1. O. Pringsheimii Cramer ex Hirn, 1900, p. 170, PI. XXVII,
fig. 155; Collins, 1909, p. 246; P. B.-A., No. 1861. In ditch in Devon-
shire Marsh, April, Collins.
*2. O. consociatum sp. nov. Plate I, figs. 1-4; P. B.-A., No.
2068. Diocum (?), macrandrium; oogonia solitaria, globosa vel
depresso-globosa, operculata, rima mediana vel subsuperiore, angusta
sed distincta; oospora globosa vel depresso-globosa, oogonium im-
plente, membrana laevi; cellula basali depresso-globosa; cellulis vege-
tativis plus minusve distincte clavatis.
Dioecious (?), macrandrous; oogonia single, globose to depressed-
globose, operculate, division median to superior, narrow but distinct;
oospore globose to depressed globose, filling the oogonium, membrane
smooth; basal cell depressed-globose; vegetative cells more or less
distinctly clavate.
6-12 (20) y diam., 1-4 diam. long.
28 y “	26-28y
26 y “	24-26y
veg. cell, female,
oog.
oosp.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
37
In an artificial fresh water reservoir near Spanish Rock, Jan., Hervey,
Aug., Collins. Type in herb. Collins, No. 7812.
The basal cell is depressed-globose, 20-24 p diam., 12-16 p high;
the first cell above is 6-8 p diam., 2-3 diam. long; the filament may
continue of the same diameter, or may increase up to 12 p, the cells
1-2 diam. long; occasionally the diam. reaches 20 /u, the cells about
one diam. long and moniliform; at any point a larger filament may
suddenly change to the smaller diameter, a cell of 8-10 p following a
cell of 12-20 p. Oogonia were not uncommon, but were very gener-
ally abortive; in the few instances where they seemed normal they
were regularly globose, and contained a globose oospore, quite filling
the oogonium, of orange yellow color. The division of the oogonium
was median or slightly higher; no antheridia were seen.
The study being made from formalin material, the development of
the zoospores could not be followed, but they must have been pro-
duced in immense numbers. Cells of Pithophora kewensis were seen,
completely covered with zoospores which had affixed themselves, but
still retained the spherical form, and were 16-24 p diam.; the appear-
ance was much like that of a filament of Lyngbya covered with Xeno-
coccus, as shown in Bornet & Thuret, 1880, PI. XXVI, fig. 1. The
zoospores seemed to secrete some adhesive substance from the cell
wall, forming a sort of collar underneath the cell, extending beyond
the diameter of the cell, so as to be visible from above as well as from
the side. Something similar is seen in Chantransia collopoda Rosen-
vinge, 1898, fig. 10, A. As the densely packed zoospores germinate,
the host soon becomes indistinguishable, the sporelings forming a
bristly mass, to the filaments of which more zoospores attach them-
selves, adhering to the young Oedogonium filaments in the same way
as to the Pithophora. It seems probable, however, that often the
zoospores adhere to each other in a larger or smaller rounded mass;
when they germinate the radiating filaments form an echinate body,
which is different from anything we find recorded for the genus, except
the figures of 0. pachyandrium in Wolle, 1887, PI. LXXIII, figs. 38 and
39.
These figures though rude and in no way showing the evolution of
the cluster, give a fair idea of the appearance. These masses often
contain hundreds, probably thousands of spores, and before germi-
nation has much progressed, look like bits of fish roe. In the material
of No. 7812 the Pithophora appeared to be fairly smothered by the
Oedogonium, many of the cells dead; the greater part of the spores
were attached to Oedogonium filaments or to each other; in No. 736838
COLLINS AND HERVET.
material the Oedogonium was less abundant, and except a few loose
clusters was all on the Pithophora, which was still uninjured; Rhizo-
clonium hieroglyphicum was much more common in this material than
Pithophora, but was quite free from the Oedogonium. The nearest
relative would seem to be 0. inversum Wittr., which has capitate cells
of approximately the same size, and a broadened basal cell, but has
cells uniformly 12-14 p diam., and up to S diam. long; rather larger
oospores, with quite low division; the basal cell is attached by the flat
lower surface, while in 0. consociatum the lower surface is convex,
resting in the ring by which it is affixed to the host.
*3. O. Itzigsohxii De Bary ex Hirn, 1900, p. 177, PI. XXYIII,
fig. 167; Collins, 1912, p. 86; P. B.-A., No. 1860. In ditch, Devon-
shire Marsh, April, Collins.
Sterile filaments of at least two other species have been found in
collections from a roadside pool near Old Ferry Road, Aug., and from
a ditch in South Shore marshes, Sept., Collins.
Familt CHAETOPHORACEAE.
Diplochaete Collins.
D. solitaria Collins, 1901, p. 242; 1909, p. 278, fig. 99. Occa-
sional individuals on Laurencia and other algae, never in any abun-
dance.
Blastophysa Reinke.
B. rhizopus Reinke, 1889a, p. 27, PI. XXIII; Borgesen, 1911, p. 151,
fig. 13; 1913, p. 8, fig. 2; Collins, 1912, p. 99, fig. 12; P. B.-A., No.
1905. South Shore, Jan., Hervey; marsh near racecourse, Aug.,
Collins. At the South Shore in the basal layer of a growth of Sphace-
laria tribuloides; at the marsh on Ruppia maritima, among other small
algae; in Ulva Lactuca, Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins.
Phaeophila Hauck.
P. floridearum Hauck, 1876, p. 57; 1885, p. 464, fig. 200. Harris
Bay, Jan., Hervey. This minute plant occurred among various other
algae from a pool, the whole forming a thin, crisp, light green incrus-
tation of about the consistency of some thin, encrusting sponge. ItTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
39
is probably not uncommon, but is easily overlooked, as it can be found
only by microscopic examination. It has been found in small quan-
tity in Halymenia bermudensis, Grasmere, March, Hervey.
1.	E. viride (Reinke) Lagerheim, 1883, p. 74; Collins, 1909, p. 279;
P. B.-A., No. 2006; Entocladia viridis Reinke, 1879, p. 476, PI. VI,
In the cell wall of various algae, common.
2.	E. filiforme sp. nov. Filamentis lateraliter vel dichotome
ramosis, cellulis vegetativis cylindricis, prope apices circa 2 y diam.,
longitudine diametrum pluries superante; inferne ad 6 y diam., longi-
tudine diametrum duplo superante, forma plus minusve irregulari;
quavis cellula matura in sporangium mutata, circumscriptione cir-
culari supra visa, 6-12 y diam., depresso-hemisphaerica lateraliter
visa, membrana crassa; prolongatione papilliformi per membranam
plantae hopsitis protrusa, mox aperta ad exitum sporarum (?); sporis
(?) 2 y diam., in cellula paucis; setis, cellulae continuis, haud raro
membranam hospitis penetrantibus, basi circa 4 y diam., mox ad 2 y
attenuatis, neque bulbosis nec constrictis; chromatophora parietali,
pyrenoideo unico, magno, munita.
Filaments branched laterally or dichotomously; vegetative cells
cylindrical, near apex about 2 y diam. and several diam. long, below
up to 6 y diam. and 2 diam long, more or less irregular; any cell of the
older portion changing to a sporangium, circular in outline seen from
above, 6-12 y diam., depressed hemispherical in side view, with
thick wall; a small papilla-like extension passing through the wall of
the host, then opening to permit the exit of the spores (?); spores
about 2 y diam., few in a cell; bristles continuous with the cell also
occasionally passing through the wall of the host, the base about 4 y
diam., quickly tapering to 2 y, no constriction or bulb. In wall of
Lyngbya confervoides, Bailey’s Bay, Jan. 18, 1913, Hervey. Type in
Collins herbarium, No. 7419a.
The older part is not unlike E. viridis, but the long, very slender,
often quite straight filiform branches distinguish it from that as well
as from other species; these branches seem usually to run lengthwise
of the host, dividing mostly dichotomously; the older cells increase
rapidly in width, and send off many branches at right angles, often
Endoderma Lagerheim.
1. Cells mostly irregular.
1. Cells mostly cylindrical.
1. E. viride.
2. E. filiforme.40
COLLIXS AXD HERVEY.
in secund series, passing around the host; in older plants the branching
may be quite dense, with no regularity discernible. The wall is very
thin in the younger cells, but becomes quite thick in the older; the
chromatophore is dense, and nearly or quite covers the wall. Bristles
appear to be rare, and those we saw were short, evidently broken off.
In the oldest parts of the plant, most of the cells had become sporangia,
many of them had emptied, and only one was seen containing spores;
these appeared spherical, but no details could be made out from the
formalin material. The host has thick, distinctly laminate walls,
and the Endoderma seems to push apart the laminae without difficulty;
in one case two plants were seen, one outside the other, separated by
one of the laminae of the host. In another case a plant was seen
quite on the outside of the host wall; in this the cells were quite small
and spherical; it seems probable that the lamina of the host under
which they grew had peeled off, and the cells took the unusual form
on release of the pressure.
Pringsheimia Reinke.
P. scutata Reinke, 1889a, p. 33, PL XXV; Collins, 1909, p. 288,
fig. 95. On Wurdemannia, Gibbet Island, Aug., Collins; on Ulva,
Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins.
Microthamnion Xageli.
*M. Kuetzingiaxoi Xageli in Kiitzing, 1849, p. 352; Hazen, 1902,
p. 191, PL XXVI, fig. 1; PL XXVII, figs. 2-4; Collins, 1909, p. 294.
Among Tetraspora lubrica, on dead leaves in ditch in Devonshire
Marsh, Dec., Collins.
Urococcus Kiitzing.
*U. ixsigxis (Hass.) Kiitzing, 1849, p. 207; Wolle, 1887, p. 201,
PL CXXIII, figs. 11-12; Collins, 1909, p. 306; P. B.-A., Xo. 1862;
Haematoeoccus insignis Hassall, 1845, p. 324, PL LXXX, fig. 6.
Among Sphagnum in Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins.
Gloiococcus A. Braun.
*G. mucosus A. Braun, 1851, p. 170; Collins, 1909, p. 310, fig. 122.
Among Oedogonium etc., in ditch in Devonshire Marsh, April, Collins.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
41
Family TRENTEPOHLIACEAE.
Trentepohlia Martius.
*T. aurea (L.) Martius, 1817, p. 351; Collins, 1909, p. 316; Byssus
aureus Linnaeus, 1753, p. 1168. Common on shaded cliffs all over
the islands, forming little orange-colored tufts of soft filaments, some-
times confluent and covering considerable spaces.
Family CLADOPHORACEAE.
Chaetomorpha Kiitzing.
1.	Filaments under 100 m diam.
1.	Filaments over 100 m diam.
2.	Filaments attached, not over 25 m diam.
2.	Filaments not attached, 40-70 m diam.
3.	Filaments 500 m diam. or more.
3.	Filaments 400 m diam. or less.
4.	Light green; filaments 200-250 m diam.
4.	Dark green; filaments 125-175 m diam.
2.
3.
1.	C. minima.
2.	C. gracilis.
5. C. crassa.
4.
4. C. Linum.
3. C. brachygona.
1. C. mimima sp. nov.; Plate I, figs. 5-7; P. B.-A., No. 2007.
Filamentis disco affixis, cylindricis vel plus minusve clavatis, 10-20 u
diam., ad nodos interdum constrictis; cellulis 2-4 diam. longis,
membrana crassa distincte laminata; zoosporis (?) in quavis cellula
formatis, per foramine laterale liberatis.
Filaments attached by a disk, cylindrical or more or less clavate,
10-20 ju diam., nodes sometimes constricted; cells 2-4 diam. long,
wall distinctly laminate; zoospores (?) formed in any cell, escaping
by a lateral opening in the wall. On fronds of Codium, Cladophora etc.
The smallest species yet known in this genus; C. californica Collins,
P. B.-A., No. 664 was the smallest heretofore known in the attached
state, and its filaments average about twice the diameter of the present
species; as regards length, the contrast is even more striking, as in C.
calif ornica the fronds reach a length of a decimeter, while in C. minima
5 mm. is the longest observed. It was first found growing on the
rounded ends of the utricles of Codium tomentosum, sometimes singly,
sometimes many individuals close together. Being quite imper-42
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
ceptible to the eye, it was noticed only in the examination of the
Codium material preserved in formalin, so that nothing can be said
as to the characters of the supposed zoospores; everything was how-
ever similar to the formation and emission of zoospores in the larger
and better known species of Chaetomorpha. Emptied cells were
common, sometimes every cell of a filament being fertile, even the
basal cell; in one instance a filament consisted of a single cell, which
had emptied itself through the small round lateral opening. In the
form of the cells, thick laminate wall, dense chromatophore with many
pyrenoids, the plant is a microscopic copy of forms like C. Linum.
Rather curiously, it is the only attached form we find in the islands.
The type is in the Collins herbarium.
2.	C. gracilis Kiitzing, 1845, p. 203; 1853, p. 17, PI. LII, fig. 1
P. B.-A., No. 2162. Hungry Bay, in dense masses, April, Collins.
3.	C. brachygona Harvey, 1858, p. 87, PI. XLYI. A; Collins,
1909, p. 325. Fish pond, Walsingham, Nov., Hervey, lying loose on
the bottom of the pond.
4.	C. Linum (FI. Dan.) Kiitzing, 1845, p. 204; C. aerea forma
Linum Collins, 1909, p. 325; P. B.-A., No. 1S63. Conferva Linum
Flora Danica, Vol. Y, p. 4, PI. DCCLXXI, 1782; Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. CL. A; Moseley; Rein, as C. geniculata; Hungry Bay, Pool by
Moore’s calabash tree, April, Collins; Walsingham, Causeway, Nov.,
Tucker’s Town, Dec., Hervey. Common and variable.
5.	C. crassa (Ag.) Kiitzing, 1845, p. 204; 1853, p. 19, PI. LIX,
fig. 11; P. B.-A., No. 1864; Conferva crassa Agardh, 1S24, p. 99.
Kemp, as Hormotrichum; Pool near Walsingham, April, Lagoon near
Fairyland, Aug., Collins. Not always easily distinguishable from
C. Linum; study of the various forms in their natural condition if
continued over a considerable time, might lead to considerable re-
arrangement.
Rhizocloxium Kiitzing.
1.	Cells rarely under 30/i diam., wall thick, often lamellate.	2.
1.	Cells rarely over 30 n diam., usually 10-25 /i.	3.
2.	Filaments 50-100 ^ diam., usually with frequent short branches.
4. R. Hookeri.
2.	Filaments 33—14 n diam. branching from basal cell only.
5. R. crassipellitum.
3.	In fresh or slightly brackish water.	2. R. hieroglyphicum.
3.	In salt water.	4.
4.	Cells 20-25 n diam.	3. R. riparium.
4.	Cells 10-15 m diam.	1. R. Kemeri.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
43
1. R. Kerneri Stockmayer, 1890, p. 582; Collins, 1909, p. 329.
Forming a coating on mangroves, Hungry Bay, April, Collins.
*2. R. hieroglyphicum (Ag.) Kiitzing, 1845, p. 206; Collins,
1909, p. 329; P. B.-A., No. 2009; Conferva hieroglyphica Agardh,
1827, p. 636; Pool in rock by Old Ferry landing, Aug.; ditch in South
Shore marshes, Sept., Collins; artificial reservoir near Spanish Rock,
Feb., Hervey. Mostly the typical form, but with some var. macro-
meres Wittr.
3.	R. riparium (Roth) Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CCXXXVIII;
Collins, 1909, p. 327; Conferva riparia Roth, 1806, p. 216; Hungry
Bay, April, Collins; Causeway, Nov., Hervey. On mangroves and
other objects between tide marks; apparently not very common;
mostly the form known as var. implexum (Dillw.) Rosenvinge.
4.	R. Hookeri Kiitzing, 1849, p. 383; 1853, p. 21, PI. LXVII,
fig. Ill; Collins, 1909, p. 330. Shore of Harrington Sound, April;
Hungry Bay, May, Collins; Walsingham, Jan., Hervey. A rather
coarse species, varying in diameter of filaments from 50 to 100 ^t;
the same filament is not infrequently double the diameter in one part
that it is in another. The branches are mostly short, but have dense
chromatophores the same as in the cells of the filament. Beside the
localities given, it occurs on the walls of caves along high water mark,
and on shaded sides of quarries, and even in reservoirs of quite fresh
water.
5.	R. crassipellitum W. & G. S. West, 1897, p. 35; Collins, 1909,
p. 330. In small pools, Ely’s harbor, April, Hervey.
Cladophora Kiitzing.
1.	Fresh water.	19. C. fracta.
1.	Marine.	2.
	2. With distinction of prostrate and erect filaments.	16. C. Howei.
	2. No distinct prostrate filaments.	3.
3.	Forming a low matted expansion.	4.
3.	Erect.	5.
	4. Filaments 100-150 y diam. throughout.	17. C. repens.
	4. Filaments 70-100 y diam. below, 60-80 y above.	18. C. frascatii.
5.	Main filaments 150 y diam. and upwards.	6.
5.	Main filaments seldom reaching 150 y.	10.
	6. Lower cells 10 diam. long or more.	14. C. catenifera.
	6. Lower cells less than 10 diam. long.	7.
7.	Diam. of filaments about the same throughout.	15. C. fuliginosa.
7.	Terminal divisions markedly smaller than main axes.	8.44
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
4.
7.
8.	Ramuli clustered.	10. C. fascicularis.
8.	Ramuli not clustered.	9-
9.	Ultimate ramuli very short, often of a single cell; cells in ramuh ovoid,
1-2 diam. long.	8. C. brachyclona.
9.	Ultimate ramuli not extremely short, cylindrical or nearly so.
13. C. utriculosa.
10.	Cells generally with a sharp constriction near base. 3. C. constricta.
10.	Cells without regular constrictions.
11.	Fronds floating except at earliest stages.
11.	Fronds always attached during active growth.
12.	Main filaments 30-60 /i diam.
12.	Main filaments, 100-150 ju diam.
13.	Main filaments distinctly angled or flexuous.
13.	Main filaments straight or nearly so.
14.	Pale yellow-green; cells 6-8 diam. long.
14.	Light to bright green; cells 2-6 diam. long.
15.	Main filaments 60 m diam. or less.
15.	Main filaments 80 ^ diam. or more.
16.	Some branches decumbent, attaching by rhizoids.
16.	Xo decumbent branches.
17.	Color pale, glossy, substance soft.
17.	Color darker, substance crisp.
18.	Cells 3-5 diam. long; ramuh scattered.
18.	Cells mostly 1-2 diam. long; ramuh closer and seriate.
12. C. rigidula.
2.
11.
12.
13.
C. crispula.
C. expansa.
14.
15.
C. luteola.
C. flexuosa.
C. dehcatula.
16.
5. C. eorallicola.
17.
9. C. crystallina.
18.
11. C. piscinae.
1.
1.	C. delicatula Montagne, 1850, p. 302; Kiitzing, 1856, p. 1,
PI. I, fig. 2; Collins, 1909, p. 337; P. B.-A., Xo. 2070. Ely’s Harbor,
April, Hervey. Some of the plants were young and vigorous, reaching
a length of 10 cm.; others were evidently old, the main branches with
laminate walls up to 15 n thick, and covered with minute epiphytes;
new proliferous growth was very abundant, with delicate, thin walls,
and generally like the younger plants.
2.	C. luteola Harvey, 1858, p. 81; Collins, 1909, p. 338. Rein;
Merriman in Farlow herb. We have not collected this species, and
only these two records exist for Bermuda.
3.	C. constricta Collins, 1909a, p. 19, PI. LXXVIII, figs. 4-5;
1909, p. 339. Hungry Bay, Feb., Hervey. Not over 3 cm. high,
while the original material from Jamaica reached a height of 10 cm.
The Bermuda plant occasionally sends out a very long, slender rhizoid
from one of the lower cells; this has not been seen in the Jamaica
material.
4.	C. crispula Vickers, 1905, p. 56; 1908, p. 19, PI. XVI; Collins,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
45
1909, p. 339; Borgesen, 1913, p. 24, fig. 15. P. B.-A., No. 2011.
Harrington Sound, March, Hervey. To this species we have referred,
with some doubt, a form found in floating masses, which agrees in size
and length of cells, and in manner of branching, with C. crispula, but
does not form contorted, rope-like strands. It seems to us that these
may be a later development, and that our plant represents an earlier
stage. Similar conditions are well known in species of Rhizoclonium
and Chaetomorpha.
5.	C. coeallicola Borgesen, 1913, p. 21, figs. 11-12; P. B.-A.,
No. 2010. Tucker’s Town, Dec., Hervey. Growing matted among
old fronds of Bryopsis; the slender rhizoids characteristic of the
species are well developed, and occasionally branch.
6.	C. flexuosa (Griff.) Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CCCLIII; Collins,
1909, p. 339; Conferva flexuosa Griffiths in Wyatt, Alg. Danm.,
No. 227. Gibbet Island, June, Howe; North Shore, Tucker’s Town,
April, Inlet, Aug., Collins. A delicate plant but often reaching a
length of 2 dm. Late in its season it becomes unattached and may
be found in large floating masses, in Castle Harbor and similar places.
7.	C. expansa (Mert.) Kiitzing, 1853, p. 27, PI. XCIX, fig. 1;
Collins, 1909, p. 340; Conferva expansa Mertens in Jurgens, Algae
Aquaticae, Dec. V. Brackish pool between North Shore and Harring-
ton Sound, April, Collins. Forming loose floating masses, sometimes
pure, sometimes in company with Lyngbya and Enteromorpha. In the
latter case the algae form a felted stratum on the surface of the
water so firm that the shore birds may be seen in large flocks, walking
on it as if it were land, while they pick the small animals living among
it. Whether this plant is the same as C. heteronema Kiitz., as described
by Borgesen, 1913, p. 25, may be a question. C. flavescens Harvey,
1846-51, PL CCXCVIII, Collins, 1909, p. 339, is certainly distinct,
but we have not found it here; it seems to be a more northern form.
Reinbold, 1893, p. 196, considers Conferva expansa of Jurgens Alg.
Aquat. as distinct from Cladophora fracta forma marina, and refers
for details to Farlow, 1881, p. 56; but the C. fracta forma marina of
Farlow is a plant of much smaller filaments than the Hauck plant of
the same name. We have found a plant in Harrington Sound, that
could, without violence, pass for a slender form of C. fracta forma
marina of Hauck, but it seems to us to fit equally well, if not better,
in C. expansa, as we understand it.
8.	C. brachyclona Montagne in Kiitzing, 1849, p. 394; 1853,
p. 27, PI. XCVI, fig. II; Collins, 1909, p. 344. A single specimen
from Miss Peniston, without definite locality, is the only American46
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
record for this Mediterranean plant. The specimen is well developed
and characteristic.
9.	C. crtstallixa (Roth) Kiitzing, 1845, p. 213; 1854, p. 4,
PI. XIX, fig. II; Collins, 1909, p. 342; P. B.-A., Xo. 1865; Conferva
crystallina Roth, 1797, p. 196. Rein, as C. glaucescens; Gravelly-
Bay, Feb., Dec., Hervey; Himgry Bay, April, Xorth Shore, Harring-
ton Sound, May, Collins. A handsome plant, soft and silky, growing
on rocks on somewhat exposed shores, more commonly and luxuriantly
in quiet water, where it sometimes becomes detached and continues
growing in the floating state.
10.	C. fascicttlaris (Mert.) Kiitzing, 1843, p. 268; Vickers, 1905,
p. 56; 190S, p. 18, PI. XIII; Collins, 1909, p. 345; P. B.-A. Xo.
2163; Conferva fascicularis Mertens in Agardh, 1824, p. 114. Har-
rington Sound, Feb., Hervey. A quite variable species, common
from Florida to South America, but found only once in Bermuda.
11.	C. piscinae sp. nov. P. B.-A., Xo. 2165. Filamentis pri-
mariis 100 y diam.; ramulis ultimis 50 p; cellularum longitudine
diametrum 3-5-plo superante; nodis haud constrictis; cellula ter-
minali rotundata vel truncata, longitudine cellulas ceteras non super-
ante; ramificatione infeme per dichotomias patentes, distantes,
aequales, cellula dichotomias gerente plerumque sed non semper
ceteris breviore; ramis supeme ramulos distantes, patentes, ferenti-
bus; colore laeteviridi; chromatophora laxe reticulata; substantia
subcrispa, nec fragili.
Main filaments 100 y diam.; ultimate ramuli 50 p; length of cells
3-5 diam., nodes not constricted; terminal cell rounded or truncate,
not longer than other cells; branching below by wide, equal, distant
forkings, the cell bearing the forking usually but not always shorter
than the others; above with distant patent ramuli; color light green;
chromatophore a loose network; substance somewhat crisp but not
fragile. In an old fishpool at Godet’s Island, Xov. 30, 1915. Type
in Collins herbarium, Xo. 8427.
The water in this pool is quite still, the tide having access only by
small openings in the wall. The plant formed a loose mass, over one
meter in diameter, the lower part caught on coral; the appearance was
quite that of a loose Spirogyra. Though crisp to the touch, the fronds
collapsed immediately on being taken from the water; the living plant
is of a light green color, but this becomes dark in drying. There is
some similarity in the characters above to those of the description of
C. McieaUana Harv., but that is a stouter and stiffer plant, with differ-
ent habit. C. patens Kiitz. has cells 4-8 diam. long, larger main fila-THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
47
lents and smaller ramuli than C. piscinae. C. crystallina, the most
nearly related Bermuda species, has larger main filaments, smaller
and more closely set ramuli, longer cells, more fasciculate habit, softer
substance, and does not become dark in drying.
12. C. rigidula sp. nov. Filamentis primariis circa 120 y diam.,
secundi ordinis 100 y, cellulis ultimis 80 y; cellularum longitudine
diametrum 1-2-plo superante; nodis haud constrictis; cellula termi-
nali plerumque longiore, interdum ad 3 diam., rotundata vel subacuta;
ramificatione prope basin per dichotomias patentes, primo approxi-
matas, deinde distantes; ramis partis superioris frondis longis, rectis,
ramulos gerentibus fere vel omnino sub angulo recto egredientes, dis-
tantes sparsosque inf erne, in seriebus secundis prope apicem; colore
viridi diluto obscuro; chromatophora subtiliter reticulata, pyrenoi-
deos multos, minutos, nitidos monstrante; substantia firma crispaque.
Main filaments about 120 y diam., secondary 100 y, ultimate cells
80 y; length of cells 1-2 diam., nodes not constricted; terminal cell
usually longer, sometimes 3 diam., rounded or subacute; branching
at base by broad forkings, at first frequent, later distant; branches
in upper half of frond long, straight, with ramuli nearly or quite at
right angles, distant and scattered below, near the tips in secund
series; color rather dull light green; chromatophore a fine network
with very many small bright pyrenoids; substance firm and crisp.
In a stone tank above the bridge at Fairyland, Dec. 13, 1915. Type
in Collins herbarium, No. 8513.
Though occurring in a station similar to that of C. piscinae, and in
some points resembling the latter, it has seemed to us better to con-
sider it a distinct species than to combine the two by too vague a
description. C. piscinae, though crisp, promptly collapses when
taken from the water, C. rigidula long keeps its shape and stiffness;
the distinction is as marked as that between Polysiphonia violacea
and P. fastigiata. In C. piscinae the cells are seldom under three or
over five diam. long; in C. rigidula they are seldom over two diam.,
often only one diam. for a good part of the frond; the terminal cell is,
however, often three diam. long. In both the ultimate ramuli are
patent, often at a right angle; in C. piscinae they are scattered and
usually distant, in C. rigidula closer and often in secund series. The
differences can hardly be due to the station, as each grew in a stone
tank, sea water going in and out with the tide, but with no active
current, and no disturbance of the surface. On the other hand it has
some resemblance to the plant from Harrington Sound which we
distributed, P. B.-A., No. 2014, as C. utriculosa, but is still further48
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
removed from the typical Mediterranean form. In the latter the
cells below are 6-S diam. long, 2-4 diam. above, while in the present
species only the terminal cell is usually over 2 diam. long. It seems
to us safer to treat it as a new species than to put it in a species whose
typical form, at least, is so distinct.
13.	C. utriculosa Kiitzing, 1S43, p. 269; 1853, p. 26, PI. XCIV,
fig. I; Collins, 1909, p. 346; P. B.-A., No. 2014. Harrington Sound,
Wadsworth, March; same station, Oct., Hervey. A common Medi-
terranean and West India species. Wadsworth’s plants are rather
more slender than the typical, but otherwise quite the same. The
material collected by us in October formed loosely floating masses,
evidently a later condition; all branching was wide; the dichotomies
in the lower part about 120°, the ramuli, usually quite short, about 90°.
14.	C. catenifera Kiitzing, 1849, p. 390; 1853, p. 24, PL
LXXXIII, fig. I; Collins, 1909, p. 347; P. B.-A., No. 2069. Kemp in
herb., as Cladophora sp.?; Howe; Red Bay, St. David’s Island, June,
cave at Gravelly Bay, Feb., April, Dingle Bay, March, Hervey.
The most striking of our species of the genus, with stout stem and
main branches, very long cells, firm lustrous cell wall. Bermuda
plants are 10-20 cm. high; at Jamaica it sometimes reaches a height
of 50 cm. In February only very small plants were found.
15.	C. fuliginosa Kiitzing, 1849, p. 415; Collins, 1909, p. 348;
P. B.-A., No. 2012. Kemp, St. George’s, unnamed specimen in
herb.; Harris Bay, Jan., Apr., Gravelly Bay, Dec., Inlet, Dec.,
Hervey; Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins. A coarse species, generally
distributed and common; always infested with the fungus Blodgettia
Borneti Wright. The combination of the two forms the Blodgettia
confervoides Harvey, 1858, p. 48, PI. XLV. C.
16.	C. Howei Collins, 1909a, p. 18, PI. LXXYIII, fig. 1; 1909,
p. 349. Tide pools, Gibbet Island, June, 1900, Howe. The short,
subsimple filaments arise from a dense mass of prostrate filaments, a
character found in no other of our species. Gibbet Island is the type,
and so far as known, the only, station for the species; so for the pres-
ent it may be considered as endemic.
17.	C. repens (J. Ag.) Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CCXXXVI;
P. B.-A., No. 2071. Conferva repens J. G. Agardh, 1842, p. 13;
Aegagropila repens Kiitzing, 1854, p. 15, PI. LXX, fig. II. Gravelly
Bay, Jan., Feb., Hervey. A low, densely matted plant of dark color,
not however, with prostrate and erect filaments clearly differentiated.
The plant from California distributed under this name as P. B.-A.,
No. 727 has since proved to be C. trichotoma (Ag.) Kiitz.; the present
record is therefore the first for America.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
49
18. C. frascatii sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2164. Humilis, 1-2
cm. alta; ramificatione irregulari, inf erne plerumque dichotoma,
dichotomiis patentibus; superne partim conformi, sed etiam laterali,
patente, saepe rectangulari; ramulis ultimis 1-3-cellularibus, prope
vel omnino rectangularibus, saepe secundis latere exteriore rami
recurvati; cellulis inferne 70-100 /x diam., 2-5 diam. longis, cylin-
dricis; ramulorum 60-80 n diam., 2-3 diam. longis, leviter inflatis,
nodis constrictis; cellula terminali obtusa.
Low, 1-2 cm. high, branching irregular, below mostly dichotomous,
with wide forkings; above partly similar, partly lateral, patent, often
at a right angle; ultimate ramuli 1-3-celled, nearly or quite at right
angles, often secund on the outer side of a recurved branch. Cells
below 70-100/x diam., 2-5 diam. long, cylindrical; in the ramuli
60-80 /x diam., 2-3 diam. long, somewhat swollen with constricted
nodes; terminal cell obtuse. In matted tufts in tide pools near
Frascati Hotel, Jan. 11, 1914, A. B. Hervey. Type in Collins herb.
Growing in similar places to C. repens, and forming similar matted
tufts, but distinct by the smaller dimensions and the lateral, secund,
submoniliform ramuli.
*19. C. fracta (FI. Dan.) Kutzing, 1843, p. 263; 1854, p. 10,
PL L; Collins, 1909, p. 353; P. B.-A., No. 2013. Conferva fracta
Flora Danica, Vol. V., PI. DCCCCXLVI, 1782. Artificial Reservoir
of fresh water near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey. Some of the
material is in a vigorously growing state; some in a hibernating state,
cells with thick walls, dense contents, few branches.
Cladophoropsis Borgesen.
C. membranacea (Ag.) Borgesen, 1905, p. 288, figs. 8-13; 1913,
p. 47, fig. 33; Collins, 1909, p. 362; P. B.-A., No. 1866; Conferva
membranacea Agardh, 1824, p. 120. North Shore, Jan., Tucker’s
Town, March, Harris Bay, Shelly Bay, April, Hervey; Inlet, May,
Hungry Bay, July, Collins. A very common species, forming cushions
on rocks, and on and under mangroves; in still pools it is sometimes
also in floating masses.
Pithophora Wittrock.
*P. kewensis Wittrock, 1877, p. 52, PL I, fig. 8; PI. II, figs. 1-12;
PL III, figs. 1-9; PL IV, figs. 2-11; PL V, figs. 9-10; Collins, 1912,
p. 98; P. B.-A., No. 2072. With Rhizoclonium etc. in reservoir of
fresh water near Spanish Rock, Dec., Hervey.50
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Anadyomene Lamouroux.
A. stellata (Wulf.) Agardh, 1822, p. 400; Vickers, 1908, p. 21,
PI. XXI; P. B.-A., Xo. 1906; A. flabellata Harvey, 1S58, p. 49, PI.
XLIY. A; Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., XTo. 172; Ulva stellata Wulfen
in Jacquin, 1786, p. 351. Common in shallow water everywhere
about the islands, and dredged down to 18 m.; in quiet places as large,
thin fronds, in exposed places masses of short, irregular, densely
packed fronds. Apparently equally common at all times of the year.
Aug. 11, 1913, in the cave at Agar’s Island, young plants were found
growing on the rocks between tides, forming a continuous coating,
the individual plants not over 1 mm. high. In some individuals the
lamina was beginning to form, but most of the plants resembled young
Cladophora, except that the branching was in one plane. There was
a distinct filiform stipe, attached at the base by slender- coralloid
projections.
Dictyosphaeria Decaisne.
D. favulosa (Ag.) Decaisne, 1842, p. 32; Borgesen, 1913, p. 33,
figs. 20-22; Collins, 1909, p. 367, fig. 137; P. B.-A., Xo. 2015; Vdonia
favulosa Agardh, 1822, p. 432. Harrington Sound, Farlow; South
Shore, Jan., Feb., Hervey; Hungry Bay, Tucker’s Town, April,
Reef, Ely’s Harbor, Aug., Collins. Grows both in sheltered and in
exposed stations, perhaps more generally in the latter.
Family GOMOXTIACEAE.
Gomontia Bomet & Flahault.
G. polyrhiza (Lagerheim) Bornet & Flahault, 1888a, p. 164; 1889,
p. CLVIII, PI. YI-VII; Collins, 1909, p. 370, fig. 135; Codiolum poly-
rhizum Lagerheim, 1885, p. 22. Common in dead shells of mollusks
along the shore, giving them a more or less deep grass-green color.
Family VALOXIACEAE.
Yalonia Ginnani.
1. Fronds bullate, unbranched.	1. V. ventricosa.
1. Fronds branched.	2.
2. Branches in whorls.	4. V. pachynema.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
51
2.	Branches not whorled.
3.	Cells spherical, ovoid or pyriform.
3. Cells cylindrical to clavate.
2. V. macrophysa.
3. V. utricularis.
3.
1.	V. ventricosa J. G. Agardh, 1886, p. 96; Vickers, 1905, p. 56;
1908,	p. 21, PI. XXIII. A; Collins, 1909, p. 373; Borgesen, 1913, p.
27, fig. 16. July, Kemp; Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins. At Gravelly
Bay this plant was washed ashore; the plants were 1-3 cm. diam.,
smooth and glassy, spherical or slightly ovoid. Murray states that
it is sometimes as large as a hen’s egg.
2.	V. macrophysa Kiitzing, 1843, p. 307; 1856, p. 30, PI.
LXXXVII, fig. Ill; P. B.-A., No. 1867; V. utricularis Alg. Am.-Bor.
Exsicc., No. 171, not of Agardh. Harrington Sound, Walsingham,
Jan., Tucker’s Town, Dec., Hervey; pool near Moore’s calabash
tree, Ducking Stool, April, Ely’s Harbor, July, Gravelly Bay, Gibbet
Island, Aug., Fairyland, Nov., Collins. Grows usually in dense masses
sometimes as large as a man’s head; the individual plants are only
loosely attached, and are easily separable; under water it usually
shows a very brilliant iridescence. The turgor in the living cell is
considerable; when the cell is punctured by a dissecting needle, it
sends out a fine stream which may reach a distance of a meter or more.
3.	V. utricularis (Roth) Agardh, 1822, p. 431; Collins, 1909,
p. 373; Conferva utricularis Roth, 1797, p. 160, PI. I, fig. 1. Dredged
in 18 meters, Hamilton Harbor, Dec., Collins.
Forma Crustacea Kuckuck, 1907, p. 180; Borgesen, 1913, p. 30,
figs. 17-18; P. B.-A., No. 2074. The typical V. utricularis is rather
loosely branched, but in forma Crustacea the cells form a dense mass,
and might be mistaken for one of the solid-fronded species of Didyo-
sphaeria, but under the microscope it is easily distinguished by the dif-
ferent manner of attachment of the cells. It has some resemblance
to V. macrophysa, but the cells are smaller, closely adherent and more
elongate. It appears to be a form of shallow water, forming dense
masses, as well in the quiet water at Grasmere as on the reefs, always
awash, at Ely’s Harbor.
4.	V. pachynema (Martens) Weber, 1913, p. 61; V. confervoides 8
Harvey, Alg. Ceylon, No. 73; J. G. Agardh, 1886, p. 100; Collins,
1909,	p. 373; Bryopsis pachynema Martens, 1866, p. 24, PI. IV, fig. 2.
Miss Wilkinson.
8 Mme. Weber calls attention to the fact that Valonia confervoides was
nomen nudum until 1886; hence V. pachynema has priority.52
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Erxodesmis Borgesen.
E. verticillata (Kiitz.) Borgesen, 1912, p. 259, figs. 10-12; 1913,
p. 66, figs. 51-54. P. B.-A., No. 1907; Valonia verticillata Kiitzing,
1849, p. 508; Collins, 1909, p. 373. Kemp, April,. St. George’s,
unnamed specimen in herb.; Castle Harbor, Farlow; Harrington
Sound, 3-10 dm., June, Howe; cave by Gravelly Bay, April, tidal
stream, Hungry Bay, July, Collins. Generally grows in dense masses
of crisp fronds, but easily separable.
Siphonocladus Schmitz.
1. Primary cell long, erect; substance soft.	1. S. tropicus.
1. Primary cell short; substance firm.	2. S. rigidus.
1. S. tropicus (Crouan) J. G. Agardh, 18S6, p. 105; Borgesen,
1913, p. 61, figs. 44-51; Collins, 1909, p. 374; Vickers, 1908, p.
20, PI. XVIII; Apjohnia tropica Crouan in Maze & Schramm, 1870-
77, p. 105. Harris Bay, in pools, a few individuals only, Feb.,
Hervey.
2.	S. rigidus Howe, 1905, p. 244, PI. XII, fig. 1; PI. XIV; Col-
lins, 1909, p. 374, fig. 139; P. B.-A., No. 2169. On flat rock at low
water mark, Agar’s Island, Dec., Collins.
Petrosiphon Howe.
P. adhaerexs Howe, 1905, p. 24S, PI. XV; Collins, 1909, p. 375;
P. B.-A., No. 2073. Forming a closely attached crust in pools at
Harris Bay, March, Hervey.
Struvea Sonder.
S. ramosa Dickie, lS74a, p. 316; Murray & Boodle, 18S8, p. 280,
PI. X4 I, fig. 3; Collins, 1909, p. 377. This species was described
from specimens collected by Moseley with the Challenger Expedition;
there is no record of it since, either here or elsewhere.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
53
Family DASYCLADACEAE.
Acetabularia Lamouroux.
A. crenulata Lamouroux, 1816, p. 249; Harvey, 1858, p. 40,
PI. XLII. A; Collins, 1909, p. 378, fig. 131; P. B.-A., No. 1908.
St. George’s, Kemp; Achilles Bay, June, Harrington Sound, Oct.,
Hervey; Fairyland, July, Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins. Com-
mon, at least during summer and autumn, on rocks and pebbles in
shallow water, also brought up by dredge from about 5 meters off
Spanish Point. Ripe aplanospores were found in plants from Fairy-
land, distributed as P. B.-A., No. 1908. At this station it covers the
bottom in patches many meters square, just below the low water level.
Acicularia d’Archiac.
A. Schenckii (Mob.) Solms, 1895, p. 33, PI. Ill, figs. 4, 9, 11, 12, 14,
15; Collins, 1909, p. 380; Acetabularia Schenckii Mobius, 1889, p. 318,
PI. X, figs. 8-12. Hungry Bay, in the tidal stream under the man-
groves, June, Howe. Resembling Acetabularia crenulata, but with
disk usually smaller, stipe shorter and stouter. It probably occurs
in other stations, but has been overlooked on account of its resemblance
to the more common plant.
Neomeris Lamouroux.
N. annulata Dickie, 1874, p. 198; Howe, 1909, p. 87, PI. I, fig. 2;
Collins, 1909, p. 3S2, fig. 143; P. B.-A., No. 1909; Borgesen, 1913,
p. 71, figs. 55-57; N. Kelleri Vickers, 1908, p. 28, PI. XLVI. In
shallow water on rock and especially on small stones, and dredged in
18meters. Faxon; Miss Wilkinson; White Island, June, Howe; Ely’s
Harbor, July, Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins; Harrington Sound,
Oct., Nov., Hervey. Probably to be found in quiet shallow water
everywhere in the islands; other species of Neomeris, equally common
in the West Indies, have not been noticed here.
Dasycladus Agardh.
D. clavaeformis (Roth) Agardh, 1828, p. 16; Collins, 1909, p. 383;
P. B.-A., No. 1868; Conferva clavaeformis Roth, 1806, p. 315. Cooper’s54
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Island, April, Collins; Pink Bay, Spanish Point, March, Hervey.
In habit much like Batophora Oerstedi var. occidentalis, but growing in
more sheltered places.
Batophora J. G. Agardh.
B. Oerstedi J. G. Agardh. 1854, p. 108; Collins, 1909, p. 383,
fig. 14.5; Borgesen, 1913, p. 73, fig. 58; P. B.-A., Xo. 1910. Fairy-
land, July, with ripe aplanospores, Collins.
Var. occidentalis (Harv.) Howe, 1905a, p. 579; Collins, 1909,
p. 3S4; P. B.-A., Xo. 2016; Dasycladus occidentalis Harvey, 1858,
p. 38, PI. XLI. B. Rein; Spanish Point, June, Howe; Shelly Bay.
Dec., Hervey. A condensed form, growing in more exposed localities.
Family CODIACEAE.
• Codium Stackhouse.
1.	Prostrate.	1. C. intertextum.
1.	Erect.	2.
2.	All divisions contracted at base, enlarging upwards.
4. C. isthmocladum.
2.	No distinct contractions at base of divisions.	3.
3.	Peripheral utricles 100-150 ^ diam., exceptionally 200
2. C. tomentosum.
3.	Peripheral utricles rarely under 300 p.	3. C. deeorticatum.
1. C. intertextum sp. nov.; P. B.-A., 2018. Fronde prostrata,
tereti vel complanata, saxo arete adhaerente, apicibus autem vulgo
liberis; ramis brevibus, irregularibus, stratum subcontinuum for-
mantibus, strato interiore siphonum dense implicatorum strato
corticali cincto, utriculorum longorum, cylindricorum vel subclava-
torum, apicibus truncatis, subrotundatisve, diam. 70-90 p; colore
atroviridi; substantia subfirma, nec maxi me gelatinosa.
Frond prostrate, subterete or flattened, closely adherent to the rock,
but with tips usually free; with short, irregular branches, forming an
almost continuous coating. Interior layer of densely packed, slender
tubes, surrounded by a cortical layer of long, cylindrical or somewhat
clavate utricles, with truncate or somewhat rounded ends, 70-90 p
diam. Color dark green, substance rather firm, not special!y gelati-
nous. Forming a continuous belt a few dm. wide on upright orTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
55
sloping rocks, at low water mark; Harrington Sound, Castle Harbor,
etc.
In habit somewhat resembling C. adhaerens and C. difforme, but
the frond in these is continuous, with margin entire or lobed; in C.
intertextum the frond is narrow and branching, the branches being so
densely set as to make an almost continuous coating, one branch
often over another. The utricles are of much the same size and shape
as in C. adhaerens, but the structure of the latter is dorsiventral, the
utricles on the upper side only, the lower, adherent surface consisting
of the slender tubes, which in C. intertextum form a central layer,
surrounded on all sides by the utricles, rarely the middle part of the
under surface without the utricles. C. repens Crouan, also a prostrate
species, has utricles even larger than C. tomentosum, of the order of
size of C. decorticatum; its branching is not as dense as that of C.
intertextum, being more like that of C. tomentosum, but without the
erect habit. The utricles vary somewhat in shape and size, as in all
species of the genus, but the long, slender shape, the end either sharply
truncate or slightly capitate, is distinct from the shape in all other
American species except C. adhaerens. Type 7070 in Collins her-
barium, from Tucker’s Town, April 25, 1912. Also from Ely’s
Harbor, July, Gibbet Island, Sept., Collins; Gravelly Bay, Dec.,
Hervey. All records of C. adhaerens for Bermuda probably belong
here.
2.	C. tomentosum (Huds.) Stackhouse, 1795, p. 21, PL VII;
Harvey, 1846-51, PI. XCIII; Collins, 1909, p. 388; P. B.-A., No.
1869; Conferva tomentosa Hudson, 1762, p. 480. Tucker, No. 4,
1856; Tucker’s Town, Farlow; Kemp in herb; Moseley; Buildings
Bay, Harrington Sound, Shelly Bay, March, Hervey; Hungry Bay,
April, Ely’s Harbor, Aug., Collins. Rather common about the
islands; sporangia found in May.
3.	C. decorticatum (Woodw.) Howe, 1911, p. 494; P. B.-A.,
No. 2017; C. elongatum Vickers, 1908, p. 22, PI. XXVII; Collins,
1909, p. 388; Ulva decorticata Woodward, 1797, p. 55. Faxon; Miss
Peniston; Harrington Sound, April, Aug., St. David’s Island, April,
Cooper’s Island, Gibbet Island, Aug., Collins. Very variable in
habit and size, but usually less densely branched than C. tomentosum,
the branches often quite virgate; usually compressed more or less at
or below the axils. But there are often cases when the two species
are indistinguishable by external characters; the size of the utricles
must then determine; in C. tomentosum 100-150 p diam. rarely to
200 fj.', in C. decorticatum 300—400 p diam. rarely to 200 p. There has56
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
been some question as to whether the distinction between these two
species should be based on the size of the utricles, or on the presence
or absence of compression; the matter ip fully discussed by Bornet,
1892, p. 216. We have adopted the former plan. It must be kept in
mind that in actively growing plants or parts of plants, small and
immature utricles occur among those of normal size. C. decorticatum
sometimes grows to a large size; one plant which we found growing
below low water mark in Harrington Sound was nearly a meter long
and over 10 cm. wide in the expanded part; it was the largest alga we
have seen in Bermuda, except possibly some Sargassum. It is un-
fortunate that the rather appropriate name of elongatum should have
to be replaced by the quite inappropriate decorticatum, but as shown
by Howe, it seems inevitable.
Var. clavatum var. nov. Fronde habitu formam cylindricam C.
decorticati approximante, sed substantiae firmioris, vix gelatinosa,
colore laete viridi; utriculis forma multo variantibus; aliis cylindricis
vel leviter clavatis, 80 X 480 g; aliis 500 g longis, sursum dilatatis
ad caput subsphaericum 145 g diam.; aliorum inflatione terminali
ad 200 g diam., a parte subcylindrica minus distincta; aliis obcam-
panulatis, 650 g longis, 350 g diam., apice spatio brevi paullo latiori-
bus; aliis turbinatis, 640 g longis, apice 470 g diam.; inter omnes,
formis intermediis.
Habit that of a rather densely branched cylindrical C. decorticatum,
but of quite firm substance, hardly gelatinous, color light green.
Utricles very variable in form; some cyclindrical or slightly clavate,
SO X 480 g\ some 500 m long, increasing in size upward to 112 g,
then with a subspherical head 145 g diam.; in others the capitate
swelling up to 200 g diam., but less sharply marked off from the
subcyclindrical part, 120 g diam.; others inverted bell-shape, 650 g
long, 350 g diam., somewhat wider for a short space at the truncate
top; others turbinate, 640 g long, 470 g wide at top; with all inter-
mediate gradations.
The largest utricle observed was 980 g long, 480 g diam. The plant
is so firm in texture that it does not collapse when taken from the
water; but when dried it is thin and papery. Sporangia ovoid, largest
at the middle, obtuse at each end; sporangia apparently not mature,
160 X 64/i, 275 X 105 g, 280 X 100 m; mature sporangia, packed
with spherical spores about 12 g diam., 190 X 100 g, 240 X 120 g.
Type specimen, from stone wall at Inlet, by Frascati Hotel, Dec. 20,
1912, Hervey, No. 7322 in Collins herb. Also at Devonshire Bay,
Gravelly Bay, Feb., Causeway, March, Hervey.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
57
4. C. isthmocladum Vickers, 1905, p. 57; 1908, p. 23, PI. XXVIII;
Collins, 1909, p. 388. Shelly and Gravelly Bays, March, Hervey.
Probably not uncommon, resembling a condensed form of C. tomento-
sum, but with the divisions more or less contracted at the base,
gradually increasing in diameter to the next forking. The utricles
are larger than in C. tomentosum, approaching the size in C. decorti-
catum.
1.	A. nigricans Decaisne, 1842, p. 96; Howe, 1907, p. 508, PI.
XXVIII, figs. 8-25; Collins, 1909, p. 390. Walsingham, Feb.,
Harris Bay, April, Hervey; Inlet, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins.
Very variable, from small, delicate plants to coarse, heavy and
unsightly ones.
Var. fulva Howe in P. B.-A., No. 1480; Collins, 1909, p. 390;
P. B.-A., No. 2171. Stouter, coarser, with less difference between
stipe and flabellum; color more yellowish than in the type.
2.	A. longicaulis (Ktitz.) Murray & Boodle, 1889, p. 70, as to
name only; Collins, 1909, p. 391; P. B.-A., No. 2170; Rhipilia longi-
caulis Kiitzing, 1858, p. 13, PI. XXVIII, fig. 2. Walsingham, Feb.,
Mangrove Bay, Feb., Harrington Sound, Nov., Inlet, Dec., Hervey;
Fairyland, Dec., Collins. Growing in company with A. nigricans,
from which it is frequently indistinguishable, except that the fila-
ments of the latter show distinctly moniliform on microscopic exami-
nation, while those of A. longicaulis are nearly or quite cylindrical.
The name is a somewhat unfortunate result of following the rules of
botanical nomenclature; the authors of the binomial used it for a
different plant, A. nigricans. Rhipilia longicaulis, from which it
derives its specific name, is according to the type specimen the
present species, while the description and figure given by Kiitzing
belong better to a third species, A. sordida Murray & Boodle. The
arguments in favor of the name used here are found in Howe, 1907,
p. 509; those in favor of preferring A. Mazei Murray & Boodle in
Gepp, 1911, p. 27; a later summation will be found in Howe, 1911, p.
133.
Avrainvillea Decaisne.
1. Filaments distinctly moniliform.
1. Filaments nearly or quite cylindrical.
1. A. nigricans.
2. A. longicaulis.
Penicillus Lamarck.
1. Surface of stipe smooth.
1. Surface of stipe rough.
1. P. capitatus.
2. P. pyriformis.58
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
1.	P. Capitatus Lamarck, 1813, p. 299; Harvey, 1S58, p. 45,
PI. XLIII. B; Collins, 1909, p. 392; P. B.-A., No. 1911. Kemp,
specimen in herb.; Rein; Moseley; Wadsworth, No. 75; Tucker’s
Town, Farlow; Hungry Bay, June, Howe; Gravelly Bay, March,
Mangrove Bay, Feb., Harris Bay, Oct., Nov., Inlet, Dec., Hervey;
Cooper’s Island, April, Jew’s Bay, July, Ely’s Harbor, Inlet, Hungry
Bay, Aug., Collins. Common practically everywhere in shallow
water and dredged down to 10 m.
Forma elongatus (Dene.) Gepp, 1911, p. S3, figs. 166-167;
P. B.-A., No. 1912; P. elongatus Decaisne, 1842, p. 97 (reprint).
Jew’s Bay, July, Harrington Sound, Mangrove Lake, Aug., Collins.
A form with long stipe, pyriform head, filaments stouter than in the
typical form, in company with which it grows, the two shading into
each other,
Forma laxus Borgesen, 1913, p. 98, fig. 80. Walsingham, Feb.,
Hervey. A form with long and slender stipe, head more or less
irregular in form, filaments loose and slender. In the specimens
which we identify with this form the branching of the stipe is not
unusual, each division having a head of the normal shape for this
form.
2.	P. pyriformis Gepp, 1905, p. 1, PI. CCCCLXVIII, fig. 1;
Collins, 1909, p. 393; P. B.-A., No. 2075. June, Howe; Feb., Far-
low; Harris Bay, Jan., Oct., Dec., Inlet, Dec., Hervey. Often grow-
ing with P. capitatus, but less common.
Udotea Lamouroux.
1. Whole flabellum with a stony coating.	2. U. flabellum.
1. Flabellum flexible, individual filaments encrusted. 1. U. conglutinata.
1.	U. conglutinata (Soland.) Lamouroux, 1816, p. 312; Howe,
1909, p. 96, PI. II, PI. VIII, figs. 1-13; Collins, 1909, p. 395; P. B.-A.,
No. 1913; Corallina conglutinata Solander in Ellis & Solander, 1786,
p. 125, PI. XXV, fig. 7. Rein; Kemp; South Beach by Paget, Feb.,
Farlow; Harris Bay, Jan., Feb., March, Nov., Hervey. In tide
pools, a small form only; dredged in 10 meters by the Challenger
Expedition.
2.	U. flabellum (Ell. & Sol.) Howe, 1904, p. 94; Gepp, 1911,
p. 131, PI. Ill, figs. 26-28; Collins, 1909, p. 395; P. B.-A., No. 1914;
Corallina flabellum Ellis & Solander, 1786, p. 124, PI. XXIV. Rein;
Kemp; Tucker, No. 23; Walsingham, Farlow; many stations, Hervey,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
59
Collins. Grows practically everywhere in shallow water, varying
much in size, texture, outline, etc. Some forms are rounded and
entire, wider than broad; some plane, others folded longitudinally;
some cuneate and much divided, some consisting of a few linear
laciniae from the top of the stipe, the laciniae up to 3 dm. long and
less than 1 cm. wide. All pass gradually into each other, so that
varietal or form names are useless.
Halimeda Lamouroux.
1.	All segments except those bearing branches cylindrical.
1.	Most segments ovoid or flattened, not cylindrical.
2.	Segments distinctly ribbed.
2.	Segments indistinctly or not at all ribbed.
3.	Segments strongly calcified, firm, thick.
3.	Segments lightly calcified, flexible, thin.
4. H. Monile.
2.
3. H. tridens.
3.
2. H. simulans.
1. H. Tuna.
1.	H. Tuna (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1812, p. 186; Collins, 1909,
p. 400; P. B.-A., No. 1918; Corallina Tuna Ellis & Solander, 1786,
p. Ill, PI. XX, fig. e. Kemp; Moseley; Walsingham, Farlow; Howe;
Harrington Sound, Jan., Inlet, Dec., Harris Bay, Dec., Hervey;
cave, Agar’s Island, Aug., Hamilton Harbor, dredged in 5 meters.
Dec., Collins. Not uncommon, but less frequent than H. tridens and
IT. Monile. Our IT. Tuna seems all to belong to forma typica Barton,
1901, p. 13, PI. I, fig. 1.
2.	H. simulans Howe, 1907, p. 503, PI. XXIX; Collins, 1909,
p. 401; P. B.-A., No. 1916. Tucker’s Town, Dec., Hervey. Found
only in this one locality and in small quantity. Its segments have the
outline of those of II. Tuna, but are thicker and more calcified.
3.	H. tridens (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1812, p. 186; Harvey,
1858, p. 24, PI. XLIV. C; Collins, 1909, p. 398; P. B.-A., No. 1917;
Corallina tridens Ellis & Solander, 1786, p. 109, PI. 20, fig. a. Rein;
Moseley, as H. incrassata; Walsingham, Farlow; many stations,
Collins and Hervey, dredged down to IS meters. Common nearly
everywhere and very variable. Of the various varieties and forms to
which names have been given, we have
Forma typica (Barton) Collins, 1909, p. 398; H. incrassata forma
typica Barton, 1901, p. 27, PI. IV, fig. 39. A stout, stony form, with
lower joints short, more or less adherent, upper joints three-ribbed
or three-lobed.
Forma tripartita (Barton) Collins, 1909, p. 399; H. incrassata
forma tripartita Barton, 1901, p. 27, PI. IV, fig. 43. A more slender60
COLLINS AXD HERVEY.
form, less branched, the lower joints longer, the upper joints ending
in three cylindrical lobes.
Forma gracilis Borgesen, 1913, p. Ill, fig. 89. Joints small, sub-
circular in outline, not strongly calcified.
These forms all pass into each other. Borgesen considers H. Monile
and H. simulants also as forms of this species, and it may be that he is
right as to the former, but the differences between these two, and the
three forms that we consider to belong to H. tridens, are greater than
the differences among the latter. Gepp and Borgesen prefer the name
H. incra-ssata to H. tridens; the case for the former is stated by Bor-
gesen, 1911, p. 136, that for H. tridens by Howe, 1907, p. 501.
4. H. Monile (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1812, p. 186; Collins,
1909, p. 399; P. B.-A., Xo. 1915; H. incrassata forma monilis Barton,
1901, p. 27, PI. IV, fig. 40; Corallina monilis Ellis & Solander, 1786,
p. 110, PI. XX, fig. c. Inlet, Jan., Oct., Dec., Bailey’s Bay, Jan.,
Walsingham, Nov., Tucker’s Town, Dec., Hervey; Hungry Bay,
April, Collins. Rather common; the forms recognized by Borgesen
both occur here.
Forma robusta Borgesen, 1913, p. 113, fig. 90. Densely branched,
the upper joints cylindrical, the lower tripartite and sometimes resem-
bling the upper joints of H. tridens forma tripartita.
Forma ctlixdrica Borgesen, 1913, p. 113, fig. 91. Less branched,
the joints nearly all cylindrical.
Family BRYOPSIDACEAE.
Bryopsis Lamouroux.
1. Ramuli distichous.	2. B. pennata.
1. Ramuli not distichous.	2.
2. Main branches virgate, with very slender ramuli. 3. B. Duchassaingii.
2. Outline pyramidal, branching of several orders, no sharp distinction
between branches and ramuli.	1. B. hypnoides.
1.	B. hypnoides Lamouroux, 1809, p. 333; 1809b, p. 135, PI. I,
fig. 2, a & b; Collins, 1909, p. 403. Harrington Sound, Jan., Feb.,
April, Walsingham, March, Hervey; Kemp, May, as B. plumosa, in
part; cave by Gravelly Bay, April, Collins.
Forma proloxgata J. G. Agardh, 1886, p. 28; P. B.-A., Xo. 1870;
B. hypnoides Harvey, 1846-51, PL CXIX. Harrington Sound, May,
Dec., Collins; Old Ferry, April, Hervey.
2.	B. Duchassaingii .J. G. Agardh, 1S54, p. 107; Collins, 1909,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
61
p. 403; Trichosolen antillarum Montagne, 1860, p. 171, PI. XI. C.
Kemp; Harrington Sound, March, Hervey.
Var. filicina var. nov. Frondis circumscriptione late vel anguste
lanceolata; axi primario non diviso; axibus secundariis approximatis,
aequidistantibus, saepe oppositis, a basi ramulis tenuissimis aequilongis
dense obsitis.
Outline of frond broadly to narrowly lanceolate; main axis not
divided; secondary axes closely and uniformly set, often opposite,
densely beset from the base with very fine ramuli of equal length.
Near Flatts bridge, Feb., Hervey. Type in Collins herb.
The habit of this variety is strikingly different from that of typical
B. Duchassaingii, and the very regular pinnate branching makes it a
beautiful object; but in a genus where there is so much variation
within each species, it is hardly safe to consider this a distinct species.
3. B. pennata Lamouroux, 1809, p. 133; 1809b, p. 134, PI. Ill,
fig. 1; Collins, 1909, p. 405; P. B.-A., No. 1871. Rein, as B. plumosa;
Kemp, as B. ■plumosa, in part, B. hypnoides, in part. In Collins, 1909,
B. pennata, B. Leprieurii and B. Harveyana were kept distinct, chiefly
on the judgment of Miss Vickers, who was familiar with them at
Barbados. Since then we have examined some 200 specimens of
Bryopsis of Miss Vickers’ collecting, and some hundreds of specimens
from Bermuda, and we have come to the conclusion that while typical
examples of these three are quite distinct, intermediate forms are more
common, and specific distinction is impracticable. So far we agree
with Borgesen, 1911, p. 145, and 1913, p. 117, but we cannot agree
with him in placing them all under B. plumosa (Huds.) Ag. The
normal form of B. pennata seems to be a long, simple rachis, with
short, distichous ramuli of uniform length, giving a linear outline to
the frond. In B. plumosa the rachis bears lateral branches, increasing
in length from the apex to the base, so as to give a triangular outline,
usually broadly triangular, to the frond. Each of the branches has a
similar triangular outline. There is much variation in luxuriance of
branching, but in examining a considerable series of B. plumosa from
northern Europe and America, to the Mediterranean on one side, to
North Carolina on the other, we have seen nothing like the linear form.
Among the abundant material from Barbados and Bermuda we have
found no plants with repeated triangular outline of the frond and its
divisions. We recognize the same varieties as Borgesen, but place
them under B. pennata, the oldest name for the distinctly linear forms.
The species and its varieties are to be found almost everywhere in the
islands, but one must expect more intermediate than typical forms;
moreover old plants become denuded, and present many puzzles.62
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Var. secunda (Harv.) comb, nov.; B. plumosa var. secunda Harvey,
1S58, p. 31, PI. XLV. A, figs. 1-3; B. Harveyana Collins, 1909, p. 405.
This variety shows a certain dorsiventral arrangement, the ramuli
on both edges of the rachis curving towards each other on one side.
Var. Leprieurii (Kiitz.) comb, nov.; B. Leprieurii Kiitzing, 1849,
p. 490; 1S56, p. 27, PI. LXXY, fig. 2; Collins, 1909, p. 404. In this
variety the ramuli are in short secund series, separated by short vacant
spaces.
Family DERBESIACEAE.
Derbesia Solier.
1.	Filaments 100-600/x diam.	3. D. Lamourouxii.
1.	Filaments less than 100 /x diam.	2.
2.	Filaments 40-50 m diam., dichotomously branched.
1. D. vaucheriaeformis.
2.	Filaments 50-70 /x diam., simple or with short lateral branches.
2. D. marina.
1.	D. vaucheriaeformis (Harv.) J. G. Agardh, 1886, p. 34;
Collins, 1909, p. 406; D. tenuissima Farlow, 1881, p. 60, PI. IV, fig. 4;
Chlorodesmis mucheriaeformis Harvey, 1858, p. 30, PI. XL. D. On
Dictyopteris Justii, Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins. With sporangia.
2.	D. marina (Lyng.) Kjellman, 1883, p. 16; Collins, 1909, p. 407;
Vaucheria marina Lyngbye, 1819, p. 79, PI. XXII. On Acantho-
phora spicifera, Hungry Bay, May, Collins. With sporangia.
3.	D. Lamourouxii (J. Ag.) Solier, 1847, p. 162, PI. IX, figs. 18-
30; Collins, 1909, p. 407; P. B.-A., No. 2168; Bryopsis Balbisiana var.
Lamourouxii J. G. Agardh, 1842, p. 18. Castle Harbor, near landing
at Tucker’s Town, March, Hervey. The fronds are much stouter than
in the two other species of the genus, sometimes simple, sometimes
with a few irregular tufts of ramuli. Old and denuded plants of
Bryopsis have some resemblance to it, but always show the scars of
fallen ramuli.
Family CAULERPACEAE.
Caulerpa Lamouroux.
C. fastigiata.
2.
3.
4.
1. Stolon and fronds filiform, without distinct ramuli. 1.
1. Stolon and fronds different in character.
2. Fronds very slender, ramuli whorled, near the summit.
2. Fronds stouter, ramuli not in distinct whorls.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
63
Fronds not over 1 cm. high, stolon and base of frond hairy. 2. C. pusilla.
3. C. verticillata.
5.
8.
4. C. prolifera.
6.
5. C. crassifolia.
7.
6. C. taxifolia.
3.
3.	Fronds to 5 cm. high, hairs wanting or few.
4.	Fronds flat or with ramuli in one plane.
4.	Ramuli not in one plane.
5.	Frond flat, entire or with proliferations.
5.	Frond pinnate.
6.	Pinnules flat.
6.	Pinnules cylindrical or compressed.
7.	Pinnules narrowed at base and tapering to tip.
7.	Pinnules at base somewhat larger than at the curved and mucronate
tip.	7. C. sertularioides.
8.	Ramuli peltate.	8. C. peltata.
8.	Ramuli not peltate.	9.
9.	Ramuli varying from long-clavate to spherical-pedicellate.
• 9. C. racemosa.
9.	Ramuli short, of various form, the lowest always rostriform.
10.	C. cupressoides.
1.	C. fastigiata Montagne, 1838, p. 19, PI. II, fig. 3; Collins,
1909, p. 411. Dingle Bay, March, Hervey; Hungry Bay, April,
Collins. Fine, Vaucheria-like tufts or mats on mangroves and other
objects near low water mark. The Hungry Bay material seems to be
the floating form known as var. confervoides Crouan.
2.	C. pusilla (Kiitz.) J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 6; Weber, 1898,
p. 266, PI. XX, fig. 6; Vickers, 1908, p. 25, PI. XXXVIII; Collins,
1909, p. 412; P. B.-A., No. 2019. Stephanocoelium pusillum Kutzing,
1847, p. 54. Tide pool, Harris Bay, Oct., Nov., Hervey. The
branching stolon creeps over the loose sand etc., on the bottom of the
pool, forming with other small algae a thin but firm turf, which has to
be forcibly torn apart to show the character of the plant. The ramuli
are in two or three whorls; in the Bermuda plants these whorls are
more closely set than in the forms figured by Mme. Weber and Miss
Vickers, and can often be distinguished only by dissection.
3.	C. verticillata J. G. Agardh, 1848, p. 6; Weber, 1898, p. 267,
PI. XX, figs. 7-10; Collins, 1909, p. 412; Borgesen, 1907, p. 355, figs.
1-3; 1913, p. 121, figs. 95, 96. St. George’s, April, Hervey.
4.	C. prolifera (Forsk.) Lamouroux, 1809, p. 332; Weber, 1898,
p. 278, PI. XXII, fig. 1; Collins, 1909, p. 413; P. B.-A., No. 1872;
Fucm proliferns Forskal, 1775, p. 163. Rein; Kemp; Walsingham,
Farlow; Walsingham, April, Hervey; Pool by Moore’s calabash
tree, April, Somerset Bridge, July, Ely’s reef, July, Collins. Typical
form, passing into
Forma obovata J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 11; Borgesen, 1907, p. 359,64
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
fig. 4; 1913, p. 127, fig. 100; Collins, 1909, p. 413; with broad, little
proliferous fronds.
Forma zosterifolia Borgesen, 1907, p. 359, fig. 6; 1913, p. 127,
fig. 101; Collins, 1909, p. 413; with narrow, proliferous fronds;
Fairyland, Dec., Collins.
5. C. crassifolia (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 13. Typical C.
crassifolia has not been found here; forma laxior is common, and is
apparently a well marked endemic form, not having been reported
elsewhere; forma mexicana is the common form of Florida and the
West Indies, and though not rare in Bermuda is less common than
forma laxior.
Forma laxior (Weber) Collins, 1909, p. 413; P. B.-A., No. 1919;
C. pinnata forma laxior Weber, 1898, p. 291; C. crassifolia var. mexi-
cana Alg. Am. Bor. Exsicc., No. 170. Walsingham, April, Hervey;
Hungry Bay, Tuckertown, Gravelly Bay, Pool by Moore’s calabash
tree, Cliff pool, April, Harrington Sound, May, Collins.
Forma mexicana (Sond.) J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 13; Collins, 1909,
p. 413; C. mexicana Sonder in Kiitzing, 1849, p. 496; Harvey, 1858,
p. 16, PI. XXXVII. A; Gibbet Island, Bailey’s Bay, Jan., Hervey.
The form from Cliff Pool deserves special notice; Cliff Pool is a
name we have used for a small but deep pool, near the SW. corner of
Harrington Sound, between Tucker’s Bay and Green Bay. It has a
steep cliff on the side towards the sea; on the other side it is near the
Sound, but separated from it by land considerably above its level.
It evidently has underground connection with the Sound, the water
rising and falling somewhat with the tide. On the surface of this
pool, in April and May, 1912, was a floating mass of algae, chiefly
C. crassifolia, C. racemosa and C. sertularioides. The stolons floated
on the surface, the fronds extending beside them, the tapering rhi-
zoids hanging straight down, sometimes reaching a length of 2 dm.,
reminding one of the roots of a Lemna or Spirodela, on a larger scale.
Borgesen, 1907, p. 344, classifies the Caulerpas under three types.
(1) The epiphytic or mud-collecting Cauperpas. (2) The sand and
mud Caulerpas. (3) Rock and coral-reef Caulerpas. These three
types are represented in Bermuda, and we can now add a fourth, the
floating Caulerpas. Evidently this form can occur only at a station
with considerable depth of water, not reached by surf, sheltered from
winds, and with no current. Specimens collected here in May
have been distributed as P. B.-A., Nos. 1873 and 2021. The station
wTas revisited in August, 1913, but only a few bleached individuals were
found; apparently the plants could not endure the intense heat of the
midsummer sun.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
65
6.	C. taxifolia (Vahl) Agardh, 1822, p. 435; Weber, 1898, p. 292;
Borgesen, 1907, p. 363, figs. 9-10; 1913, p. 131, figs. 104-105; Collins,
1909, p. 414; Fucus taxifolius Vahl, 1802, p. 36. Farlow; Walsing-
ham, a single plant, Hervey. Apparently rare, but may have been
mistaken for the commoner C. crassifolia or C. sertularioides, from
both of which it can be distinguished by the opposite, sickle-shaped,
narrow pinnules, with contracted base.
7.	C. sertularioides (Gmel.) Howe, 1905a, p. 576; Collins,
1909, p. 414; Fucus sertularioides Gmelin, 176S, p. 151, PI. XV, fig. 4.
Forma longiseta (J. Ag.) Svedelius, 1906, p. 114, fig. 10; Collins,
1909, p. 415; P. B.-A., No. 1873; C. plumaris forma longiseta Weber,
1898, p. 295. Harrington Sound, Oct., Hervey; Cliff Pool, April,
Collins.
Forma brevipes (J. Ag.) Svedelius, 1906, p. 114, fig. 7; Collins,
1909, p. 415; C. plumaris forma brevipes Weber, 1898, p. 294. Wal-
singham, March, Hervey; Ely’s Harbor, July, Collins.
8.	C. peltata (Turn.) Lamouroux, 1809, p. 332; 1809c, p. 145, PI.
Ill, fig. 2; Weber, 1898, p. 373, PI. XXXI, figs. 9-11; Collins, 1909, p.
421; Fucus chemnitzia var. peltatus Turner, 1819, p. 8, PI. CC. Faxon,
a single quite typical specimen; Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins.
9.	C. racemosa (Forsk.) J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 35; Weber, 1898,
p. 357, PI. XXXI, figs. 5-8; XXXII, figs. 1-7; Collins, 1909, p. 419;
Fucus racemosus Forskal, 1775, p. 191. A very variable species,
with no acknowledged typical form, apart from the many forms and
varieties into which it has been divided. It is uncertain to which of
these should be referred the C. clavifera of Rein and Moseley.
Var. clavifera (Turn.) Weber, 1898, p. 361: Vickers, 1908, p. 28,
PI. XLV; Collins, 1909, p. 420; Fucus clavifer Turner, 1808, PI.
LXXVII. Harrington Sound, March, Wadsworth, No. 71; Hamil-
ton, Farlow; these are the only records of the typical form of this
variety, but forms between this and vars. uvifera and laetevirens are
not uncommon.
Var. uvifera (Turn.) J. G. Agardh, 1S72, p. 35; Weber, 1898, p.
363, PI. XXXIII, figs. 6-7; Collins, 1909, p. 420; P. B.-A., No. 2022.
Fucus uvifer Turner, 1819, PI. CCXXX; Gravelly Bay, Feb., Hervey.
Var. occidentalis (J. Ag.) Borgesen, 1907, p. 379, figs. 28-29;
1913, p. 152, fig. 124; Collins, 1909, p. 420; P. B.-A., No. 2021. C.
chemnitzia var. occidentalis J. G. Agardh, 1872, p. 37; Walsingham,
Jan., March, Tucker’s Town, Feb., Dec., Hervey; Cliff Pool, Hungry
Bay, April, Hamilton Harbor, dredged down to 18 meters, Dec.,
Collins. Agrees well with Borgesen’s description and figures, and with66
COLLIXS AND HERYEY.
the plant distributed as \Y. X. & L., Xo. 15S6. The Cliff Pool plants
have mostly more distant ramuli, but some individuals are quite
typical. At Hungry Bay a form was found in which the ramuli were
produced on one side of the frond only; not secund in the usual sense,
as they were not in a single series, but were placed, apparently irregu-
larly, on one semi-cylinder of the axis, the other being naked.
Var. laetevirexs (Mont.) Weber, 1898, p. 366, PI. XXXIII, figs.
8, 16-22; Borgesen, 1907, p. 386, fig. 30; 1913, p. 154, fig. 125; Col-
lins, 1909, p. 420; P. B.-A., Xo. 2020. C. laetevirens Montagne, 1842,
p. 16. Kemp, in herb.; Wadsworth, Xo. 70; Walsingham, March,
Hervey; Tucker’s Town, April, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins.
10. C. cupressoides (Vahl) Agardh, 1822, p. 441; Weber, 1S98,
p. 323; Collins, 1909, p. 416; Fucus cupressoides Vahl, 1802, p. 29.
A species containing many forms, all intergrading, once held to be
distinct species.
Var. ttpica Weber, 1898, p. 326; Borgesen, 1907, p. 368, figs. 14-16;
1913, p. 137, figs. 109-111. South Beach, Paget, Farlow.
Var. mamillosa (Mont.) Weber, 1898, p. 332, PI. XXXVIII, figs.
2-7; Collins, 1909, p. 417; Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 96; P. B.-A.,
No. 1920; Caiderpa mamillosa Montagne, 1842, p. 13. Outer reef,
Ely’s Harbor, July, Somerset Bridge, July, Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins.
At Gravelly Bay it grew exposed to the waves, the stolon adhering
firmly to the rock and covered with sand, so that only the short fronds
were visible, often only the tips.
Var. ericifolia (Turn.) Weber, 1898, p. 335; Collins, 1909, p. 417;
Fucus ericifolius Turner, 1808, p. 124, PI. LVI, “ found at Bermuda
Islands, Herb. Banks.” Kemp, in herb, as C. ericifolia; Gravelly
Bay, Aug., Collins. A few plants at Gravelly Bay, among var.
mamillosa, distinguished by the cylindrical ramuli.
C. Ashmeadii Harvey, is recorded in Collins, 1909, p. 414, as occur-
ring at Bermuda. We have not been able to confirm this record,
and as we have not ourselves found this species, we do not include
it in the present work.
Family VAUCHERIACEAE.
Vaucheria DC.
*V. sphaerospora Xordstedt, 1878, p. 177, PI. II, figs. 7-8;
Collins, 1909, p. 429. In “Millbrook” Dec., Collins, with oogonia
and antheridia. This species has been found in Greenland, Denmark,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
67
Sweden and Great Britain, and also in Uruguay. The Bermuda
plant is dioecious, agreeing in that respect with the South American
form; in Europe the species is monoecious. Another Vaucheria was
found at Hungry Bay, Collins, but being sterile could not be specifi-
cally determined.
Dichotomosiphon Ernst.
D. pusillus Collins, 1909, p. 431; P. B.-A., No. 2023. Bailey’s
Bay, Jan., Harrington Sound, March, Inlet, March, Hervey; Shelly
Bay, Hungry Bay, April, Collins. Apparently common, forming
dark green or almost black mats on rocks, Udotea etc., or loose floating
felts. At Bailey’s Bay it was found with filaments 50 /j. diam.; the
normal diam. does not exceed 30 n. In the material from Harrington
Sound, the contents of the filaments is often divided into sections,
approximately as long as their diameter, separated by a narrow trans-
parent space in a plane at right angles with the axis of the filament.
This may be preliminary to the formation of spores of some sort, but
no more advanced stage was seen.
Family CHARACEAE.
Chara Agardh.
*C. gymnopus var. Berteroi A. Braun, 1882, p. 195. Pembroke
Marshes, Jan., Farlow. The specimen in the Farlow herbarium was
characterized by Nordstedt, in litt., as “forma tenuior” which we
understand to be merely descriptive, not a name.6S
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Class PHAEOPHYCEAE.
Family ECTOCARPACEAE.
Pylaiella Bory.
P. fulvescens (Schousboe) Bornet, 1S89, p. 5, PI. I; P. B.-A., No.
2076; Conferva fulvescens Schousboe ms ex Bornet. On sand-covered
rocks by lighthouse, St. David’s Island, May, 1913, Hervey. The
plant agrees fully with Bornet’s figure as to form and dimension of
horizontal filaments and sporangia; the erect filaments are in part
simple, as figured by Bornet, in part like those figured by Sauvageau,
1896a, fig. 1, being recurved near the tips, and bearing numerous
longer or shorter branches, mostly on the outer side of the curve. The
unilocular sporangia are rare, blit well developed. P. Hooperi,
Barbados, Miss Vickers, seems hardly distinct. In comparing the
description of P. fulvescens by Bornet with that of Pylaiella sp.
(.Ectocarpus Hooperi Crouan) on the following page, the chief dis-
tinctive character of the latter would seem to be the Rhizoclonium-
like ramuli near the base; such ramuli were occasionally seen in the
Bermuda plant, but were not at all abundant.
Ectocarpus Lyngbye.
1.	Lower part of frond endophytic.	2.
1.	Not endophytic.	3.
2.	Only slightly endophytic, in Dictyopteris Justii; largely free; pluri-
locular sporangia cylindrical.	8. E. luteolus.
2.	Mostly endophytic, in Halymenia; plurilocular sporangia ovoid.
9. E. parasiticus.
3.	Erect filaments arising from prostrate, branching filaments.	4.
3.	No distinct prostrate filaments.	5.
4.	Erect filaments with plurilocular sporangia near base, no other branch-
ing.	7. E. elachistaeformis.
4.	Erect filaments freely branched, bearing sporangia throughout. 9.
5.	Plurilocular sporangia seriate on upper side of branches,	near base.	6.
5.	Plurilocular sporangia variously placed, not seriate.	8.
6.	Plurilocular sporangia cylindrical.	3. E. Mitchellae.
6.	Plurilocular sporangia ovoid to conical.	7.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
69
7.	Branching irregular, branches patent.	4. E. coniferus.
7.	Branches subsecund, ramuli long, pectinate.	5. E. Sandrianus.
8.	Plurilocular sporangia fusiform, unilocular unknown.
I	1. E. confervoides.
8.	Plurilocular sporangia short-conical, unilocular ovoid or subspherical.
2.	E. siliculosus forma arctus.
9.	Plurilocular sporangia variable, always blunt or truncate.
6. E. Duchassaingianus.
9.	Plurilocular sporangia acute.	10. E. Rallsiae.
1.	E. confervoides (Roth) Le Jolis, 1863, p. 75; Kuckuck, 1891,
p. 19, fig. 3; Ceramium confervoides Roth, 1797, p. 151. Floating,
Gibbet Island, March, Hervey. Somewhat variable, but mostly
of the typical form.
2.	E. siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyng. forma arctus (Kiitz.) Kuckuck,
1891, p. 18; P. B.-A., No. 1922; Ectocarpus arctus Kiitzing, 1843,
p. 289; Corticularia arcta Kiitzing, 1855, p. 23, PI. LXXX, fig. II.
On sand covered rocks, below low water mark, Gibbet Island, March,
Harris Bay, April, Hervey; floating, Tucker’s Town, April, Harring-
ton Sound, May, Collins. E. acanthoides Vickers, Barbados, No. 95,
seems to be the same plant. We have not found in Bermuda the
typical form of E. siliculosus, which is common on both sides of the
North Atlantic.
3.	E. Mitchellae Harvey, 1852, p. 142, PI. XII. G; P. B.-A.,
No. 1921; E. virescens Thuret in Sauvageau, 1896, p. 18 of reprint.
Harris Bay, Heron Bay, Jan., St. David’s Island, Feb., Harrington
Sound, Shelly Bay, March, Hervey; Shelly Bay, Harrington Sound,
Cooper’s Island, April, Collins. A common species, growing on corals,
larger algae, aquatic phanerogams, and on submerged twigs of live
Tamarisk. Plurilocular fruit apparently always abundant, mega-
sporangia and meiosporangia in about equal numbers. The former
have not been recorded for the Atlantic coast of North America,
where the species is common, but were found in California, and dis-
tributed as P. B.-A., No. 671. When growing on any hard substance,
rhizoidal growth is usually insignificant; on Castagnea, Helmintho-
cladia etc., the rhizoids are strongly developed, penetrating well into
the tissue of the host.
4.	E. coniferus Borgesen, 1914, p. 164, figs. 131-132. Shelly
Bay, April. Hervey, among E. Mitchellae. This species was quite
recently described from the Danish West Indies, and its occurrence
at Bermuda is of interest, indicating that it may be found at other
stations in the Atlantic.70
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
5.	E. Sandrianus Zanardini, 1843, p. 41; 1865, p. 143, PI. LXXIV.
B; E. elegans Thuret in Le Jolis, 1863, p. 77, PI. II, fig. 1-2; not
of Menegh. Shelly Bay, Jan., St. David’s Island, Feb., Hervey; with
plurilocular sporangia. In both cases mixed with other species
of Ectocarpus; this mixture of species of Ectocarpus is quite com-
mon and sometimes perplexing. It is the rule rather than the excep-
tion.
6.	E. Duchassaingianus Grunow, 1867, p. 45, PI. IV, fig. 1;
Vickers, 1905, p. 59; 1908, PL XXVII; Borgesen, 1914, p. 159, figs.
127-128; P. B.-A., No. 2077. Major’s Bay, March, Hervey. On
sticks and twigs, outlet of aquarium, Agar’s Island, Aug., Collins.
The Major’s Bay plant agrees with Borgesen’s description and figures,
and with a specimen of Miss Vickers, Barbados, No. 89. The plant
from the aquarium outlet differs in the absence of hairs, and in the
greater variability of form of the plurilocular sporangia. These are
often exactly like Borgesen’s figures, but in other instances the cylindri-
cal or clavate body of the sporangium has a shortly acuminate or
subulate apex; the same occurs in Miss Vickers specimen. Unilocu-
lar sporangia were not seen. The cells were all very densely packed,
and it was only in the youngest that the irregularly rounded disks of
the chromatophores could be seen. Though there were no hairs, the
branches often ended in a long simple filament, 10-14 p diam., with
longer cells than in the rest of the plant, but all were well supplied
with chromatophores. The sporangia were sometimes sessile, oftener
on a short pedicel, occasionally terminating a branch, as shown in
Borgesen’s fig. 128e. The cell bearing a sporangium was usually
distinctly shorter than the adjacent cells, as in E. indicus Sonder, as
noted by Mme. Weber, 1913, p. 129, fig. 34. We are inclined to agree
with Borgesen that E. Duchassiangus may be merely a form of E.
indicus, but for the present it seems better to retain the former name.
The station where this plant occurred is a peculiar one; the salt water
outlet of the aquarium is well up in the rock at the shore of the island;
the water runs down into the sea, stalks of grass and other objects
reached by it being covered by a dense coating of various kinds of
algae, Enteromorpha predominating, but also other Chlorophyceae
and several Myxophyceae; the variations of this material from the
type may be due in some way to the exceptional conditions.
7.	E. elachistaeformis Heydrich, 1892, p. 470, PI. XXV, fig. 14;
Borgesen, 1914, p. 174, fig. 137. On Codium decorticatum, Cooper’s
Island, Aug., on Galaxaura squalida & Helminthodadia Calvadosii,
St. David’s Island, April, Collins. The form reported by BorgesenTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
71
differs somewhat from the typical, but not enough to raise any ques-
tion as to identity. Our form comes nearer to the type from New
Guinea. The only marked difference is in the basal portion of the
plant growing on Codium. When growing on Sargassum it formed a
more or less definite basal layer, from which short rhizoids issued,
entering the host. On the Codium there is no definite basal layer,
but a compact bundle of irregular rhizoidal filaments, narrower than
the assimilating filaments, with few chromatophores, and cells up
to 10 diam. long. The lower ends of these rhizoids separate more or
less, and spread among the utricles of the host. This difference is
explainable by the difference in structure of the hosts. On the Gala-
xaura the rhizoids are less conspicuous. Plurilocular sporangia, simi-
lar to those figured by Heydrich, were abundant.
8.	E. luteolus Sauvageau, 1892, p. 25, PI. II, figs. 14-19. On
Dictyopleris Jmtii, South Shore, Aug., Collins. The lower part of the
frond inhabits the tissue of the host; the upper part forms a fine down
on the surface.
9.	E. parasiticus Sauvageau, 1892, p. 28, PI. Ill, figs. 20-23;
Streblonema parasiticum (Sauv.) De Toni, 1895, p. 575. In Haly-
menia pseudofloresia, Jan., Hervey. Mostly endophytic; the plants
from Maine, distributed as P. B.-A., No. 1337, were chiefly external,
the difference being probably due to the firmer tissue of the host
in the latter case, Cystoclonium purpurascens.
10.	E. Rallsiae Vickers, 1905, p. 59; 1908, PI. XXXII; Borge-
sen, 1914, p. 169, fig. 133; P. B.-A., No. 2172. On Helminthocladia
calvadosii, Old Ferry, April, Hervey. The main filaments are occa-
sionally stouter than in the Barbados and St. Thomas material, up to
40 p diam., but usually not over 30 p, in lesser divisions down to 20 p,
in hairs to 10 p. There is a system of descending filaments, irregular
and twisted, but otherwise like the erect filaments, extending for quite
a distance in the tissues of the host; plurilocular sporangia agree in
form, dimensions and position with Borgesen’s figure.
Streblonema Derbhs & Sober.
S. sphaericum Derbes & Sober in Castagne, 1851, p. 100; Sauva-
geau, 1897, p. 18, figs. 2-3 (of reprint); Kuckuck, 1899, p. 28, figs.
6-7. In Castagnea Zosterae, Cooper’s Island, April, Collins. With
uni- and plurilocular sporangia; generally in company with Myrio-
trichia, which it much resembles.COLLINS AND HERVEY.
72
Ascocyclus Magnus.
A. orbicularis (J. Ag.) Magnus, 1874, p. 73; P. B.-A., No. 1S78;
Myrionema orbiculare J. G. Agardh, 1848, p. 48. On marine phanero-
gams in shallow water, Cooper’s Island, April, Collins. Probably
elsewhere, but easily overlooked.
Family SPHACELARIACEAE.
Sphacelaria Lyngbye.
1.	Propagula with broad body.	2.
1.	Propagula slender, branching.	3.
2.	Filaments mostly 30-40 m diam.; lateral cell of propagulum not divided.
•	3. S. tribuloides.
2.	Filaments mostly 55-75/n diam.; lateral cell of propagulum divided into
two.	4. S. novae-hollandiae.
3.	Propagulum with three rays from summit of pedicel. 2. S. fusca.
3.	Propagulum with two rays from summit of pedicel.	1. S. furcigera.
1.	S. furcigera Kiitzing, 1855, p. 27, PI. CX; Sauvageau, 1901,9
p. 145, fig. 35. On small spider crab, Hungry Bay, July, on floating
Turbinaria, Dec., Collins; with propagula.
2.	S. fusca (Huds.) Agardh, 1828, p. 28; Sauvageau, 1902, p. 206,
fig. 43; Conferva fusca Hudson, 1798, p. 602. Spanish Rock, April,
Hervey, with propagula.
3.	S. tribuloides Meneghini, 1840, p. 2; Sauvageau, 1901, p. 123,
figs. 28-29; P. B.-A., No. 1923. Not uncommon in shallow rock pools
and on various submerged substances. In pools, South Shore, Far-
low; Harris Bay, Feb., March, Dec., Gravelly Bay, Jan., Hervey;
on Galaxaura, St. David’s, April, Collins. Found once on twigs of
Tamarisk that drooped into the water of Harrington Sound. Propa-
gula common; no sporangia seen.
4.	S. novae-hollandiae Sonder, 1845, p. 50; Sauvageau,-1901,
p. 137, fig. 33. In small quantity, among S. tribuloides, Spanish Rock,
9 In references to this work, the page given is that of the completed and
separate issue; the date, however, is that of the original publication in the
Journal de Botanique.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
73
Harris Bay, March, Hervey. The species is a native of Australia,
but has been found at Martinique and at Barbados; in both these
places it was in company with S. tribuloides, as at Bermuda. It is
a stouter plant than the latter, and the technical difference, though
not striking, seems to be constant.
Family ENCOELIACEAE.
Colpomenia Derbies & Sober.
C. sinuosa (Roth) Derbes & Sober, 1856, p. 11, PI. XXII, figs. 18-
20; Borgesen, 1914, p. 176, fig. 138; P. B.-A., No. 2024; TJlva sinuosa
Roth, 1806, p. 327, PI. XII, fig. 2. Rein; Moseley; Kemp, as Aspero-
coccus sinuosus; Gibbet Island, Tucker’s Town, Gravelly Bay, Har-
rington Sound, Feb., Hungry Bay, April, Hervey. Very common
from Feb. to April, disappearing entirely in July and August, and at
least the first part of September. On exposed shores it forms a nearly
continuous coating, firmly adherent to the rock; in quiet water,
such as the tidal stream at Hungry Bay, it takes the form of sub-
spherical vesicles, up to 20 cm. diam.
Hydroclathrus Bory.
H. cancellatus Bory, 1825, p. 419; Vickers, 1908, PI. XXIII;
Borgesen, 1914, p. 177, fig. 139; P. B.-A., No. 2078. Spanish Rock,
March, April, Hervey. Apparently not common.
Scytosiphon Agardh.
S. Lomentaria (Lyng.) J. G. Agardh, 1848, p. 126; P. B.-A., No.
2079; Chorda Lovientaria Lyngbye, 1819, p. 74, PI. XVIII. E. Inlet,
Feb., Dec., Bailey’s Bay, Jan., Mangrove Bay, Feb., Hervey. Ap-
pears to be a plant of winter and early spring, varying in different
years as to date of appearance, in some years not appearing at all at a
station where it was plenty the year before. It is a rapid grower,
and disappears soon after maturity.74
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Rosenvixgia Borgesen.
R. intricata (J. Ag.) Borgesen, 1914, p. 182; P. B.-A., No. 2173;
Asperococcus intricatus J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 7; Striaria intricata
Vickers, 1905, p. 59; 190S, p. 41, PI. XXIV. Harris Bay, Feb.,
Hervey, with plurilocular sporangia.
Family MYRIOTRICHIACEAE.
Myriotrichia Harvey.
M. repens Hauck, 1879, p. 22; Kuckuck, 1899, p. 21, PI. Ill (of
reprint); P. B.-A., No. 2025; Dichosporangium repens Hauck, 1885,
p. 339, fig. 141. In fronds of Castagnea Zosterae, Cooper’s Island,
April, Collins. The creeping filaments bear abundant unilocular
sporangia; the erect filaments bear each a terminal cluster of pluri-
locular sporangia; no unilocular sporangia were seen on the erect
filaments. Streblonema sphaericum, with both kinds of sporangia,
accompanies the Myriotrichia. As pointed out by Kuckuck, it is
practically impossible to distinguish the two species when both bear
only unilocular sporangia, as is often the case; the presence of erect
filaments in Myriotrichia and their absence in Streblonema is the only
distinguishing character.
Family MESOGLOIACEAE.
Castagnea Derbes & Sober.
C. Zosterae (Mohr) Thuret, fide Borgesen, 1914, p. 184, figs.
144-145; Castagnea mediterranea P. B.-A., No. 1879. Kemp, as
Mesogloia vcrmicularis, M. Griffithsiana and M. Chordariae; Castle
Harbor, Bailey’s Bay, March, Wadsworth; Shelly Bay, Jan., Castle
Harbor, Feb., Hervey; Cooper’s Island, April, Collins. As this
plant seems to be the same as that from the Danish West Indies, we
provisionally give the same name used by Borgesen. It was distrib-
uted by us as C. mediterranea (Kiitz.) Bornet, but is not Cladosiphon
mediterraneus Kiitzing, as shown by comparison with an authentic
specimen of the latter, for which we are indebted to the kindness ofTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
75
Dr. M. A. Howe. It is certainly not C. Zosterae Farlow, 1881, p. 86,
Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 162, but resembles C. virescens Farlow,
1SS1, p. 85, Eudesme virescens P. B.-A., No. 33, which is the same as
Mesogloia virescens Carmichael in Wyatt, Alg. Danm., No. 49.
Though some writers speak of C. virescens as having a solid axis, C.
Zosterae as hollow, for instance Bornet, 1892, p. 236, the statement is
true of the former only in the earlier stages. “ A section of the frond
of a well-developed C. virescens shows a circle of roundish cells around
a central cavity”; Farlow, 1. c. The description and figure of C.
Zosterae Borgesen, agree with the Bermuda plant.
In New England and northern Europe there are two species of
Castagnea, which are well distinguished by Farlow as C. virescens and
C. Zosterae; the former resembles the Bermuda plant; the latter,
quite distinct, is the Myriocladia Zosterae Crouan, Alg. Mar. Finistere,
No. 49, and the Castagnea Zosterae of Le Jolis, 1863, p. 85, fide spec,
authent.; but it may be open to question whether it is the Mesogloia
virescens var. zostericola Harvey, 1846-1851, PL LXXXII, of which
Harve3r says “ only differs in being of smaller size, with less compound
ramification; there is no microscopic character to distinguish it.”
And in the Nereis Bor.-Am., part 1, 1852, p. 127, where he recognizes
two species as distinct, he questions the identity of his Mesogloia
Zosterae with the species of Lyngbye and Areschoug. His plate X. B,
M. virescens, is drawn from a specimen from Sand Key, Florida, to
which we will refer later; we do not think it is the M. virescens of
New England and northern Europe. Plate X. A, M. Zosterae, is
incorrect and misleading, as pointed out by Farlow. If it should
prove that Rivularia Zosterae Mohr, 1810, p. 367, was identical with
Mesogloia virescens Carmichael, Castagnea Zosterae would be the proper
name for the spring plant of New England and northern Europe, and
a new name would be needed for the smaller summer plant now known
by that name. As to the identity of C. virescens of New England and
northern Europe with the Bermuda plant, we are not now prepared to
point out distinctive characters. But the southern plant is usually
stouter, less branched, and with a firmer gelatine. For the purpose
of comparison we have examined a large number of specimens of
Castagnea (or Mesogloia) virescens of northern Europe and New Eng-
land, including specimens from Mrs. Griffiths, Mrs. Wyatt, Greville,
Harvey, Le Jolis etc.; with very few exceptions they bore unilocular
sporangia; none had plurilocular. Of Castagnea (or Myriocladia)
Zosterae we have examined a considerable number, including speci-
mens from Le Jolis and Crouan, and the No. 162 of Farlow, Anderson76
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
& Eaton; with one exception, sterile, all had plurilocular sporangia,
none unilocular. Of the Bermuda plant we have examined many
specimens of different ages and from different stations; with the
exception of a very few, very young or very old individuals, sterile,
all bear both uni- and plurilocular sporangia on the same individual.
To add to the confusion, the plant from Florida, distributed as C.
viediterranea, P. B.-A., No. 481, when compared with the Bermuda
plant now seems to be distinct both from that and from Cladosiphon
mediterraneus Kiitz. The peripheral filaments seem to be not so
much laterally attached to the external longitudinal filaments as
continuations of them or their branches; the basal cell, up to 25 y
diam., followed by several similar colorless cells rapidly diminishing
to about 12 y diam.; above this begins the peripheral filament proper,
with colored cells about 7-9 y diam.; this is several times dicho-
tomous, the cells, except the few lower ones, spherical, increasing in
size up to 15 y, sometimes to 20 y diam., the filaments strongly in-
curved; unilocular sporangia, 70-80 X 55-60 y in the lower forkings.
The frond does not exceed 10 cm. in height, and has few branches.
Harvey’s figure of Mesogloia virescens, 1852, PL X. B, was drawn
from a plant from Sand Key, Florida, and we have examined two
specimens collected by Harvey at that place at that time; they agree
with P. B.-A., No. 481, except that they have no fruit. In Harvey’s
plate fig. 4 represents quite well the upper part of a peripheral filament
of this plant, but is quite different from a filament of C. virescens.
We have found only one European specimen agreeing with P. B.-A.,
No. 481; this is “No. 572, Societe dauphinoise, 1882, Cladosiphon
mediterraneus Kiitz. (Vidit Bornet, 1882) Portofino (Ligurie orientale)
sur les feuilles de Posidonia Caulini. Dr. A. Piccone, Mai, 1876.”
This specimen was received by one of us from Dr. Piccone. Sauva-
geau, 1897, p. 46, discusses Castagnea, assuming correctly enough that
if Castagnea is maintained, Cladosiphon Kiitzing should be divided
between Castagnea, Nemacystus etc. But the name Cladosiphon
clearly antedates Castagnea, and under the international rules should
be retained for C. mediterraneus and its congeners. Eudesme J. G.
Agardh seems to have no claim to distinctness from Cladosiphon.
We refrain from making any new combinations, in the hope that
Kuckuck’s work on the Phaeophyceae may soon appear, and bring
order out of the present chaos.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
77
Family STILOPHORACEAE.
Stilophora J. G. Agardh.
S. rhizodes (Ehrh.) J. G. Agardh, var. adriatica (Ag.) J. G.
Agardh, 184S, p. 85; Sporochnus adriaticus Agardh, 1827, p. 646;
1828-35, PI. XXX. Harrington Sound, April, Hervey, with pluri-
locular sporangia. More slender and delicate than the typical S.
rhizodes, which is of a more northern range.
Family SPOROCHNACEAE.
Sporochnus Agardh.
S. Bolleanus Montagne in Kiitzing, 1859, p. 33, PI. LXXXI,
fig. II; P. B.-A., No. 2174. Dredged in 22 meters on coral rocks
in June, Kemp, as S. pedunculatus; handsome plants with assimila-
tive filaments well developed, Castle Island, Miss Wilkinson; a simi-
lar plant, Miss Peniston, no data; Gravelly Bay, old plants with
mature fruit, washed ashore, Aug., Collins; dredged near Challenger
Reef, in 60 meters, Aug., 1903, Bermuda Biological Station.
Family TILOPTERIDACEAE.
Heterospora Kuckuck.
H. Vidovichii (Meneg.) Kuckuck, 1895, p. 318, PI. IV, figs.
1-20; Haplospora Vidovichii Bornet, 1891, p. 363, PI. VIII, figs.
1-5; P. B.-A., No. 2026; Ectocarpus Vidovichii Meneghini in
Kiitzing, 1845, p. 233; E. crinitus Hauck, 1885, p. 330, not of
Carmichael. Forming rather dense tufts, up to 4 dm. long, on wall
of inlet by the Frascati Hotel, March, Hervey, with monosporangia.
The occurrence here of a representative of the family Tilopteridaceae
is of much interest; barely half a dozen species are known, and all
but this one inhabit the colder waters of the Atlantic. H. Vidovichii
inhabits the Mediterranean, and this is its first recorded occurrence
elsewhere.78
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Family FUCACEAE.
Ascophyllum Stackhouse.
A. nodosum (L.) Le Jolis, 1863, p. 96; Fucus nodosus Linnaeus,
1763, p. 1628; Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CLVIII. Wadsworth, in Farlow
herb.; Inlet, Jan., May, Gravelly Bay, Feb., Shelly Bay, March,
Hervey; Gravelly Bay, April, Shelly Bay, Bethel’s Island, Dec.,
Collins. This species is not uncommonly found among the floating
algae left by the tide but it has never been found attached, and as it
is a conspicuous plant, it is not likely that it has been overlooked. It
is common on the American coast from New Jersey to the arctic
regions, but rarely reaches to low water mark, and does not grow in
places exposed to the full force of the waves. There is no reason to
suppose that it grows here in deep water, or on the outer reefs awash
with the waves, the only class of localities not well explored. Prof.
Sauvageau, to whom we are much indebted for information as to its
habits in Europe, writes us “Jamais je n’ai vu YAscophyllum dans
les stations franchement exposees au choc des vagues, mais toujours
dans les stations plus ou moins abritees, par exemple dans les anses
rocheuses, dans les petits ports, sur les rochers qui emergent parmi
la vase. C’est une plante de mi-maree.” As regards the general
question of brown algae washed ashore in places on the Bay of Biscay,
where they do not grow, he says, “En resume, YAscophyllum, rejete,
arrive en trls bon etat, fructifie ou non, selon la saison, mais on ne
peut dire s’il a flotte trls longtemps, puisqu’il vit sur les rochers a une
trentaine de kilometres de la. L’Himanthalia est dans le mime cas.
Mais le Cystoseira concatenata et le Sargassum vulgare viennent sure-
ment de tres loin, et cependant leurs organes reproducteurs sont aptes
a la fecondation. Les algues brunes, normalment fixees, se conservent
tres bien a l’etat flottant, beaucoup mieux qu’on le croit generalment.
Done, a mon avis, il n’est nullement necessaire que YAscophyllum
croisse aux Bermudes pour que vous l’y trouvez rejete; il peut y
arriver en tres bon etat, et mime capable de produire des fecondations
et des germinations, bien qu’il provienne d’un pays lointain et qu’il
ait flotte longtemps.” It seems to us quite unlikely that the plants
found at Bermuda could have come from the American coast across
the Gulf Stream. The chances are certainly greater for its European
origin, and there is good reason to suppose that it forms a portion,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
79
a relatively small portion, to be sure, of the living and floating brown
algae of the North Atlantic, which have given a certain district of it
the name of the “ Sargasso Sea.” Bouvier, 1907, p. 35, says “ Ca et la,
parmi les Sargasses, on rencontre quelques fragments de Fucus nodo-
sus, arrachees certainement aux rivages des Canaries, de Madere ou
des Azores.” To be sure, Sauvageau, 1907, p. 1084, points out that
the Fucus (Ascophyllum) has never been reported growing at the
Canaries, Madeira or the Azores; but Bouvier’s erroneous assumption
does not invalidate his record of the occurrence of the plant as
described. Borgesen, 1914a, p. 14, note, says “Professor Gran has
most kindly communicated me that Ascophyllum was found in the
northern part of the Sargasso Sea, and rather abundant.” We think
it may be doncluded that Ascophyllum, the original derivation
unknown, continues to live in a floating state among the Sargassum of
the North Atlantic in active vegetation, and at least occasionally
fruiting.
Fucus Linnaeus.
F. vesiculosus Linnaeus, 1763, p. 1636. A single battered but
unmistakable fragment was found washed ashore, Hervey.
Turbinaria Lamouroux.
T. tricostata Barton, 1891, p. 218, PI. LIV, fig. 3; P. B.-A., No.
1877. Gravelly Bay, Jan., Feb., March, April, Aug., Oct., Nov.,
Dec., Hervey; Hungry Bay, July, Collins. Except a few plants
from near the entrance of Hungry Bay, the only locality we have
observed is at Gravelly Bay, where it grows abundantly in pools at
low water mark and sometimes higher up. T. trialata Kiitz., the
common species of the West Indies, we have not found, and though
the two species have much in common, we have found no plants
that would raise any doubt as to their distinctness. Quite young
plants were found in August; in these neither alae nor costae had yet
been formed. The mature plants, in December and January, are
from 10 to 15 cm. high; the root is rather slender, much branched,
2-4 cm. long; as the plants grow close together, the roots are inter-
mixed, but so loosely that individual plants can be separated without
difficulty.80
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Sargassum Agardh.
The Sargassa abound everywhere in warmer water; there have been
very many species described, and new ones are continually added to
the list; undoubtedly there have been many cases where observers
from distant regions have described the same species independently
and in good faith; ultimately one of the names must give way to the
other. On the other hand more conservative botanists have used
the name of a well-known species for a form found at a station distant
from the home of the species, and sooner or later the later named form
will have to be segregated. Whether mistakes made by too radical
or by too conservative treatment are more harmful, will probably
remain an open question in botanical as in other matters. In our
treatment of the Bermuda species, we find in some of them more or
less noticeable differences from the species of the same name elsewhere,
and we have given an account of the characters of each of the species
we recognize, and have drawn these characters from Bermuda speci-
mens, not from descriptions of others.
Key to the Species of Sargassum.
1. Always floating, without fruit or basal attachment.	2.
1. Attached, fruiting.	3.
2. Slender throughout, the leaves very narrow, with aculeate teeth.
1. S. natans.
2. Stouter; leaves lanceolate with triangular teeth. 2. S. fluitans.
3. Stem densely muriculate or with short proliferations.	4.
3. Stem not muriculate, or only slightly and occasionally so.	5.
4. Leaves ovate or broadly lanceolate.	4. S. lendigerum.
4.	Leaves narrowly linear, simple or 1-several times forked.
3. S. linifolium.
5.	Fructification long, slender, filiform, loosely branched.
6.	S. Filipendula var. Montagnei.
5.	Fructification not so slender or elongate.	6.
6.	Receptacles with dentate wings. 8. S. platycarpum var. bermudense.
6. Receptacles wingless.	7.
7.	Individual receptacles on slender pedicels.	3. S. linifolium.
7.	Receptacles fertile throughout.	8.
8.	Receptacles forming a dense glomerule.	7. S. Hystrix.
8.	Receptacles repeatedly forked, branches separate. 5. S. vulgare.
1. S. natans (L.) J. Meyen, 1838, p. 185; Borgesen, 1914, p. 7;
P. B.-A., No. 2180; S. bacciferum Agardh, 1821, p. 6; Harvey, 1852,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
81
p. 54; Fucus natans Linnaeus, 1753, p. 1160; Fuchs bacciferus Turner,
1808, p. 105, PI. XLVII. Stem long, slender, smooth, with more or
less distant similar branches; leaves long, slender, linear, with many
sharp teeth, cryptostomata wanting or inconspicuous; vesicles numer-
ous, on long slender pedicels, and usually with a filiform prolongation;
fructification unknown; unattached, floating near the surface of the sea,
forming loose floating patches, or strips in the line of the direction of
the wind; in quiet water the tips of the leaves project above the water,
like bristles; drifting ashore at all times, and in case of storms in
immense quantities, and used as a fertilizer. It inhabits a large area
in the North Atlantic, within a boundary formed by the Gulf Stream
and its subsidiaries, reaching the coast of Europe, turning south and
then west to its origin in the Gulf of Mexico. It has an active vege-
tative growth, the lower part of the stem decaying, increasing the
number of individuals by fragmentation. It has never been found
attached nor in fruit, and though in all probability originally derived
from an attached form, it now appears to be so changed by its mode of
life that it is unlikely that the attached species from which it was
derived will ever be certainly determined.10
In several instances there have been reports of finding this species
in fruit, but in each case when examined there are circumstances
leading to the conclusion that the plant observed belonged to some
other species.
2.	S. fluitans Borgesen, 1914a, p. 222; P. B.-A., No. 2177; S.
Hystrix var. fluitans Borgesen, 1914, p. 11, fig. 8. Stem rather stout,
mostly smooth, occasionally with a few spines, much branched;
leaves lanceolate to ovate-lanceolate, thickish, cryptostomata present
but not conspicuous, teeth short and triangular; vesicles spherical,
about 5 mm. diam., short-pedicelled, usually without prolongations;
fructification unknown. Floating with S. natans, but less abundant;
propagated by fragmentation only. It may be derived from S.
Hystrix J. Ag., but if so the derivation is remote and the differ-
entiation considerable. Both S. natans and S. fluitans are lighter in
color than the attached species.
3.	S. linifolium (Turn.) Agardh, 1848, p. 18; P. B.-A., No. 2179;
Fucus linifolius Turner, 1811, p. 64, PI. CLXVIII. On rocks above
and below Flatts bridge and at other points in Harrington Sound and
in Hamilton Harbor, Hervey, Collins. From a common base but with-
out any general trunk arise several axes with more or less frequent
10 For fuller discussion of floating Sargassum, see Collins, 1917.82
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
branches, elongate, virgate, bearing leaves, fructification, and short
branches; stems slender, terete, densely muriculate with short simple
or forked papillae, which are occasionally more scattered on the older
parts; leaves thickly set at the tips of the main branches and along
short lateral branches, linear and attenuate to both ends, 1-2 mm.
wide, up to 5 cm. long, simple or forked, margin irregularly dentate with
small distant teeth, in young leaves larger and more frequent; midrib
not specially conspicuous; cryptostomata rather large, a single series
each side of the midrib, rather irregularly spaced; vesicles 3-6 mm.
diam., smooth, or sometimes with cryptostomata, subspherical on a
filiform pedicel of uniform diameter, or pyriform on a pedicel enlarged
above; pedicel smooth, length one and one half to three times the
diameter of the vesicle, usually unarmed, occasionally with a small
mucro, rarely with a short filiform prolongation. Rachis of fructifica-
tion usually short, sterile and filiform, or fertile and torulose, bearing
several alternate, torulose, fertile branches, with subacute tip, one
half to one cm. long; fructification mostly on the lower part of short
branches of the second order with leaves about them on the branches.
The above description refers to the attached plant of quiet waters,
but individuals more slender than the typical form can be found, in
which the stem is almost entirely smooth and the rachis of fructifica-
tion quite elongate. As with other species of Sargassum, individuals
are to be found among the masses of S. natans floating after storms,
and these show a certain resemblance to the latter, but their condition
shows indications of their not persisting.
4. S. lendigerum (L.) Agardh, 1820, p. 9; P. B.-A., No. 2178;
Fucus lendigerum Linnaeus, 1763, p. 1628; Turner, 1808, p. 107, PI.
XLVIII. South shore, various points, Jan., Feb., Apr., Dec., Hervey;
Little Agar’s Island, Nov., Collins. Common on exposed rocks in
shallow water all around the islands. A stout torulose trunk, 1-3 cm.
high, divides into several main axes, often unbranched, occasionally
rather freely branching; axes and branches terete, usually thickly set
with short, simple or forked proliferations, rarely over 1 mm. long;
leaves ovate or broadly lanceolate, margin irregularly undulate or
slightly dentate; occasionally forked, usually much crisped, midrib
distinct, cryptostomata small, scattered; vesicles spherical, smooth,
usually about 3 mm. diam., occasionally 5 mm., on filiform pedicels
usually shorter than the diameter of the vesicle, rarely with short tips.
Fructification of filiform branching receptacles, the main rachis usually
distinct, stouter than the radial branches, which may reach a length
of 2 cm. in the looser forms, but usually do not reach a length of 1 cm.;THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
83
branching more or less dense, when dense often apparently dichoto-
mous, tips acute; sometimes fertile throughout, sometimes rachis or
even branches sterile. Fructification mostly on the upper part of
the axes, often occupying these to the exclusion of leaves and vesicles,
but also sometimes on short branches on the lower part of the axes.
Specially a plant of exposed shores.
5.	S. vulgare Agardh var. foliosissimum (Lamour.) J. G. Agardh,
1S89, p. 108; Fucus foliosissimm Lamouroux, 1813, p. 36, PI. VII,
fig. 1. Cooper’s Island, April, Hervey. From a very short trunk
arise several main axes, mostly smooth, sometimes slightly muricu-
late, bearing more or less numerous similar branches; leaves lanceo-
late to oblong, the margins finely and closely dentate; midrib distinct,
cryptostomata abundant and without definite order on the younger
leaves, often obsolete on the older and thicker leaves; vesicles spheri-
cal, 3-5 mm. diam., without prolongation, on a pedicel equal to the
diameter or longer; receptacles axillary, branching, fertile through-
out, verrucose, shorter than the leaves.
At Spanish Point, March, Hervey, was found a form probably
belonging here, but without fruit; the leaves are narrower and nearly
entire; it may be S. vulgare, typical; S. vulgare varies much in the size
and form of the leaves.
6.	S. Filipendula Ag., var. Montagnei (Bailey) comb. nov.;
S. Montagnei Bailey in Harvey, 1852, p. 58, PI. I. A; S. vulgare var.
Montagnei Farlow, 1881, p. 103; S. Filipendula forma subedentata
J. G. Agardh, 1889, p. 120. Kemp; near Wistowe, floating, Aug.,
Collins. Stem long, slender, filiform, smooth except for a few minute,
scattered papillae on the younger parts, loosely branched; leaves
linear, usually 3-6 mm. wide, up to 15 cm. long, often one or more
times forked, the divisions sometimes equal and symmetrical, oftener
subpinnate and alternate; leaves tapering gradually or abruptly
to the subacute tip; midrib distinct throughout leaves and their
divisions; cryptostomata few, small, scattered, rarely showing a
linear arrangement; margin even or slightly undulate or indistinctly
dentate; vesicles spherical to subpyriform, 2-3 mm. diam., tipped
generally with a mucro, often with a leaf; pedicel in length one and
one half to three times the diameter of the vesicle, sometimes filiform,
often compressed, or with midrib and margin. Bachis of fructifica-
tion filiform, smooth, sterile, elongate, bearing rather distant lateral
branches at first with sterile base, later fertile throughout, sometimes
with a second series of similar branches, all branches at right angles,
of uniform diameter, torulose; ultimate divisions up to 3 cm. long.84
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Generally characterized by the slenderness and delicacy of all the
parts; typical S. Filipendnla, stouter and shorter, with broader and
more dentate leaves and more condensed fructification, has not been
found here.
7.	S. Hystrix J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 7; 1889, p. 91, PI. VI. Stem
terete, smooth; leaves thickish, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, entire
or obscurely dentate, 3-6 cm. long, 4-8 mm. wide, midrib rather
indistinct, no cryptostomata; vesicles spherical, up to 7 mm. diam.,
pedicel short, sometimes imperceptible; fructification in dense glom-
erules of short, verrucose branches; receptacles, vesicles and leaves
densely packed along the little branched axis. Harris Bay, Dec.,
attached, Hervey; washed ashore on Agar’s and Bethel’s Islands
after a storm, Dec., Collins. Apparently recently torn from its
attachment.
While our plant appears to agree in all other respects with S. Hystrix,
the receptacles, though quite verrucose, show no spines or teeth.
We should hardly have ventured to give it this name, but for what is
said by Reinbold in Weber, 1913, as to sexual dimorphism in Sar-
gassum, with presence or absence of spines on the receptacles accord-
ing to sex. We suspect that another instance of dimorphism may be
found in S. platycarpum Montagne and S. vulgare Agardh, at least
the plant distributed under the latter name as P. B.-A., Xo. 178.
We have seen a large number of plants from Florida, some with smooth,
some with spiny receptacles, otherwise indistinguishable.
8.	S. platycarpum Montagne var. bermudense Grunow, 1915,
p. 389. We have not seen this, and include it only on the authority
of Grunow.
Family DICTYOTACEAE.
Spatoglossum Kiitzing.
S. Schroederi (Mert.) J. G. Agardh, 1880, p. 113, in part; 1894,
p. 38; P. B.-A., Xo. 2027; S. Areschougii Vickers. 1905, p. 58; 1908,
part II, p. 38, PL XI; Ulva Schroederi Mertens in Martius, 1826, p. 21;
1827, PI. II, fig. 3; Taonia Schroederi Farlow in Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc.,
Xo. 159. Gravelly Bay, Feb., March, Hervey; Gravelly Bay, April,
Aug., Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. Observed only at these two
stations, and apparently not common. In the water it shows a bril-
liant iridescence. Tetraspores, much like those of Dictyota, were
found on a few plants; there does not seem to have been any previousTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
85
record of them. Tufts of hairs were common; the cells in a definite
rectangular region divide, four cells from an original cortical cell,
and each of these cells grows out into a hair; the hairs are contracted
at base, lower cells about as long as their diameter, moniliform, with
rich contents; upper cells 5-6 diam. long, cylindrical, nearly empty.
It does not seem to us that the distinction made by J. G. Agardh
between S. Schroederi and S. Areschougii can be maintained. Ber-
muda specimens show the forms of frond and characters of dentation
characteristic of both species, as well as intermediate gradations.
Z on aria Draparnaud.
1. Frond rounded, little divided; mostly dorsiventral and prostrate.
1. Z. variegata.
1. Frond erect, with many deep and narrow divisions.	2. Z. lobata.
1.	Z. variegata (Lamour.) Mertens in Martius, 1826, p. 21; 1827,
p. 6, PI. II, fig. 2; Vickers, 1905, p. 58; 1908, PI. VI. B; Borgesen,
1914, p. 197, figs. 151-152; Dictyota variegata Lamouroux, 1813, p. 57,
PI. V, figs. 7-9. Kemp, including some specimens marked Z. lobata;
Wadsworth, No. 6; Moseley, from shallow water down to 31 fathoms;
Hamilton Harbor, Agar’s Cave, Jan., Walsingham, Feb., Farlow;
Gravelly Bay, Jan., Harrington Sound, Feb., Harris Bay, Jan., Nov.;
Inlet, Dec., Hervey; Ely’s Harbor, Aug., Collins. Common nearly
everywhere. It is sometimes found with one side of the lamina quite
firmly attached; sometimes the frond is quite free, with little differ-
ence between the two sides; these differences do not seem to depend
on the depth of water. Dickie, 1874, p. 311, notes that the plants
dredged in 31 fathoms were mostly bluish green in color.
2.	Z. lobata Agardh, 1824, p. 265; Harvey, 1852, p. 105, PI. VII.
C; Vickers, 1905, p. 58; 1908, PI. VI; Borgesen, 1914, p. 199; P. B.-A.,
No. 1876. Kemp; Tucker, No. 5; South Beach, near Paget, Farlow;
Wadsworth, No. 11; Inlet, Jan., Dec., Gravelly Bay, Feb., March,
Dec., Hervey; Gravelly Bay, July, Aug., Ely’s Harbor, Hungry Bay,
July, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. Young plants are common
in Dec.; by the last of Jan. good sized plants are common, and the
plants continue in good condition till May; after that, only old, bat-
tered fronds are to be found. It is common in quiet water as well as
on exposed shores. The best locality we observed was at Gravelly
Bay, where it grew in great tufts in pools and on rocks at low water
mark. The color varies from light to dark brown, the substance from86
COLLINS AND HERVET.
thin and membranaceous to coarse and leathery; the dark, zonate
lines are distinct in the thin, light colored form, imperceptible on the
old, coarse and dark fronds. It differs much in the extent of division
of the fronds, from broad-cuneate and little parted, to fronds consisting
of innumerable narrow divisions, sometimes broad below, narrow
above, always more or less cuneate with apex truncate. Under water
it shows a very brilliant iridescence of peacock blue and green.
Padina Adanson.
1.	Epidermis persistent as an indusium over the spores.	2.
1. X"o indusium; spore band in middle of each second zone between bands
of hairs.	4. P. gymnospora.
2.	Frond dark and thickish, not much calcified; in middle part 2-3 cells
thick; bands of spores alternating with bands of hairs. 3. P. variegata.
2. Lighter colored and thinner; distinctly calcified.	3.
3.	Band of spores above each second band of hairs; frond normally 2 cells
thick.	1. P. sanctae-erueis.
3- One band of spores above and one below each second band of hairs; frond
normally 3 cells thick.	2. P. Pavonia.
1.	P. sanctae-crucis Borgesen, 1914, p. 201, figs. 153-154;
P. B.-A., No. 2082. Harris Bay, Jan., Nov., Hervey; Shelly Bay,
April, Jew’s Bay, Ely’s Harbor, Hungry Bay, July, Gravelly Bay,
Aug., Collins. A rather thin, delicate species, growing mostly in
shallow, quiet water. The color is usually a quite light yellowish
brown on the upper side, the under side being usually covered with a
continuous but quite thin calcareous coating, white or bluish in color.
The dried plant is papyraceous and brittle. Only tetrasporic fruit
has been found, which was on plants collected in July and August.
The indusium consists of the epidermis, which is pushed up by the
spores as they grow, and finally ruptured; being very thin and trans-
parent it is not always easy to make out, but it often happens that
when it is pushed away from the frond, it retains the markings out-
lining the layer of cells beneath; in such case a fine network corre-
sponding to the cells can be seen with the microscope by careful
focusing, on a level with the top of the spores. This form of indusium
has been noted in Zonaria variegata by Sauvageau, 1905, p. 11 (of
reprint.)
2.	P. Pavonia (L.) Gaillon, 182S, p. 371; Harvey, 1S46-51, PI.
XCI; P. B.-A., No. 2081; Fucus pavonius Linnaeus, 1763, p. 1630.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
87
Gates Bay, March, Gibbet Island, April, Hervey. In the Bermuda
material identified with this species the frond is smaller throughout
and generally more delicate than in P. variegata, averaging much the
size and consistency of P. sanctac-crucis, and with a similar calcareous
coating. Tetrasporic fruit was well developed on the material from
both stations noted above. Sterile plants resembling the two species
just mentioned abound in warm shallow water, but can be distin-
guished only by sectioning and counting the layers of cells. In P.
Pavonia the sexual plant, which we have not found here, is monoecious;
in P. variegata it is dioecious, in both it is rare. While all American
forms of Padina were formerly placed under P. Pavonia, this seems to
be the first occurrence of the species on this side of the Atlantic. The
material from Florida distributed as P. Pavonia, P. B.-A., No. 1442a,
and that distributed as P. Durvillaei, P. B.-A., No. 580b, should be
referred to P. variegata; 1442b to P. gymnospora. The plant distrib-
uted as P. Durvillaei, 5S0a, closely resembles P. gymnospora, but in
the specimens now accessible the frond is uniformly two cells thick,
which would bring it under P. australis Hauck; but Mme. Weber, 1913,
p. 180, suggests that the latter may be only a form of P. gymnospora.
The true P. Durvillaei Mont., appears to be found only in the Pacific.
3.	P. variegata (Lamour.) Hauck, 1887, p. 42; P. B.-A., No.
2083; Borgesen, 1914, p. 205, figs. 157-161; Dictyota variegata
Lamouroux, 1809, p. 331. Kemp, May, June, July, as P. Pavonia;
Shelly Bay, Harris Bay, Jan., Gibbet Island, Jan., Nov., Dec., Hervey;
Inlet, July, Aug., Collins. Very variable in form, from orbicular
and undivided up to 15 cm. diam., to fronds split into innumerable
strips, or with many rounded proliferations; in texture from thin and
papery to thick and tough. It is however always darker than the
two preceding species, and with less conspicuous calcification, and
it is more than two cells in thickness, except at the growing edge, and
may be six layers in the older parts. Tetrasporic fruit is rather
common, oogonia infrequent; antheridia are known in this species,
but we have not found them here.
4.	P. gymnospora (Kiitz.) Vickers, 1905, p. 58; 190S, PI. VII;
Borgesen, 1914, p. 202, figs. 155-156; Zonaria gymnospora Kiitzing,
1859, p. 29, PI. LXXI, fig. 11. Farlow, 1881, without exact station.
Observed once only, but in good condition and fruit. Characterized
among our species by the absence of indusium, the frond with one
layer of small cells and one layer of large in cross section, the larger
cells sometimes dividing so as to give a section of three cells; the spore
bands in the center of every second space between hair bands.88
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Dictyopteris Lamouroux.
1. Frond thick, wide, Fueus-like.
1. Frond thin, delicate.
2. Diagonal veins from midrib to margin.
2. No lateral veins.
2. D. Justii.
2.
3. D. plagiogramma.
1. D. delicatula.
1.	D. delicatula Lamouroux, 1809, p. 332, PI. VI, fig. 2 B;
Vickers, 1905, p. 58; 1908, part 2, PI. Ill; Borgesen, 1914, p. 216,
fig. 166; P. B.-A., No. 1924. Castle Harbor, Jan., Farlow; Cave,
Gravelly Bay, Oct., Harris Bay, Heron Bay, Dec., Hervey. Not
uncommon, but mostly small plants, not over 10 cm. high.
2.	D. Justii Lamouroux, 1809, p. 330, PI. VI, fig. 2 A; Vickers,
1905, p. 58; 1908, part 2, PI. V; P. B.-A., No. 1925. Rein, as Haly-
seris 'polypodioides; Mosely, dredged in 31 fathoms; Wadsworth,
March, No. 9; St. David’s Island, April, Kemp, as Fucus ceranoides;
Faxon; Gravelly Bay, Jan., Feb., Oct., Dec., Hervey; Gravelly Bay,
April, July, Aug., Tucker’s Town, April, Outer Reef, Ely’s Harbor,
Hungry Bay, July, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. Occasionally
found growing just below low water mark, but mostly floating, coming
from deeper water. Old and battered plants came in abundantly in
August; only young plants were found in February. It may grow to
a length of 40 cm. Most reports of species of Fucus from Florida and
the West Indies are based on large specimens of this species. Tetra-
spores were found in abundance on plants collected in, August; they
occur on both sides of the frond, the sori originally circular, about
1 mm. diam., or elongate, about 1 mm. wide. They increase in size,
often become confluent, forming irregular patches, more than 1 cm.
across. The sporangia are broadly pyriform, about 45 y high, 25-
35 y diam. seen from above, and closely packed.
3.	D. plagiogramma (Mont.) Vickers, 1905, p. 58; 1908, part 2,
PI. IV; Haliseris plagiogramvia Montagne, 1837, p. 356. Kemp,
May, as Haliseris polypodioides; this single specimen, large and in
fine condition, is the only Bermuda record.
2. Frond rather broad, with more or less distinct rachis, bearing alternate
divisions; tips not tapering, either blunt or with two points.
8. D. dentata.
Dictyota Lamouroux.
1. Margin with small sharp teeth.
1. Margin even or uneven, without teeth.
3. D. ciliata.
2.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
89
2.	Frond dichotomously branched, with or without lateral proliferations.
3.
3.	Frond usually rather broad, very regularly dichotomous, axils usually
wide, tips rounded, proliferations on old plants only. 1. D. dichotoma.
3. Not with above combination.	4.
4.	Frond very narrow, almost filiform throughout.	5.
4.	Frond of varying width, not appearing filiform throughout.	6.
5.	Regularly dichotomous, few or no proliferations except in very old plants.
2. D. linearis.
5.	Dichotomous in younger parts, elsewhere with many proliferations, often
much entangled.	6. D. divaricata.
6.	Fronds narrow, dichotomous, few or no proliferations.	7.
6.	Fronds broad or narrow, divisions of dichotomies often unequal, some-
times appearing subpinnate, proliferations frequent.
5. D. Bartayresii.
7.	Dichotomies distant, regular, divisions equal.	3. D. indica.
7.	Dichotomies close, some divisions long, some short, patent, acute.
4. D. cervicomis.
1.	D. dichotoma (Huds.) Lamouroux, 1809, p. 331; Harvey,
1846-51, PI. CIII; P. B.-A., No. 2175; Ulva dichotoma Hudson, 1798,
p. 476. Rein; Hamilton, Kemp; up to 31 fathom depth, Moseley;
Tucker, No. 11; Cave near Ducking Stool, Farlow; Faxon; Build-
ings Bay, Inlet, Dec., Hervey. This species, the common one of
Europe and the most widely distributed of the genus, seems to be
rather uncommon in Bermuda; we have found it of only moderate
size, not at all like the large plants from North Carolina distributed
as P. B.-A., No. CXX. Antheridia have once been observed, but
no other form of fruit. There is little indication of rhizoidal filaments
in the Bermuda plants.
2.	D. linearis (Ag.) Greville, 1830, p. XLIII; Kiitzing, 1859, p.
9, PI. XXI, fig. II; P. B.-A., No. 2031; Zonaria linearis Agardh,
1820, p. 134. Jew’s Bay, July, Collins. In loose floating masses,
antheridia fairly frequent, no other fruit observed. The frond is
very narrow, seldom over 1 mm.; the forkings are rather distant,
axils narrow. The lower part of the frond was old and dry, but
showed no proliferations; no rhizoidal filaments were seen.
3.	D. indica Sonder in Kiitzing, 1859, p. 8, PI. XVII, fig. 1;
Vickers, 1905, p. 59; 1908, part 2, PI. XVIII; P. B.-A., No. 2030.
Kemp, as D. fasciola, in part; Ely’s Harbor, Aug., Collins. Our
plants agree with the narrower form distributed by Miss Vickers under
No. 78; the width of the frond from 1-2 mm. remaining practically
the same throughout in each individual. The divisions are quite90
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
regularly dichotomous throughout, the axils rather wide and rounded,
the divisions immediately incurving and often becoming parallel, the
apices rounded. Antheridia of the usual form were found on these
plants; also, on the same plants, scattered or in twos, tetrasporangia;
none of these were found showing the regular division into fours, but
in many the contents had divided into many small squarish cells, the
sporangium enlarging to two or three times its former dimensions,
and developing a point of growth at the tip. This closely parallels
the development in D. dichotoma, described and figured by Reinke,
1878, p. 8, PL I, figs. 31-35. The occurrence on the same frond with
antheridia is, however, noteworthy. We hardly see how D. volubilis
Vickers, Algues de la Barbade, No. 78a, can be distinguished from the
present species, apart from the spiral twisting of the frond. A plant
in the Kemp herbarium, marked D. fasciola, is intermediate between
D. indica and D. volubilis of the Algues de la Barbade.
4.	D. cervicornis Kutzing, 1S59, p. 11, PI. XXIV, fig. II; D.
fasciola Harvey, 1852, p. 108, PI. VIII. B., not of Lamouroux. Rein,
as D. fasciola. The true D. fasciola has slender fronds, regularly but
not very closely dichotomous, the divisions all developing equally and
ending at nearly the same level. In D. cervicornis one division is
frequently short, acute and erect, giving quite a different habit, which
is well characterized by the specific name.
5.	D. Bartayresii 11 Lamouroux, 1809, p. 331; D. Bartayresiana,
Harvey, 1852, p. 110, PI. VIII. C.; P. B.-A., No. 1874. Kemp, as D.
fasciola, in part; in shallow water, Moseley; St. David’s Island, from
half tide down, April, Shelly Bay, May, Gravelly Bay, Hungry Bay,
July, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins; Gibbet Island, Jan., Oct., Dec.,
Hervey. This seems to be the species of Dictyota occurring most
frequently in Bermuda. It is quite variable, and narrow forms cer-
tainly show similarity to D. divaricata. On comparing the accounts
given of the species by different authors, and the specimens from dif-
ferent localities distributed under this name, one is led to suspect that
more than one species is really in question. As originally described,
stress was laid on the acute apices, but later authors include forms with
distinctly blunt apices. Both forms occur among the Bermuda
material we have studied. It is probable that all species of the genus
11 This species is generally known as D. Bartayresiana, but in the original
publication by Lamouroux the specific name is Bartayresii. Few authors
refer to this rare and neglected paper, almost all starting from a later publi-
cation of the same year, 1809a, p. 43, in which the author, without stating
any reason, substitutes the name Bartayresiana.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
91
are subject to much variation with age and environment, and much
study of living plants is needed before we can get a clear idea of specific
lines. What we consider as the normal form of the species in Bermuda
closely resembles No. 72 of Miss Vickers Algues de la Barbade; in
this some apices are acute, some rounded, on the same individual.
The branching seems intermediate between D. dichotoma and D.
dentata, with a suggestion of lateral branching not found in the former,
but not the distinctive character as in the latter. Antheridia were
common in material collected at all seasons; tetraspores occurred
occasionally on the same individual with antheridia, in July and
August. No rhizoidal filaments were seen. Mme. Weber, 1913,
p. 182, states that the type of D. Bartayresii cannot be found; she
speaks of Harvey’s figure as excellent, and we have taken it for our
standard.
6.	D. divaricata Lamouroux, 1809, p. 331, not of Kiitzing, 1859,
p. 10, PI. XXIII, fig. 1; D. cicutiloba Kiitzing, 1859, p. 13, PI. XXIX,
fig. 1, not of J. Ag. Inlet, Gravelly Bay, Dec., Hervey. Fronds as
narrow as in D. linearis, but the dichotomous habit, distinct in young
growing branches, is quite obscured in the older parts by the abundant,
mostly short, proliferous branches. By these the fronds are often
so densely matted that it is not easy to disentangle any individual
plant. Antheridia are abundant in this material, but no other form
of fruit was observed. The fronds seem to attach themselves by inter-
laced proliferous branches, with a few short, monosiphonous rhizoidal
filaments close to the tip.
7.	D. ciliata J. G. Agardh,12 1841, p. 5; Harvey, 1852, p. 110,
PI. VIII. A.; D. crenulata P. B.-A., No. 1875, an J. Ag. ?. Rein;
Kemp, May, June; South Shore near Paget, Feb., Castle Harbor,
Feb., Farlow; Gravelly Bay, Jan., Feb., Harris Bay, Dec., Hervey;
Causeway, April, Shelly Bay, May, Hungry Bay, July, Collins.
There is considerable variation in the material which we now include
under D. ciliata, but after a re-examination of the form that we dis-
tributed as D. crenulata, we do not feel justified in keeping it distinct.
It seems to us also that D. crenulata from Barbados, Vickers, No. 75,
12 The first use of the combination Dictyota ciliata is by Lamouroux, 1809,
p. 331, where a synonym is given, Fucus pseudociliatus Lamouroux, 1805,
p. 41; a description is given of the latter and figure, PI. XXX, fig. 2; the
locality is the Mediterranean. It is now generally acknowledged to be
Taonia atomaria (Good. & Woodw.) J. Ag. Being a name proposed for a
plant recognized by Lamouroux as already named, Dictyota ciliata Lamouroux
never had any standing, and cannot interfere with the subsequent D. ciliata
J. Ag.92
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
of which we have examined several specimens, belongs under D.
ciliaia. Agardh, 1848, p. 94, says of D. crenulata “margine tenui
dentibus brevissimis late triangularibus initio fere serrato, demum
dentato aut crenato.” Harvey, 1S52, says “The margin is undulated,
and closely eroso-denticulate, or jagged with unequal, deltoid or subu-
late, tooth-like processes.” In the Bermuda plants the margin is
quite even, and the teeth are of uniform size and never very closely
set. We have, however, seen a specimen of D. crenulata from the
Suhr herbarium “West Indien,” that fully agrees with Agardh’s
and Harvey’s descriptions. In the Bermuda material of this species
confervoid rhizoidal filaments arise from the lower part of the main
axis of the frond, often forming a dense, continuous mass for several
cm.; proliferations are few and insignificant. Antheridia and oogonia
were found on specimens collected in February, tetrasporangia on
specimens collected in July.
8. D. dentata Lamouroux, 1809, p. 331; Kiitzing, 1859, p. 15,
PI. XXXV, fig. I; D. Mertensii (Mart.) Kiitzing, 1859, p. 15, PI.
XXXVI, fig. I; Uha Mertensii Martius, 1826, p. 21; 1827, PI. I;
P. B.-A., Xo. 1926; I). Brongniartii J. G. Agardh, 1841, p. 5; Kiitzing,
1859, p. 15, PL XXXV, fig. II; D. subdmtata Kiitzing, 1859, p. 14,
PI. XXXIII, fig. II. Kemp, as D. crenulata, in part; Gravelly Bay,
Jan., Hervey, Aug., Collins; Hungry Bay, July, Collins. J. G.
Agardh, 1880, p. 98, gives D. Mertensii as a synonym of D. Brong-
niartii, mentioning D. subdentata without expressing an opinion as to
whether it should be referred to D. dentata or D. Brongniartii; later,
1894, p. 70, he recognizes D. dentata, D. Mertensii and I). Brongniartii
as distinct species. Hauck, 1SSS, p. 466, unites all four under the
oldest name, D. dentata, as it seems to us rightly. The distinctive
characters are found in the greater or less distinctness of the axis and
branches, and in the character of the terminal segments. In the
abundant material we found in Bermuda, there were individuals with
the primary axis narrower and firmer than the lateral segments, and
others, apparently mostly younger individuals, in which all was
uniformly membranaceous. Typical D. dentata has segments ending
in acute, spinous tips; typical D. Mertensii has segments short-
cuneate, with truncate or emarginate tips. It is not uncommon to
find both these types on the same individual. In comparing the
vegetative structure of D. dentata with that of D. dichotoma, as de-
scribed by Reinke, 1878, several points are to be noted. The main
axis is thick, and somewhat flattened, but can hardly be described as
a “rundtrieb.” In old plants, there grow from this, for a distance ofTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
93
three or four cm. from the base, descending, terete, branching fila-
ments, of an average diam. of one half mm., forming a loose felt. A
cross section shows a densely cellular structure, the cells much smaller
than in the median layer of the frond, the superficial cells much like
those of the frond. From the superficial cells issue, not continuously
but in groups, monosiphonous filaments, 20-25 y diam., the cells 2-4
diam. long, nodes somewhat constricted; these filaments are mostly
simple, occasionally with short branches; when a filament reaches the
substratum the terminal cell forms a coralloid expansion as an organ
of attachment. Other species of Dictyota, D. ciliata for instance, are
attached by rhizoidal filaments of a similar character, but arising
directly from the frond; D. dentata is the only Bermuda species in
which they arise from descending cellular branches. In older plants
prolifications are common from the surface of the frond, sometimes
papillose to clavate, sometimes flattened with rounded outline.
None were observed over 1 mm. in length; the papillose-elavate
form seemed to be of a similar character to the descending filaments
developed near the base. Antheridia were common in material col-
lected in Jan., July and Aug.; no other fruit was observed.
Dilophus J. G. Agardh.
D. guineensis (Kiitz.) J. G. Agardh, 1880, p. 108; Vickers, 1905,
p. 59; 1908, part 2, p. 37, PI. IX; Borgesen, 1914, p. 214, figs. 164-
165; P. B.-A., No. 20S0; Spatoglossuvi guineense Kutzing, 1S43, p. 339;
1859, PI. XLVI, fig. I. South Shore near Paget, Fallow; Gravelly
Bay, March, Hervey.94
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Class RHODOPHYCEAE.
Family BANGIACEAE.
Bangia Lyngbye.
B. fuscopurpurea (Dillw.) Lyngbye, 1819, p. 83, PI. XXIV.
C; P. B.-A., Xo. 2084; Conferva fuscopurpurea Dillwyn, 1809, p. 54,
PI. XCII. On exposed rock, North Shore near Shelly Bay, April,
Fairyland, Dec., Collins; in tufts on wall by Palmetto Vale, Harring-
ton Sound, March, Hervey. In the North Shore and Fairyland
stations there were scattered filaments only, imperceptible except on
microscopic examination. At the Sound station the tufts were sev-
eral cm. long. In all cases it was a slender form, mostly monosi-
phonous, rarely over four cells to a segment.
Porphyra Agardh.
P. atropurpurea (Olivi) De Toni, 1897, p. 17; P. B.-A., No. 2085;
P. leucoslicta P. B.-A., No. 1927; Ulva atropurpurea Olivi, 1791, p.
153, PI. I—III. Kemp, May, as P. ladniaia-, “ Spitall Lake Ferry”
May, Kemp, unnamed specimen in herb.; on mangroves below Flatts
Bridge, April, May, Collins; Ely’s Harbor, May, Hervey. At Flatts
Bridge the Porphyra began to be visible about April 20, 1912, growing
on mangroves in company with Monostroma latissimum; both minute
when first observed, but growing rapidly up to May 3, when we left
Bermuda. When next at this place, from July to Sept., 1913, the
Porphyra was not to be found. The Ely’s Harbor plant is of moderate
size, up to 6 cm. long; the specimens in the Kemp herbarium reach
10 cm. in length. P. vulgaris of Moseley is undoubtedly this species.
Erythrotrichia Areschoug.
E. carnea (Dillw.) J. G. Agardh, 1882, p. 15, PI. I, figs. 8-10;
P. B.-A., No. 2032; E. ceramicola Farlow, 1881, p. 113; Conferva
carnea Dillwyn, 1809, p. 54, PI. LXXXIV. Common on various
algae, Jan., Feb., Hervey; April, May, July, Aug., Nov., Dec., Col-
lins; on submerged tamarisk branches, Harrington Sound, May,
Collins.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
95
Erythrocladia Rosenvinge.
E. subintegra Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 73, figs. 13-14; Borgesen,
1915, p. 7, figs. 3-4; P. B.-A., No. 2086. On Bryopsis pennata,
Tucker’s Town, April; on Caulerpa crassifolia, Hungry Bay, May,
Collins; on Cladophora catenifera, Gravelly Bay, Feb., Hervey.
Probably common, but perceptible only on microscopic examination
when it appears in the form of minute orbicular disks, of closely set
radiating filaments, dichotomously branched, united laterally except
at the edge, closely adherent to the host. At Gibbet Island it grew
in company with Pringsheimia scutcda, the fronds of which have much
the same structure; their bright green color contrasts strongly with
the red of the Erythrocladia.
Goniotrichum Ktitzing.
1.	Filaments one or at most two cells wide.	1. G. elegans.
2.	Main filaments many cells wide.	2. G. Humphreyi.
1.	G. elegans (Chauv.) Le Jolis, 1863, p. 103; Rosenvinge, 1909,
p. 75, fig. 15; Borgesen, 1915, p. 4, fig. 2. Bangia elegant Chauvin,
1842, p. 33. On many species of algae, especially on Codium and its
epiphytes, very frequently met with as isolated individuals, rarely
in large quantity. The filaments are often simple; when branched,
the branching approaches lateral rather then dichotomous; the cells
are 10-15 p diam., spherical or slightly compressed or elongate; they
are smallest at the base of the filament, largest near the apex, while
the filament is largest at the base, up to 25 p, tapering slightly towards
the apex. Lateral division of cells by an oblique wall is not uncom-
mon. It is quite distinct from the duplication by displacement
described by Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 75, and seems to be a normal process.
2.	G. Humphreyi Collins, 1901, p. 251; P. B.-A., No. 421;
Bangiopsis subsimplex Borgesen, 1915, p. 10, figs. 5 and 6, not Comp-
sopogon subsimplex Mont. Among other algae, Ectocarpus Mitchellae,
Calothrix fusco-violacea, Enteromorpha species, etc., forming a dense
growth on the bottom of a rock pool near Gravelly Bay, Jan.,
Hervey. The fronds are more freely branched than in the material
from Jamaica, but the main stems are not as stout; otherwise they
are identical.96
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Family HELMINTHOCLADIACEAE.
Acrochaetium Nageli.
A conservative course has been followed by us in regard to the
plants belonging to this genus. No such richness of new forms has
been found here as by Borgesen in the Danish West Indies, but we
cannot claim to have made as thorough a study as he has, and it is
very unlikely that all the Bermuda forms have been discovered and
listed. We include under Acrochaetium the marine species formerly
passing under Chantransia, many of which have recently been juggled
back and forth, only too often.
1.	Original spore remaining manifest at base of filament.
1.	Original spore not distinguishable.
2.	Basal cell with descending endophytic and erect free filaments
2.	No descending endophytic filaments.
3.	Cells 8-10 y diam., 4-5 diam. long.	3
3.	Cells 12-14 y diam., 2-3 diam. long.
4.	Cells short, subspherical.
4.	Cells long, cylindrical.
5.	Frond arising from a disk.
5.	Frond not arising from a disk.
6.	Horizontal filaments on surface of host.
6.	Horizontal filaments endophytic only.
7.	Horizontal filaments producing endophytic branches.
2.
5.
3.
4.
A. corymbiferum.
4. A. barbadense.
2. A. crassipes.
A. Dufourii,
A. Thuretii.
6.
,	7.
A. Hypnae.
1.
8.
9.
7.
7. Horizontal filaments without endophytic branches.
8.	Erect filaments 6-12 y diam.	6.
8.	Erect filaments 4r-5 y diam.	5.
A. Nemalionis.
8.
A. Sagraeanum.
A. leptonema.
1.	A. Dufourii Collins, P. B.-A., No. 1594; Chantransia Dufourii
Collins, 1911, p. 187; P. B.-A., No. 2087. On Didyota ciliata, Hungry
Bay, Dec., Hervey. Forming a dense fringe on the edge of the host.
The basal cell (original spore) remains distinct, attached to the host
by a circular disk, of diameter larger than that of the cell. This
development is of the same character as that in Chantransia collopoda
Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 81, but on a smaller scale; it is found also in
another Bermuda species, A. crassipes.
2.	A. crassipes Borgesen, 1915, p. 20, fig. 11; Chantransia cras-
sipes Borgesen, 1909, p. 1, fig. 1; P. B.-A., No. 2033. On Ceramium
clavulatum and Polysiphonia ferulacea, St. David’s Island, Feb., and
on Callithamnion Hookeri, Gravelly Bay, April, Hervey.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
97
3.	A. corymbiferum (Thuret) comb. nov.; Chantransia corym-
bifera Thuret in Le Jobs, 1863, p. 107; Bornet & Thuret, 1876, PI. V,
fig. 3; P. B.-A., No. 1880. On Dudresnaya crassa, Salt Kettle, Feb.,
Spanish Point, March, Buildings Bay, April, Hervey; Shelly Bay,
May, Collins. In Europe and California this species occurs on Hel-
minthocladia calvadosii; although the latter is common in Bermuda,
the Acrochaetium has not been observed on it, but seems to occur
generally on the Dudresnaya. Its filaments have some resemblance
to those of the host, and the resemblance might puzzle one unfamiliar
with both. But usually antheridia or cystocarps can be found.
4.	A. barbadense (Vickers) Borgesen, 1915, p. 45; Chantransia
barbadensis, Vickers, 1905, p. 60. On Liagora elongata, Buildings Bay,
March, Hervey. This plant resembles A. corymbiferum, but is kept
distinct by Bornet, 1904, p. XX, as well as by Miss Vickers, the dis-
tinctive characters being the stouter and shorter cells, and the less
developed basal portion. We have compared our plant with an
authentic specimen from Miss-Vickers, also on Liagora elongata, and
find them to agree, except that while in the Bermuda plant most of
the filaments are composed of cells agreeing in dimensions with Miss
Vickers plant and description, in others the dimensions approach
those of A. corymbiferum. It is possible that future observations
may show that the difference is not specific.
5.	A. leptonema (Rosenv.) Borgesen, 1915, p. 31; Chantransia
leptonema Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 118, figs. 47-48. On Dictyopteris
Justii, Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins. Our smallest species of the
genus.
6.	A. Sagraeanum Bornet, 1904, p. XXI; P. B.-A., No. 2181;
Cladophora Sagraeana Montagne, 1838, p. 459. On Zonaria lobata,
Gravelly Bay, Aug., Collins; On Dictyopteris Justii, Buildings Bay,
July, Hervey. The Buildings Bay plant almost entirely covers the
Dictyopteris with a dense coating, the individual plants up to 5 mm.
high, main filaments about 12 y diam., branches seldom under 7 y.
These dimensions are greater than those given by Bornet in his
description, but as all other characters agree, it must be considered a
luxuriant form of this species. Monospores, 1S-22 X 8-10 y were
observed, on unicellular pedicels in a series on the inner side of a
branch near the base. On other individuals were observed tetraspores,
not before known for the species. They were arranged similarly to the
monospores, but were larger and relatively broader, 28-34 X 17-27 y.
The division is in the form indicated by Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 85, as
characteristic of the genus, cruciate with the first division horizontal;98
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
sometimes the division proceeds no farther, but usually a vertical
division occurs in one of the halves, often in both, but in the latter
case the divisions of the two are seldom in the same plane.
7.	A. Nemalionis (De Not.) Borgesen, 1915, p. 55; Chantransia
Nemalionis Rosenvinge, 1909, p. 126, figs. 53-54; Callithamnion
Nemalionis De Notaris in Erb. Critt. Ital., No. 952. Harrington
Sound, April, Collins, growing on Tamarisk branches which had bent
down until submerged. As in A. Sagraeanum the erect filaments
arise from a plexus of irregular horizontal filaments, but in A. Nema-
lionis the latter emit descending filaments which penetrate the host.
In the Bermuda plant these are less developed than in the European
plant growing on Nemalion, probably on account of the more resisting
character of the substratum of Tamarisk, as compared with Nemalion.
8.	A. Thuretii (Bornet) comb, nov.; Chantransia Thuretii Kylin,
1907, p. 119, fig. 28; C. efflorescent forma Thuretii Bornet, 1904, p.
XVI. On Codium decorticatum, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins.
With monospores.
9.	A. Hypneae Borgesen, 1915, p. 51, fig. 54; Chantransia Hypneae
Borgesen, 1909, p. 2, fig. 2. On Ceramium clamdatum, in company
with A. crassipes, St. David’s Island, Feb., Hervey. With mono-
spores.
Trichogloea Kiitzing.
T. Herveyi Setchell ms.; P. B.-A., No. 2034. In tide pools,
Gravelly Bay, March, April, Hervey; from low water mark to two
meters depth, near Cooper’s Island, April, May, Collins. Extremely
gelatinous, not calcified. Appearing in March, but not found after
midsummer.
Helminthocladia J. G. Agardh.
H. calvadosii (Lamour.) Setchell in P. B.-A., No. 2035; Dumontia
calvadosii Lamouroux in Duby, 1830, p. 941; Nemalion purpureum
Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CLXI; Helminthocladia purpurea J. G. Agardh,
1851, p. 414. Bailey’s Bay, Feb., Castle Harbor, March, Wadsworth;
Dingle Bay, March, North Shore, April, Old Ferry Road, April,
Hervey; Tucker’s Town, St. David’s Island, Long Bird Island, April,
Collins. Specimens in Kemp herbarium, marked Helminthora divari-
cata and Helminthocladia divaricata both belong here. On stones
from half tide down, not uncommon in quiet water; antheridia andTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
99
cystocarps in April. Prof. Setchell has called our attention to Lamou-
roux’s name which considerably antedates the Harveyan name in
general use.
Liagora Lamouroux.
1.	Not calcified.	4. L. pectinata.
I. Calcified.	2.
2.	Very soft and gelatinous.	3. L. pulverulenta.
2.	Firmer.	3.
3.	Calcareous coating continuous and smooth.	1. L. valida.
3.	Calcareous coating loose, penetrated by assimilative filaments.
2. L. elongata.
1. L. valida Harvey, 1853, p. 138, PI. XXXI. A; Borgesen,
1915, p. 70, figs. 71-75; P. B.-A., No. 1929. Rein; Kemp; St.
David’s Island, Feb., April, Buildings Bay, April, Hervey; Cooper’s
Island, April, Aug., Collins. The most common of the Bermuda
species of Liagora, and generally easily recognized by the continuous
calcareous coating and firm, little gelatinous consistency. It occurs
in its best condition just below low water mark, but may extend up
nearly to high water mark. In many places it forms a continuous
zone between tide marks, the individual plants short and stunted,
mostly chalky white. When growing in more favorable conditions
a pinkish shade shows through the coating more or less.
2.	L. elongata Zanardini, 1851, p. 35; 1858, p. 274, PI. VI, fig. 1;
Borgesen, 1915, p. 67, figs. 67-70; P. B.-A., No. 2088; L. corymbosa
J.	G. Agardh, 1S96, p. 104. Kemp, July, unnamed specimen in herb.;
Miss Wilkinson; Gates Bay, Buildings Bay, March, St. David’s
Island, May, Hervey; Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. Cystocarps
in March. Not as variable as other species of the genus, and usually
recognized easily by the light purple-brown color, the light and loose
calcification, and the long, rather distantly dichotomous fronds, of
nearly uniform diameter. L. corymbosa, according to J. G. Agardh,
1896, p. 104, “ Hab. ad littora Floridae et insulas Bermudas.” Speci-
mens agreeing fairly well with Agardh’s description were collected at
Castle Harbor by Wadsworth, March, 1890; at Tobacco Bay, March
11, 1914, Hervey; but it is impossible to separate them from L.
elongata. As to characters derived from internal structure used by
Agardh in his treatment of the genus, 1. c., we have not been able to
apply them, as we find them inconstant. He divides Liagora into
two subgenera, Euliagora and Goralia, the former with an inner layer100
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
of longitudinal filaments, subdistant, large and small intermixed, the
outer usually small, the fascicles of the cortical layer free from each
other except as united by the general gelatinous coating. In Goralia
the larger filaments of the inner layer are densely packed, the smaller
being on the surface only, the fascicles of the cortical layer adherent
and confluent. L. pulverulenta is placed in Euliagora, L. valida in
Goralia; but in both species as they occur in Bermuda we have found
large central filaments branching and producing smaller filaments,
with no definite position in the central strand; generally the cortical
fascicles are borne on the smaller filaments of the central strand,
but not infrequently on the larger ones. The density of the cortical
fascicles and their mutual adhesion or freedom seem to depend largely
on age or activity of growth; they often vary much in the same in-
dividual.
3. L. pulverulenta Agardh, 1822, p. 396; Borgesen, 1915, p. 80,
figs. S7-92; P. B.-A., No. 1928. Miss Peniston; Castle Harbor,
Harrington Sound, Cooper’s Island, March, Wadsworth; St. David’s
Island, Feb., May, Tobacco Bay, March, Hervey; Cooper’s Island,
Shelly Bay, April, Collins. Very soft and gelatinous, collapsing into
a shapeless jelly when taken from the water, but not difficult to ar-
range in natural form on paper if dried without pressure or with very
slight pressure.
L. pectinata sp. nov. Fronde submolli, ecalcarea, rubro-purpurea,
ad 20 cm. alta; ramis primariis inf erne nudis vel ramulis paucis
brevibus munitis, superne ramos gerentibus frequentes breves, alter-
nantes vel secundatos, ramulos similes gerentes; ramis et ramulis
omnibus, primariis exceptis, plus minusve sinuosis et curvatis, ultimis
patentibus, in- vel recurvatis, saepe pectinato-secundatis; apicibus
abrupte acutis. Strato axili, circa 150 p diam., filamentis dense
compactis; cellulis circa 20 p diam., 4-8 diam. longis; faseiculis
filamentorum assimilatorium 600-800 p longis, densis, aequilongis,
superficiem aequalem continuam frondis formantibus; filamentis
repetite dichotomis, cellulis inferioribus 5-7 p diam., 5-8 diam. longis,
subcyclindricis; superioribus brevioribus, crassioribus, ovoideis;
terminalibus 8-10 p diam., 2-3 diam. longis, interdum pilos breves,
circa 4/i diam., ferentibus. Fructificatione ignota.
Frond rather soft, without incrustation, dull red-purple, up to 20 cm.
high; main branches naked below or with a few short ramuli, above
with numerous alternate or secund branches, bearing similar ramuli,
all but the main branches more or less sinuous and curved, the lesser
divisions patent, in- or recurved, often pectinately secund; all taperingTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
101
suddenly to an acute point. Central strand about 150 /u diam., of
closely packed filaments, cells about 20// diam., 4-8 diam. long;
fascicles of assimilative filaments 600-800 // long, dense, even-topped,
making a continuous smooth surface to the frond; filaments many
times dichotomous, lower cells 5-7 // diam., 5-8 diam. long, subcylin-
drical; upper cells shorter, stouter, more ovoid; end cells 8-10//
diam., 2-3 diam. long, occasionally with a short hair, about 4 // diam.
Fructification unknown. Cooper’s Island, April, Hervey.
The peripheral filaments do not arise directly from the cells of the
central strand; at the summit of one of these cells a short conical or
ovoid cell is formed, from which radiate the basal filaments of several
peripheral fascicles; these filaments are usually straight and un-
branched for 200-400 //, then dichotomous. The substance is softer
than in L. valida, not as soft as in L. pulverulenta. The reference to
the genus Liagora is from the structural characters; we have found
no fruit. As is well known, the amount of calcification varies much in
the different species, but there is only one species recorded practically
free from lime, L. dubia (Bory) Bornet in De Toni, 1905, p. 1628;
Cladostephus dubius Bory, 1832, p. 331, PI. XXXVIIbis, fig. 6.
Little is known of this species beyond Bory’s plate and description,
but it seems to be quite distinct from the present species.
Family CHAETANGIACEAE.
Scinaia Bivona.
S. complanata (Collins) Cotton, 1907, p. 260; Setchell, 1914, p.
100, PI. XI, figs. 19-22; S. furcellata var. compla7iata Collins, P. B.-A.,
No. 836; 1906, p. 110. Farlow. A single specimen in the Farlow
herbarium is the only representative of the species and genus that we
have seen from Bermuda; as the segregation of the forms till recently
included under S. furcellata has only just been made, it is impossible
to locate the S. furcellata recorded by Moseley, “ a single specimen
dredged.”
Galaxaura Lamouroux.
Representatives of this genus are common all around the islands,
but the distinguishing of species is very difficult. We note below five
species in regard to which we feel some confidence, but we have many102
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
collections that cannot be placed under any of them, and to which
we do not venture to give names. Kjellman, 1900, gives full descrip-
tions of many species founded by him on material in Scandinavian
herbaria, but without descriptions of older species, and with little
indication of the distinguishing characteristics between the latter and
his new species. Howe, 1917, shows that in one case what Kjellman
considers as two sections of the genus are really sexual and asexual
forms of the same species. Beside the five species listed below, we
can only say that we have also forms resembling G. fasciculata Kjellm.,
G. ramvlosa Kjellm., and G. fruticulosa Kjellm. Moseley reports
G. rugosa and G. lapidescens, from both of which species, as formerly
understood, Kjellman segregated new species. Rein reports G. fas-
ligiata, but we have not been able to see a specimen.
G. flagelliformis Kjellman, 1900, p. 47, PI. Ill, figs. 2-11; PI.
XX, fig. 16; Borgesen, 1916, p. 93, figs. 99-101. Castle Island, Feb.,
Hervey.
G. sqijalida Kjellman, 1900, p. 55, PI. VI, figs. 1-12; PI. XX, fig. 9;
Borgesen, 1916, p. 102, figs. 108-111; P. B.-A., No. 1882. Harris
Bay and other points on the South Shore, at all seasons. In pools
from half tide to low water, in dense tufts or often a much branched
individual plant, about 10 cm. high, varying much in smoothness,
firmness, and in density of branching; a favorite host for many species
of small algae.
G. cylindrica (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1821, p. 22, PI. XXII,
fig. 4; Kjellman, 1900, p. 64, PI. VIII, figs. 34-42; PI. XX, fig. 53;
Borgesen, 1916, p. 106; Corallina cylindrica Ellis & Solander, 1786,
p. 114, PI. XXII, fig. 4. Miss Wilkinson, a single specimen, without
exact locality.
G. marginata (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1816, p. 264; Kjellman,
1900, p. 77, PI. XX, fig. 44; Borgesen, 1916, p. 106, figs. 115-117;
Corallina marginata Ellis & Solander, 1786, p. 115, PI. XX, fig. 6;
Brachycladia marginata P. B.-A., No. 1930. Near low water mark,
Gravelly Bay, Jan., Hervey; at and below low wrater mark, Cooper’s
Island, Aug., Collins.
G. obtusata (Ell. & Sol.) Lamouroux, 1816, p. 262; Kjellman,
1900, p. 88; P. B.-A., No. 1881; Corallina obtusata Ellis & Solander,
1876, p. 113, PI. XXII, fig. 2. Faxon; Tucker’s Town, Feb., Dec.;
Walsingham, April, Hervey. Varies much in amount of calcification,
which sometimes is entirely lacking. Usually there is not a gradual
diminution of the amount of calcification, often the lower part of a
frond is thickly calcified, this part sharply marked off from the upper
part, quite uncalcified.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
103
Family GELIDIACEAE.
Wrangelia Agardh.
W. penicillata Agardh, 1828, p. 138; Harvey, 1S53, p. 143, PI.
XXXIV. B; Borgesen, 1916, p. 120, figs. 131-132; P. B-A., No. 1883.
Rein; Kemp; Merriman, No. 5; Harris Bay, Jan., Castle Harbor,
March, Tucker’s Town, May, Harrington Sound near Flatts Bridge,
Dec., Hervey; Shelly Bay, washed ashore, Hungry Bay, Nov., young
plants only; dredged in 18 m. Nov., Collins. Abundant and luxuriant
near Flatts Bridge from Dec. to Feb., seldom seen during the summer
months.
Naccaria Endlicher.
N. corymbosa J. G. Agardh, 1899, p. 109; P. B.-A., No. 2036.
Cooper’s Island, Feb., Farlow; Buildings Bay, April, Hervey. Bornet,
1892, p. 266, incidentally refers to Farlow’s specimens as N. Wigghii;
comparison with the type specimen of N. corymbosa from Key West,
in Agardh’s herbarium, shows that the Bermuda plant is the same.
Whether the differences between the American and the European
plant are specific may require further study.
Gelidium Lamouroux.
1.	Basal layer well developed; erect shoots seldom over 2 cm. high.
4. G. pusillum.
1.	Basal layer scanty or wanting; erect shoots 5-50 cm. high.	2.
2.	Frond compressed or flat throughout, pinnate.	1. G. corneum.
2.	Frond terete, at least in the lower part.	3.
3.	Fruit in ovate terminal expansions.	2. G. crinale.
3.	Fruit in terminal expansions of irregular form, the edges dentate or
ciliate.	3. G. spathulatum.
1.	G. corneum (Huds.) Lamouroux, 1813, p. 41; Fucus corneus
Hudson, 1798, p. 585; Turner, 1819, p. 146, PI. CCLVII, fig. a.
Kemp, June, July. Two specimens in the Kemp herbarium resemble
ordinary European forms; one is marked “var. k, abnorme Harvey”
but is hardly like the figure in Turner for that variety. We have not
ourselves found anything we should refer to this species.
2.	G. crinale (Turn.) Lamouroux, 1825, p. 191; P. B.-A., No.104
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
20S9; Fucus crinalis Turner, 1819, p. 4, PI. CXCVIII. North Village,
Dingle Bay, Jan., Hervey. A slender, irregularly branching form;
the erect filaments are more flattened than in the common northern
forms, and the branching is scanty, but there seems to be no better
place for it than here.
3.	G. SPATHULATUM (Kiitz.) Bornet, 1892, p. 268; G. crinale
var. spathulatum Hauck, 1885, p. 193, fig. 84; Acrocarpus spathulatus
Kiitzing, 1868, p. 13, PI. XXXVI, d-g. Harrington Sound, Feb.,
Hervey. Resembles G. crinale, but the upright fronds are terete ex-
cept at the summit, where they are suddenly flattened; in the fruiting
specimens numerous short branches arise here, making a tubercular
mass, but always showing a distinct flattening.
4.	G. pusilloi (Stack.) Le Jolis, 1863, p. 139; P. B.-A., No. 2182;
Fucus pusillus Stackhouse, 1795, p. 16, PI. VI. North Shore, Jan.,
Nov., Tucker’s Town, Feb., Hervey; above and below Flatts Bridge,
April, May, Aug., Collins. Tetraspores in March, April, Nov. Very
common on pebbles, shells and flat rock bottom in shallow quiet
water all about the islands, forming a dense mat, usually not over
one cm. in thickness, the creeping basal part and the lower part of
the upright growth terete, the upper part flat. As we understand
this species, it includes G. pulmnatum (Kiitz.) Thuret, and G. repens
Kiitz. Forms corresponding to Kiitzing’s plates of both of these, as
well as to typical G. pusillum, are found in Bermuda material, with
all intermediate forms.
Var. coNcmcoLA Piccone & Grunow in Piccone, 1S84, p. 316,
P. B.-A., No. 2183, is a reduced form, common on small shells in
shallow water; the upright fronds seldom reach 5 mm. high; they
are mostly flat for their entire length, and only sparingly branched.
But the same form occurs also on stones, and every intermediate can
be found up to plants with erect fronds, 2 cm. high. Forms which
we refer to G. pusillum. occasionally occur in which the terete stipe
expands into a flat frond, up to 5 cm. long and 3-5 mm. wide. This
is very different in appearance from the usual form, but it intergrades
so that it and var. conchicola must be regarded as extreme forms of a
very variable species.
Wukdemannia Harvey.
W. setacea Harvey, 1853, p. 246; P. B.-A., No. 1887. A very
common plant in quiet shallow water, all about the islands and
dredged down to 18 m. It is quite variable in size, amount of rami-THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
105
fication etc. It often forms dense mats, attached to the substratum
by frequent rhizoids; at other times only the bases of the filaments
are attached, the upper part forming loose tufts. Cystocarps and
antheridia are unknown, tetraspores seldom occur, but were found in
plants collected at Smith’s Bay, Nov., Hervey. Short much branched
forms might be mistaken for Gelidium, but on sectioning, the absence
of the fine descending rhizoidal filaments of the internal layer is a
sufficient distinction. Gelidiopsis gracilis Vickers, Algues de la
Barbade, No. 126, seems to be this species; we have compared her
specimen with an authentic specimen of IT. setacea from the Harvey
herbarium, and both with Bermuda material, and can find no differ-
ences.
Family GIGARTINACEAE.
Gigartina Stackhouse.
G. acicularis (Wulf.) Lamouroux, 1813, p. 48; Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. CIV; P. B.-A., No. 1884; Fucus acicularis Wulfen, 1803, p. 63.
Kemp, June, as G. Tecdii; Burchell’s Cove, Feb., Gravelly Bay,
April, Tucker’s Town, March, May, Dec., Hervey; pool near Moore’s
calabash tree, April, Collins. Forming a somewhat matted coating
on floors of caves or on bottoms of pools.
Kallymenia J. G. Agardh.
K. perforata J. G. Agardh, 1871, p. 9; 1876, p. 219. Washed
ashore, Cooper’s Island, Feb., Farlow. There is much variability
as to the amount of perforation; some fronds 6-7 cm. diam. are quite
imperforate, while others, no larger, are little more than a network.
Family RHODOPHYLLIDACEAE.
Catenella Greville.
C. Opuntia (Good. & Woodw.) Grev. var. pinnata (Harv.) J. G.
Agardh, 1876, p. 588; Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsice., No. 149; P. B.-A., No.
1885; C. pinnata Harvey, 1853, p. 201, PI. XXIX. B. Common
between tide marks in quiet waters all about the islands, on ground,106
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
rocks and mangroves, usually in company with Caloglossa Leprieurii,
species of Bostrychia, Cladophoropsis membranacea and the like.
Cystocarps were found on plants collected near Flatts Bridge in
August, Collins. The pinnate branching is usually quite manifest,
but occasionally plants are found where it is not at all conspicuous;
these are quite close to the typical C. Opuntia of Europe.
M. Duchassaingii J. G. Agardh, 1871, p. 36; 1879, PI. XXXI,
figs. 1-3. A single specimen among other algae collected March 4,
1911, Hervey, without exact locality. Evidently not common in
Bermuda, as this one specimen, about 2 cm. high, is all that is recorded.
It grows to a considerable size along the coast from Florida to North
Carolina, specimens from Beaufort, N. C., reaching a length of 4 dm.
It is usually very rough with short, stiff proliferations on the surface
and margin, but occasionally it occurs quite smooth, when it is not so
easily recognized. The difference is not one of maturity, as large
smooth plants are found as often as small ones.
1.	E. Gelidium J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 627; 1876, p. 602; P. B.-A.,
No. 2184; Sphaerococcus Gelidium Kiitzing, 1869, PL XX. St.
David's Island, Feb., Hervey, a few small plants only; South Shore,
April, Collins.
2.	E. denticulatum (Burm. f.) comb, nov.; E. spinosum J. G.
Agardh, 1S47, p. 16; E. isiforme Harvey, 1853, p. 118, PI. XXIV;
P. B.-A., No. 1886; Fucus denticulatus N. L. Burman, 1768, p. 28;
F. spinosus Linnaeus, 1771, p. 313; Turner, 1808, PI. XYIII. Rein;
Moseley; April, May, June, Kemp; March, Wadsworth; Tucker,
No. 14; Castle Harbor, Jan., Farlow; Bailey’s Bay, Mrs. Hastings
in Farlow herb.; Bailey’s Bay, Jan., Gibbet Island, Jan., Cooper’s
Island, April, Devonshire Bay, Harris Bay, Dec., Hervey; Gravelly
Bay, Tucker’s Town, April, Aug., Collins. As may be inferred from
the list of stations and collectors, this plant is plentiful and attractive.
The living plant is of a dull red, and if prepared without exposure to
Meristotheca J. G. Agardh.
Eucheuma J. G. Agardh.
1. Fronds flattened.
1. Fronds stout, subterete, very spinous.
1. E. Gelidium.
2. E. denticulatum.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
107
sun or air, the color darkens, sometimes becoming nearly black. But
if the plant has grown where it is exposed to the full sunshine or if it
has been exposed long to the air, the red becomes lighter and clearer,
and later takes on a yellow shade. Exposure to the air for several
days, if not in full sunshine, gives handsome color without disinte-
grating or decomposing the plant, if quite fresh when collected. It
occurs in all sizes from 5 to 50 cm. high, and varies much in diameter
of frond, frequency and regularity of branches, and especially as to the
frequency, position and form .of the conical or spinous ramuli. In
the typical form these ramuli are arranged in whorls, distinctly
separated, but forms occur, especially in old and large individuals,
in which this whorled arrangement is hardly perceptible. The same
differences occur in this species as found on the Florida coast, where it
is common. At some stations in Bermuda a form occurs which we
have not seen elsewhere; the frond is not over 10 cm. high, is relatively
slender, but is so densely and so repeatedly branched that no trace of
regularity is seen. This form was collected by Wadsworth in 1890,
and has been found by us each year we have collected here. The
American plant was described by Agardh, 1822, p. 271, as Sphaero-
coccus isiformis; J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 16, proposed the new genus
Eucheuma, including this and other species of Sphaerococcus, and the
name has been continued since that time. Comparing the original
description of Sphaerococcus isiformis with the species following, S.
spinosus, the only distinctions of importance are, first that the former
is described as “cartilagineo-gelatinosa” the latter as “gelatinoso-
cartilaginea”; second, the former “papillulis ramorum vertieillatis,”
the latter “papillulis solitariis, vel binis ternisve.” The question of
the distinctness of the two species was raised by Sonder, 1S71, p. 60;
under E. spinosum he notes that he found it with long, naked branches,
also beset with papillae, either scattered or whorled. This alga is
sold as an article of food in eastern countries, and most of the speci-
mens that had then reached Europe were coarse forms obtained in
the markets. J. G. Agardh, 1876, p. 601, referring to Sonder’s criti-
cism, says “Quae potissimum conveniunt, E. spinosum atque E. isi-
forme, stadio fructifero omnino diversae obvenerunt.” But we find
on E. isiforme fruit of the character attributed by him to E. spinosum,
as well as that attributed to E. isiforme. Later, 1892, p. 12, in a
revision of the genus, he uses vegetative characters, giving as the
reason that the. cystocarps were unknown to him on many of the
species. Under E. spinosum he says “Icon Turneri tab. IS pro suo
tempore egregia.” E. isiforme he considers as represented by Harvey’s108
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
plate, 1853, PI. XXIV, and the specimens distributed as Alg. Am.-Bor.
Exsicc., No. 12. Turner’s plate of Fucus spinosus was drawn from
the specimen in the Linnean herbarium, and represents the type of
the species. It has papillae partly whorled, partly scattered; there
would be no trouble in matching it from Bermuda material, while
Harvey’s plate is quite typical of the ordinary, well developed plant.
We think we are justified in discontinuing the name E. isiforme.
But on referring to the original description of Fucus spinosus, Linnaeus,
1771, p. 313, we find that he gives as synonym “ F. denticulatus Burm.
prodr. 28”.13 Referring to that page we find the description “Caule
compresso ramoso ramis dentato-geniculatis ramulosis subdicho-
tomis.” This, with the reference by Linnaeus, necessitates the new
binomial we have used.
We have examined specimens from the Cape of Good Hope, Singa-
pore and the Sunda Islands, quite indistinguishable from the American
plant.
Family SPHAEROCOCCACEAE.
Gelidiopsis Schmitz.
G. rigida (Vahl) Weber, 1904, p. 9; P. B.-A., No. 2090; Gelidium
rigidum var. radicans Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 142; Fucus rigidus
Vahl, 1802, p. 46. Forms dense mats at and below low water mark,
generally coarse and unattractive.
Gracilaria Greville.
1.	Fronds stout, prostrate, attached to the substratum. 8. G. horizontalis.
1.	Frond erect.	2.
2.	Frond plane.	3.
2.	Frond terete or compressed.	4.
3.	Frond membranaceous, dichotomous, axils wide and rounded, apices
obtuse.	7. G. dichotomo-flabellata.
3.	Frond cartilaginous, axils acute, divisions tapering, acute.
6. G. multipartita.
4. Branches long, filiform, slender.	1. G. confervoides.
4. Branches not filiform.	5.
13 There is an error in the paging of this work; the pages run 1-28, then
25, 26, 27, 28, and thereafter correctly; the present reference is to the second
p. 28.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
109
5.	Frond coarse, stout, branches mostly short and blunt. 5. G. Wrightii.
5.	Frond less stout; many short, acute branches.	6.
6.	Branching corymbose; short acute branches near summit.
4. G. damaecornis.
6.	Short acute branches throughout.	7.
7.	Frond pyramidal, branchlets dense, erect.	2. G. ferox.
7.	Frond irregular, delicate, branches scattered, patent. 3. G. divaricata.
1.	G. confervoides (L.) Greville, 1830, p. 121; Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. LXV; Fucus confervoides Linnaeus, 1763, p. 1629. Kemp, a
single plant of typical character; another specimen, marked G. com-
pressa, is probably also G. confervoides.
2.	G. ferox J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 592; 1876, p. 414; P. B.-A.,
No. 1932. Faxon; In shallow water, Moseley; Kemp; Rein, as G.
armata; Dingle Bay, Inlet, Heron Bay, Jan., Grasmere, March,
Hervey; Grasmere, Aug., Collins. Several species of the general
appearance of G. ferox have been described, and it is by no means
easy to separate them. There is a good deal of variety in the Bermuda
forms we have included under this name, but they seem to agree in
the terete but apparently distichously branched frond, with short
acute branches, subsecundly placed. We have found it quite com-
mon in warm shallow water, such as the lagoons near Grasmere and
Fairyland.
3.	G. divaricata Harvey, 1853, p. 109. Mrs. S. A. Boggs;
Bailey’s Bay, Feb., Wadsworth; reported by Kemp, but no specimen
found in his herbarium. The two specimens we have seen agree
well with Harvey’s description, and there seems no other place for
them. The habit is much like that of Ochtodes filiformis J. Ag., and
the latter species, from Jamaica, was erroneously distributed as G.
divaricata in P. B.-A., No. 789. The Ochtodes has an articulated fila-
mentous axis which is not found in Gracilaria.
4.	G. damaecornis J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 597; 1876, p. 415. In
shallow water, Grasmere, Aug., Collins; Miss Wilkinson. As we
understand this species, it is stouter than G. ferox, drying very hard
and firm; the branching is more regularly dichotomous, the ramuli
short and subulate, near the ends of the branches. We have found
it once only, when it grew among G. ferox, but could be distinguished
from the latter by its appearance, even as seen from the boat.
5.	G. Wrightii (Turn.) J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 599; Fucus Wrightii
Turner, 1811, PI. CXLVIII; including G. Poitei J. G. Agardh, 1851,
p. 596 and G. cornea J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 598. Castle Harbor,
Feb., Farlow; Elbow Bay, Dec., Collins. We have carefully examined110
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
a large amount of material from the Florida-West India region,
including specimens determined by J. G. Agardh, and can find no
line of demarcation between the three species mentioned. Fuchs
Poitei Lamouroux, 1805, PI. XXX, figs. 2-3, antedates F. Wrightii,
but now proves to be a Laurencia, and the next oldest name is Turner’s
which we adopt. It includes most of the coarse, fleshy or cartilagi-
nous Gracilarias of the warmer Atlantic; probably always terete when
alive, but often appearing compressed in herbarium material. It is #
not common at Bermuda.
6.	G. multipartita (Clem.) Harvey, 1846-51, PI. XV; Fucus
multipartitus Clementi, 1S04, p. 311. Kemp, July, two specimens
in herb.; Building’s Bay, Feb., one small frond, Hervey.
7.	G. dichotomo-flabellata Crouan in Maze & Schramm, 1870-
77, p. 21S. Mrs. Boggs, 1895; St. David’s Island, Feb., May, South
Shore, April, Hervey; tetraspores in May. This species varies con-
siderably in color and texture, from thin membranaceous and clear
red to subcartilaginous and brownish. In the former case the shape
and subdivision of the frond are indicated by the specific name;
in the latter the division is more irregular. The Bermuda plant as a
rule has a thinner frond and narrower segments than the Florida
material distributed as P. B.-A., No. 334. We were at first inclined
to identify this plant with G. Textorii (Suringar) Hariot, 1891, p. 223,
Sphaerococcus Textorii Suringar, 1870, p. 36, PI. XXIII, and a speci-
men from Province Boshu, Japan, for which we are indebted to the
kindness of Dr. K. Yendo, has much resemblance to the Bermuda
plant. But the plant figured by Okamura, 1901, p. 65, PI. XXIII,
and distributed in his Algae Japonicae Exsiccatae No. 13, differs
considerably, having a habit more like the common little divided forms
of Rhodymenia pahnata. Our plant agrees with Crouan’s species,
as represented by an authentic specimen in the Museum d’Histoire
Naturelle, at Paris, and it has seemed to us better on the whole to
retain for the present Crouan’s name, under which the plant had
already been distributed in P. B.-A. J. G. Agardh, 18S9, p. 25, refers
to G. dichotomo-flabellata as a possible synonym of Chrysymenia haly-
menioides Harvey, mentioning Chrysymenia dichotomo-flabellata Crouan
as perhaps the same; the latter has been distributed as P. B.-A., No.
3S5; it is probable that it is, as suggested by J. G. Agardh, a form of
Chrysymenia halymenioides, but the plant distributed as P. B.-A.,
Nos. 334 & 1931 is certainly a Gracilaria. The following short diag-
nosis, in connection with the material distributed as P. B.-A., Nos. 334,
1931, will probably give a sufficient idea of the species.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
Ill
Gracilaria dichotomo-flabellata Crouan in Maze & Schramm,
Algues de la Guadeloupe, p. 21S, without description. A disco parvo,
stipite brevi subtereti vel compresso, mox in frondem planam regulari-
ter dichotomam abeunte, segmentis linearibus 5 mm. ad 2 cm. latis,
apicibus obtusis vel truncatis; axillis latis, rotundatis; substantia
membranacea, juniore tenuiore, adultiore crassiore et firmiore; colore
laete- vel fusco-rubro; tetrasporangiis sparsis; cystocarpiis magnis,
ad superficiem utrinque sparsis.
8. G. horizontalis sp. nov. Fronde a disco centrali irregulari
horizontaliter expansa, ramis quoquoversum exeuntibus, subteretis,
crassis, ramos ferentibus densissimos, minime attenuates; cellulis
interioribus magnis, corticem versus minoribus, cortice submonostro-
matico, cellularum minutarum coloratarum. Fructificatione ignota.
Frond expanding horizontally from a central irregular disk, emit-
ting on all sides very densely set branches, tapering very little; inte-
rior cells large, becoming smaller towards the submonostromatic
cortex, which is formed of small colored cells. Fructification unknown.
The habit is unique in the genus; the plant seems to creep over the
bottom of the pool in which it grows, much in the same way as do the
haptera of a Laminaria; the tips of the branches, or short projec-
tions on the margins or lower surface, adhering to the substratum quite
firmly. If a young but vigorous frond of Laminaria were cut off at
the base of the stipe, just at the level of the upper haptera, the remain-
ing basal part would give a good idea of the appearance of this species.
Plants growing together are almost inextricably entangled, and even
when a plant is not in contact with others, it is difficult to detach it.
The substance is tough and cartilaginous, the color of the more or
less wrinkled surface is dull yellowish brown, but the lower part, not
exposed to the light, is of the clear purplish red found in other species
of Gracilaria. It was found in rock pools at low water mark at
Gravelly Bay, Aug. 27, 1913, Collins. Type in Collins herb., No.
7818. Since found at the same station in Feb. and April, at Harris
Bay, April, Hervey.
Hypnea Lamouroux.
1. H. musciformis.
2.
3. H. spinella.
patent ramuli.
2. H. cervicornis.
1. Branches long, virgate, often with hooked tips.
1. Branches not virgate, no hooked tips.
2. Forming a low, dense, matted expansion.
2. Erect fronds from a matted base, slender, with112
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
1.	H. musciformis (Wulf.) Lamouroux, 1813, p. 43; Hauck,
1885, p. 188, fig. 81; P. B.-A., No. 2185; Fucus musciformis Wulfen
in Jacquin, 1789, p. 154, PI. XIV, fig. 3. Rein; Kemp; Miss
Peniston; Dingle Bay, Bailey’s Bay, Jan., St. David’s Island, Feb.,
Grasmere, March, Buildings Bay, Heron Bay, April, Hervey;
Hungry Bay, April, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. Generally dis-
tributed; the well developed plants with long, virgate branches,
beset with short ramuli, and with tips hooked, are not to be mis-
taken for anything else, but young and stunted forms are hard to
distinguish from other species of the genus.
Wulfen’s type was from Trieste, where he found the plant growing
on crabs for sale in the fish market. His plate is excellent, and shows
a slender form with filiform ramuli, often with constricted bases. We
have seen similar plants from the Mediterranean and the Adriatic,
and on the American shore from Cape Cod to Florida and the West
Indies. A form different in appearance has been distributed by
Bornet, collected at Biarritz; it is stouter, the ramuli shorter and
more patent, and mostly with distinctly wider base, in dried specimens
often like rose thorns; hooked tips are very rare in this form, common
in the other. This form we have seen from various parts of the At-
lantic coast of France, and on the American coast from Beaufort,
N. C., to Florida and the West Indies. The two extreme forms are
distinct in appearance, though less characteristic forms can be found.
Sterile plants can be found in both, but as far as we have observed,
cystocarpic plants usually have all the ramuli of the thorn-like type,
always some ramuli of this form; while tetrasporic plants have the
filiform ramuli with base ultimately constricted. The appearance
of the two types is so different that in Agardh’s treatment of the genus,
1851, p. 441, the former would come under Sect. I, Virgatae, “ ramulis
adultioribus basi constrictis,” the other, p. 446, Sect. Spinuligerae,
“ramulis subulatis, a basi latiore acuminatis.” Both forms occur in
Bermuda.
2.	H. cervicornisJ. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 451; 1876, p. 564. Miss
Peniston; Old Ferry, April, Hervey. This lacks the hooked apices
of H. musciformis, and is a more slender and more densely branched
plant; but the line between the two species is by no means clear.
3.	H. spinella (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 14; Sphaerococcus
spinellus Agardh, 1822, p. 323. Cave by Gravelly Bay, Apr., Hervey.
Forming a dense, inextricable mat on rocks, usually 1-2 cm. thick.
There is probably no genus of red algae of this region the species of
which are so poorly defined, and the plants so little characteristic, asTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
113
Hypnea. Well developed plants of H. musciformis are easily recog-
nized, but practically everything else is vague and doubtful, and our
determinations of other species are only tentative. In regard to the
smaller forms, it seems as if no two authors used the same name for
the same plant, and even the best authors are often inconsistent with
themselves. For instance, J. G. Agardh, 1876, p. 564, under H. cervi-
cornis, refers to II. spinella Kutzing, 1868, PI. XXVI, as a synonym;
under H. spinella (Ag.) J. Ag., on the next page, he refers to the same
plate. We have collections of Hypnea from several stations to which
we do not feel willing to give specific names- H. cornuta reported by
Moseley proves to be Chondria polyrhiza Collins & Hervey.
Family RHODYMENIACEAE.
Cordylecladia J. G. Agardh.
C. rigens (Ag.) comb. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 21S6; C.f irregularis
Harvey, 1853, p. 156; Sphaerococcus rigens Agardh, 1822, p. 332;
Chylocladia rigens J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 362. In dense matted tufts
between tide marks, Harrington Sound, Feb., Farlow; Fairyland,
Dec., Collins. Comparison with authentic specimen of Chylocladia
rigens shows the identity with Harvey’s species, and the fructification,
see Collins, 1901, p. 255, is that of Cordylecladia.
Chrysymenia J. G. Agardh.
1.	Frond with solid terete stipe and vesicular ramuli.	2.
1.	Frond without solid stipe.	3.
2.	Branches long, virgate, with spherical or ovoid ramuli. 4. C. uvaria.
2.	Branches short, stout, with larger, pyriform ramuli. 5. C. pyriformis.
3.	Frond tubular, branches proliferous with constricted base.
3.	C. Enteromorpha.
3. Frond compressed, dichotomous or irregularly cleft.	4.
4.	Frond slender, divisions linear.	2. C. halymenioides.
4.	Frond broader, divisions lanceolate or ovate.	1. C. Agardhii.
1. C. Agardhii Harvey, 1853, p. 189, PI. XXX. A. Cooper’s
Island, Feb., Farlow; shallow water, Moseley. Apparently rare, as114
COLLINS -VXD HEEVEY.
neither of us has found it. In Kemp’s list mention is made of Chylo-
cladia rosea. No specimen with that name is to be found in his
herbarium; the species is northern in its range, and not likely to occur
here; some forms of Chrysymenia Agardhii have habitual resemblance
to Chylocladia, and may have been the basis for this record.
2.	C. iialymexioides Harvey, 1853, p. 188, PI. XX. A. One very
small plant, Moseley.
3.	C. Exteromorpha Harvey, 1853, p. 187. Dredged in 60
meters on Challenger Bank, Aug., 1903, Berm. Biol. Sta.
4.	C. cvaria (L.) J. G. Agardh, 1842, p. 106; Harvey, 1853, p.
191, PI. XX. B; P. B.-A., No. 1933; Fucus nmrius Linnaeus, 1767,
p. 714. Rein; Kemp; Moseley; Faxon; Walsingham, Jan., March,
Hervey, April, Collins. Appears to grow chiefly in sheltered places
among rocks, and may be more common than would appear from the
single locality in which we have found it.
5.	C. ptriformis Borgesen, 1910, p. 187, figs. 8-9. A single,
well-developed plant, on the perpendicular wall of a “chasm” near
Tucker’s Town, below low water mark, April, Collins.
Coelarthrttm Borgesen.
C. Albertisii (Piccone) Borgesen, 1910, p. 189, figs. 11-12; P. B.-
A., No. 2091; Chylocladia Albertisii Piccone, 1884a, p. 37, figs. 3-5.
Attached to Corallines, Ducking Stool, Jan., Farlow; floating off
Cooper’s Island, Feb., Farlow; Miss Wilkinson; Shore of Gibbet
Island, Jan., Feb., North Shore, March, washed ashore, Buildings
Bay, Feb., Hervey; dredged in 18 m., Nov., Collins. This species
was founded on a single specimen collected at the Canaries, 1882;
a single specimen with the ms. name Chrysymenia Lomentaria Crouan
is in the Thuret herbarium at Paris; it was dredged once, in about
30 meters, in March, in the Danish West Indies; these are the
only records outside of Bermuda. In January and February small
plants are found among the roots of Sargassum, seldom over 1 cm.
high; the larger plants are found washed ashore, probably from
deep water. These plants were packed together in crisp masses,
with rounded surfaces, like the masses of Valonia macrophysa, but
on a smaller scale. No fruit was found on the specimens of our col-
lecting, but there were cystocarps on those collected by Farlow in
February, tetraspores on those collected by Borgesen in March; both
are figured by Borgesen.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
115
Lomentaria Gaillon.
L. uncinata Meneghini in Zanardini, 1840, p. 21; Farlow, 1881,
p. 154. Miss Wilkinson; Walsingham, Jan., Hervey. Rather small
plants.
Var. filiformis (Harv.) Farlow, 1881, p. 155; Chylocladia Bailey-
ana var. filiformis Harvey, 1853, p. 185, PL XX. C, fig. 2. Very
small plants among Polysiphonia macrocarpa, on mangroves, Hungry
Bay, May, Collins.
Champia Desvaux.
C. parvula (Ag.) Harvey, 1853, p. 76; P. B.-A., No. 1934; Chon-
dria parvula Agardh, 1824, p. 207; Chylocladia parvula Harvey, 1846-
51, PI. CCX. Gibbet Island, Jan., Heron Bay, April, Hervey; Gib-
bet Island, Sept., Fairyland, Dec., Collins. On Sargassum, Coel-
arthrum and other algae; mostly with tetraspores; small plants,
seldom over 3 cm. high.
Family DELESSERIACEAE.
Nitophyllum Greville.
N. Wilkinsoniae sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2037. Frondes usque
ad 10 cm. altae, dense di- polychotomae, divisionibus linearibus
cuneatisve, latitudine centimetrum raro superantibus; marginibus
dentes minutas ciliiformes plus minusve approximatas ferentibus;
venis nullis; fronde monostromatica, juniore 15 y crassa, adultiore
usque ad 60 y; cellulis in superficiem visis irregulariter polygonis,
30-80 y diam.; in sectione transversali junioribus elongatis, adultiori-
bus subquadratis. Tetrasporangiis tripartitis, ad 60 y diam., soris
rotundatis vel elongatis per totam frondem sparsis, utrinque pro-
minulis; cystocarpiis ignotis; substantia tenuissima; fronde viva,
colore malvacea; emersa cito in aurantiacam mutata; siccata rosea.
Plate I, fig. 8, Plate II, fig. 9, Plate V, figs. 32-33.
Fronds up to 10 cm. high, densely tufted, di- polychotomously
divided, divisions linear or cuneate, seldom over one cm. wide, margin
more or less densely set with small ciliform teeth; no veins; mono-
stromatic, 15 y thick in the younger part, up to 60 y in older parts;
cells regularly polygonal in superficial view, 30-80 y diam., in cross116
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
section, elongate in younger, squarish in older parts. Tetraspores
tripartite, up to 60 p diam., densely packed in small roundish or oval
sori, generally distributed over the frond, slightly projecting on both
surfaces; cystocarps unknown. W. Faxon; Miss Wilkinson; Har-
rington Sound, Ducking Stool, Feb., Farlow; Dingle Bay, April,
caves at Tucker’s Town, May, Collins. On rocks below low water
mark; forming dense masses, crisp when first taken from the water,
but soon softening into a shapeless mass. The branching is so dense
and the substance so tender that it is difficult to disentangle individual
plants. When growing the color is mauve, on exposure changing
almost instantaneously to orange; when mounted on paper lake or
rosy red. In habit like N. marginatum Harvey, Ceylon Algae Xo. 26,
but that species lacks the ciliiform teeth, and has somewhat smaller
cells but larger tetraspores, which are in less dense sori, and tend to
form a confluent marginal band. A specimen of N. venulosum Zan.,
from Trieste, leg. Hauck, also resembles X. Wilkinsoniae, but has more
slender segments, less densely branched and tufted, and distinct
though microscopic veins.
Hypoglossum Kiitzing.
H. hypoglossoides (Stack.) comb, nov.; H. Woodwardi Kiitzing,
1S43, p. 444, PI. LXV, fig. 1; Delesseria Hypoglossum Harvey, 1846-
51, PI. II; Fucus hypoglossoides Stackhouse, 1795, p. 76, PI. XIII.
Jan., 1912, a single specimen, without exact locality, Hervey. The
rather unfortunate combination we now use for the first time, appears
to be required by the international rules.
Caloglossa J. G. Agardh.
C. Leprieurii (Mont.) J. G. Agardh, 1876, p. 499; P. B.-A., No.
2038; Delesseria Leprieurii Montagne, 1840a, p. 196, PI. V, fig. 1;
Harvey, 1853, p. 98, PI. XXII. C. Among other algae on mangroves
and other objects between tide marks, less commonly pure or nearly
so. Farlow; Burchell’s Cove, Feb., Ely’s Harbor, Dingle Bay,
April, Hervey; Hungry Bay, May, Collins. Tetraspores in April.
The Bermuda material corresponds to C. mnioides J. G. Agardh, 1876,
p. 500,14 the segments being ovate, sometimes quite broadly so, and the
14 Later, 1898, p. 235, J. G. Agardh intimates that most of the described
species of the genus may be only forms, depending on locality. This appears
to be his latest expression of opinion on the subject.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
117
cells in the membrane narrowly rectangular, in quite distinct series
to the margin. Compared with the very narrow form from brackish
water at West Point, New York, the distinctness of species seems jus-
tified, but intermediate forms occur, some from Florida having as wide
segments as the Bermuda plant, but with polygonal or rhomboidal
cells in indistinct series. The variation can hardly be due to climate,
as a specimen of Miss Vickers, Algues de la Barbade, No. 144, has
fronds as narrow as in the plant of Long Island Sound and Hudson
River.
Taenioma J. G. Agardh.
T. perpusillum J. G. Agardh, 1863, p. 1257; T. macrourum
Thuret in Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 69, PI. XXV; P. B. -A., No.
1935; Polysiphonia perpusilla J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 16. In a gela-
tinous mass among small algae, Gibbet Island, April, Hervey. Tetra-
spores were common in this material; a single mature cystocarp was
found, but unfortunately was lost before notes and figures could be
made.
Family BONNEMAISONIACEAE.
Asparagopsis Montagne.
A. taxiformis (Delile) comb, nov.; A. Delilei Montagne, 1840, p.
XIV; Dosya Delilei Montagne, 1840, p. 166, PI. VIII, fig. 6; Fucus
taxiformis Delile, 1813, p. 151, PI. LVII, fig. 2. Merriman; Cooper’s
Island, Feb., Farlow. Apparently rare, as we have not met with it,
nor have we found it in any other collections than as above. As
Montagne refers to Fucus taxiformis Delile, but changes the specific
name to do more honor to the author, the original name must be
restored according to the international rules.
Family RHODOMELACEAE.
Laurencia Lamouroux.
2.
3.
2. L. Poitei.
3. L. papillosa.
1. Ultimate ramuli short, often tubercle-like.
1. Ultimate ramuli longer.
2. Ultimate ramuli distant, simple.
2. Ultimate ramuli densely set, mostly lobed.11S
COLLINS AXD HERVEY.
3. Frond decumbent, rooting, densely matted.
3. Frond erect.
1. L. perforata.
4.
4. Outline of frond and of main divisions narrowly pyramidal.
5.
4. Outline broader.
5. Slender, 3 or 4 cm. high.
5. Stout, 1-2 dm. high.
6.
5. L. obtusa var. gelatinosa.
6. L. panieulata.
6. Branching mostly opposite or whorled.
6. Branching subdichotomous, corymbose.
5. L. obtusa.
4. L. cervicornis.
1.	L. perforata Montagne, I860, p. 155; Kiitzing, 1865, p. 18,
PI. XLIX, figs, c-g; P. B.-A., No. 18S9. Bailey’s Bay, Jan., Harris
Bay, Jan., Nov., Gravelly Bay, Oct., Hervey; Tucker’s Town, May,
South Shore, Aug., Collins. This species occurs not uncommonly in
caves and potholes, where it forms dense matted masses, the filaments
adhering to the rock and to each other by numerous holdfasts. The
surface of the mass sometimes has an iridescence of remarkable
brilliancy, chiefly in metallic blues and greens. The iridescence is on
the upper surface only, and persists for a short time after the plant is
taken from the water.
2.	L. Poitei (Lamour.) M. A. Howe, 1905, p. 583; L. tuberculosa
J. G. Agardh, 1S52, p. 760; P. B.-A., Xo. 1937. L. gemmifera Harvey,
1853, p. 72, PI. XVIII. B.; Fucus Poitei Lamouroux, 1805, p. 63, PI.
XXXI, figs. 2-3. Harrington Sound, Farlow; Cooper’s Island, a
slender form, Wadsworth; Heron Bay, April, Hervey; Fairyland,
July, Collins. In warm shallow water, where it forms loose-lying
masses in warm weather. L. tuberculosa has been described by J. G.
Agardh as “fronde compressa distiche decomposito-pinnata,” but it
may well be that the compression and distichous branching in Agardh’s
plant are due to the manner of preparation; the Bermuda plant has
no such characters.
3.	L. papillosa (Forsk.) Greville, 1830, p. LII; P. B.-A., No. 1936;
Fucus papillosus Forskal, 1775, p. 190. Castle Harbor, Farlow;
Harris Bay, Jan., Heron Bay, April, Hervey; Jew’s Bay, July,
Cooper’s Island, Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins. Quite common
and usually easily recognizable.
4.	L. cervicornis Harvey, 1853, p. 73, PI. XVIII. C; P. B.-A.,
No. 2187. Wadsworth, No. 19; Miss Wilkinson; Cooper’s Island,
April, Aug.; dredged in 4 m., Dec., Collins; Buildings Bay, April,
St. David’s Island, May, Hervey. This species appears to be little
known to European botanists; De Toni, 1903, p. 781, gives it as a
synonym under L. implicata, but it is certainly not the L. implicata
of Harvey, 1853, p. 72, PI. XVIII. D., fide authentic specimens. L.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
119
cervicomis has a frond of rounded outline, branching subdichotomous,
distant below, increasingly close upward; all branches, long or short,
are of about the same diameter, about that of the main axis of a
frond of L. obtusa, medium size. Proliferous ramuli, very short,
may be abundant or nearly or quite wanting. It is found in rather
sheltered stations, the color a somewhat deep and translucent red
in the living plant, growing darker in the mounted specimen. It
usually adheres fairly well to paper.
5. L. obtusa (Huds.) Lamouroux, 1813, p. 42; Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. CXLVIII; P. B.-A., No. 2092; Fucus obtusus Hudson, 1798, p.
5S6. A very common and variable species, occurring nearly every-
where in quiet water, and often in somewhat exposed places, and
dredged to a depth of 18 m. The genus Laurencia is very puzzling;
though typical forms can be found of all the species, intermediate
forms are equally common, and it is very difficult to draw any sharp
lines. Of what may be considered the typical form of L. obtusa there
are two varieties, differing sharply in color, but not otherwise; one is
reddish or yellowish brown, lighter where exposed to sunshine, darker
below; the other a light, glaucous blue-green. They grow in similar
stations; often, as in the lower part of Harrington Sound, both are
found together, but as separate individuals or tufts; we have seen no
intermediate forms under these conditions.15 Beside the typical form,
two varieties may be noted.
Var. gracilis Kiitzing, 1865, p. 20, PI. LIV, figs, c and d; L. dasy-
phylla Kemp, in herb. A delicate, soft and slender form.
Var. gelatinosa (Desf.) J. G. Agardh, 1852, p. 751; P. B.-A., No.
18S8; Fucus gelatinosus Desfontaines, 1798, p. 427. Mrs. Hastings;
Spanish Rock, Jan., Gravelly Bay, March, Dec., Hervey. Tetraspores
in Jan. A low and slender form of exposed rocky shores; in spite of
its name it is firmer and less adherent to paper than L. obtusa,
typical. In connection with L. obtusa we have found forms near to
L. setacea Kiitzing, 1848, p. 854; L. intricata Kiitzing, 1865, PI. LXI,
figs, a-c,16 but they shade into the typical L. obtusa so plainly, and in no
15	It is of interest to note that practically the same forms occur at Naples;
see Falkenberg, 1901, p. 247. “Urn Neapel, wo die Pflanze das ganze Jahr
hindurch zu den gemeinsten Formen gehort, kommt sie in zwei Varietaten
vor, welche, im iibrigen gleich, durch ihre Farbung sich wesentlich unter-
scheiden, die eine ist gelbrothlich, die andere griinlich. Beide Formen treten
gesondert in unregelmassig durch einander gewirrten Rasen an den gleichen
Standorten auf.”
16	L. intricata Lamouroux, 1813, p. 43, PI. IX, figs. 8-9, is nomen nudum,
hence Kiitzing’s name of 1848 has priority.120
COLLINS AND HEEVET.
case are they quite typical L. setacea, that it seems best to consider
them merely forms of the common and variable L. obtusa. A specimen
in the Farlow herbarium, collected by G. Tucker, No. 10, is near
L. implicate J. G. Agardh, 1852, p. 745, and a similar form was found
on the outer reef, Ely’s Harbor, July, Collins, and this also we have
considered as a local form of L. obtusa. This form is found rather
commonly when dredging.
6. L. PANICULATA (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1852, p. 755; Chondria
obtusa var. paniculata Agardh, 1822, p. 343. Faxon; Dingle Bay,
Jan., Buildings Bay, Mangrove Bay, Feb., Hervey. Connected by
intermediate forms with L. obtusa, but in its typical form quite dis-
tinct by the firmer, little adhesive substance, the narrowly pyramidal
form of the frond and of its principal divisions, the main axis distinctly
projecting.
Chondria Agardh.
1.	Rhizoids frequent; tetraspores in specialized branches. 4. C. polyrhiza.
1.	No rhizoids except at extreme base; tetraspores in normal branches. 2.
2.	Ends of pericentral cells showing as a wavy line across the frond.
1. C. curvilineata.
2.	Pericentral cells not showing externally.	3.
3.	Ramuli acute or subacute.	3. C. atropurpurea.
3.	Ramuli blunt or truncate.	2. C. dasyphylla.
1. C. curvilineata sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2039. Fronde tenui,
axibus principalibus diametro § mm. raro superantibus, ramos paullo
minores paucos pluresve alternantes ferentibus, ordinum duorum,
raro plures, cylindricos vel ad basin et apicem paullo contractos;
puncto vegetationis ad fundo foveae apicalis, folia brevia ferente;
foliis similibus secundum ramos sparsis; segmentis diam. duplo longi-
oribus; cellulis corticalibus diam. duplo longioribus; apicibus cellu-
larum centralium per corticem manifestis ut lineis curvis, latere
convexo apicem versus; cystocarpiis sessilibus; substantia submolli;
colore rubro obscuro. Plate II, figs. 10-11.
Frond slender, main axes seldom reaching 5 mm. diam., with more or
less numerous alternate branches of two orders, seldom more, of only
slightly less diam., cylindrical or slightly contracted at base and apex;
growing point at bottom of an apical pit, with a tuft of short leaves,
similar leaves occurring also at scattered points on branches; Seg-
ments about 2 diam. long; cortical cells about twice as long as broad;
swollen apices of pericentral cells showing through the cortication asTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
121
rounded lines, the convex side towards the apex of the branch; cysto-
carps sessile on the branches; no other organ of fructification ob-
served; color dull red; substance rather soft. Type specimen in
Collins herbarium, No. 7509, Heron Bay, April 19, 1913, Hervey;
also at St. David’s Island, Feb., near Wistowe, Dec., Hervey.
This plant belongs to the subgenus Coelochondria Falkenberg, but
is distinct from all but one of the species of the subgenus by the peculiar
transformation of the upper ends of the pericentral cells, which show
even under a slight magnification as curved lines, two or three showing
in the width of the branch. This same character is found in C.
succulenta (J. Ag.) Falkenberg, 1901, PI. XXII, figs. 22-23, an Aus-
tralian species, but that is a large and fleshy plant. In some speci-
mens of C. curvilineata this character is less conspicuous than in others,
but it is always quite distinct at the base of a branch, where the
cortication is thin.
2.	C. dasyphylla (Woodw.) Agardh, 1822, p. 350; Furns dasy-
phyllus Woodward, 1794, p. 239, PI. XXIII, figs. 1-3; Laurencia dasy-
phylla Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CLII. St. David’s Island, May, Hervey.
A single plant, well developed and typical.
3.	C. atropurpurea Harvey, 1853, p. 22, PI. XVIII. E. Heron
Bay, March, Hervey. A single, quite typical plant.
4.	C. polyrhiza, sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2040. Fronde tenui, axi
principali diametrum \ mm. raro attinente, ramos paullo minores
paucos pluresve alternantes ferente, ramulis secundi vel tertii ordinis
minoribus brevioribusque, ad basin plus minusve contractis, prope
apices conicos foliis brevibus deciduis armatis; ramis ordinum omnium
plus minusve flexuosis; cellulis corticalibus linearibus, longitudine
latitudinem 3-4-plo superante; tetrasporis in ramulis ultimis, partis
fertilis margine subdentato, apice breviacuto; basi a parte inferiori
sterili ramuli evidenter distincto, parte fertili diametro partem sterilem
duplo superante; segmentis per corticem tantum in parte extrema
juvenili manifestis; rhizoideis brevibus unicellularibus in fasciculis
densis ex partibus omnibus frondis exeuntibus; substantia subfirma;
colore rubro pallido. Plate II, fig. 12.
Frond slender, main axis seldom reaching § mm. diam., with more
or less numerous, alternate patent branches of slightly less size, with
one or two orders of smaller and shorter branches with more or less
contracted bases, and with tufts of short, fugacious leaves near the
tapering apices; branches of all orders more or less flexuous; cortical
cells linear, 3-4 times as long as wide; tetraspores in ultimate ramuli,
the fertile portion showing a subdentate outline, the apex short-122
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
pointed, the base sharply distinct from the lower sterile part of the
ramulus, which is usually about half the diam. of the fertile part;
segments of pericentral cells showing indistinctly through the corti-
cation in the youngest portions only; dense fascicles of short, unicel-
lular rhizoids issuing from all portions of the plant; color pale red;
substance rather firm. Type in Collins herbarium, No. 8007, Shelly
Bay, Jan. 10, 1913, Hervey; also at North Shore near Wistowe,
Jan., Feb., Hervey; dredged in 18 meters, Dec., Collins.
The cylindrical fronds and the absence of apical pits place this
plant in the subgenus Euchondria Falk.; the abundant rhizoids are
of the same type as in the genus Herpochondria, but there is neither
the dorsiventral structure nor the lateral adherence of the latter.
The rhizoids may occur in short cylindrical fascicles, or may form a
dense mass along the frond for a distance equal to several diameters;
they may occur on branches of any order, even on the stichidia with
mature tetraspores.
Acanthophora Lamouroux.
A. spicifera (Yahl) Borgesen, 1910, p. 204, figs. 18-19; P. B.-A.,
No. 1938; A. Thierii Harvey, 1853, p. 17, PI. XIV. A; Fucus spici-
ferus Yahl, 1802, p. 44. Aug., Kemp; Rein; Tucker, No. 13; Wal-
singham, Farlow; common in quiet waters generally, Jan., March,
Oct., Hervey; April, May, July, Aug., Collins. In July and August
lying loose on the bottom, but continuing to grow. On submerged
tips of live Tamarisk branches, Harrington Sound, Aug., Collins.
Falkenbergia Schmitz.
F. Hillebrandi (Born.) Falkenberg, 1901, p. 689; Borgesen, 1910,
p. 199, fig. 17; P. B.-A., No. 2043; Polysiphonia Hillebrandi Bornet
in Ardissone, 1883, p. 376. Growing in matted tufts on various algae;
Miss Peniston; cave by Ducking Stool, April, cave, Gravelly Bay,
Aug., Dec., Gibbet Island, Aug., Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins; Har-
rington Sound, Oct., Nov., Dec., cave, Gravelly Bay, Dec., Hervey.
In the plants collected at Gravelly Bay in December, were found
tetraspores, which have not before been recorded for the species;
they are tripartitely divided, and formed from one of the pericentral
cells of a ramulus, quite as in Polysiphonia, but occurred singly, not
in series.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
123
Polysiphonia Greville.
1.	Pericentral cells 4.	2.
I. Pericentral cells more than 4.	4.
2.	Forming low, dense, more or less even-topped tufts or mats.
2.	P. macrocarpa.
2. Taller, more open in growth.	3.
3.	Segments seldom over 1 diam. long; tetraspores in densely forking,
divaricate ramuli.	4. P. ferulacea.
3.	Segments in main axis usually over 1 diam. long; tetraspores near tips
of normal branches.	1. P. havanensis.
4.	Pericentral cells 8-13; soft and dense.	3. P. foetidissima.
4.	Pericentral cells 20-24 in main axis; firmer.	5. P. opaca.
1.	P. havanensis Montagne forma mucosa J. G. Agardh, 1863,
p. 960; P. B.-A., No. 1941; P. havanensis Harvey, 1S53, p. 34.
Spanish Rock, April, floating by Causeway, Oct., Inlet, Oct., St.
George’s Bay, Dec., Hervey. On Penicillus, Halimeda, Sargassum
etc.; cystocarps in April. Fairyland, Dec., Collins. The fine soft
filaments and rich red-brown color are characteristic of this form;
the segments vary from one to four diam. long in the same plant.
The cystocarps are globose below, broadly urceolate above. The
leaves are long and much branched; normal branches are formed in
their axils.
2.	P. macrocarpa Harvey in Mackay, 1836, part 2, p. 206;
P. B.-A., No. 2093; P. pulvinata Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CII. B, not of
J.	Ag. On mangroves, with Dichotomosiphon pusillus etc., Hungry
Bay, May, Collins. Forming a close and rather dense coating. The
filaments resemble P. subtilissima Mont., but are more slender, and
the habit is quite different. An account of the distinction between
this plant and the original P. pulvinata (Roth) J. Ag. will be found in
Bornet, 1892, p. 306. Our plant is more slender than the European
but otherwise the same.
3.	P. foetidissima Cocks in Bornet, 1892, p. 314; British Sea-
weeds, No. 29; P. B.-A., No. 1890. On timbers by sea wall at Hamil-
ton, Jan., on stones on beach at St. George’s, April, Hervey; cysto-
carps and tetraspores in Jan. An apparently little known species,
but quite well marked. The filaments have S-10, rarely to 13 peri-
central cells, are creeping at the base, then erect, much branched,
reaching a height of 15 cm. The substance is soft, the color deep
purplish red. It decays promptly when taken from the water, and
then thoroughly justifies its specific name.124
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
4.	P. ferulacea Suhr in J. G. Agardh, 1863, p. 980; P. B.-A.,
No. 1940; P. breviarticulata Harvey, 1853, p. 36, PI. XVI. B, not of
J. Ag. Rein, as P. nigrescens in part; Moseley, as P. subtilissima;
Spanish Point, Harrington Sound, Jan., Gravelly Bay, Feb., April,
Tucker’s Town, Feb., Dec., Hervey. A rather common and generally
distributed species. Harvey’s figure represents the plant quite ac-
curately, except as to the quadrangular section of the filaments,
which was probably due to the use of dried material; the Bermuda
material shows the usual circular section. Rhizoids are well devel-
oped on the lower, prostrate part, arising each from a pericentral cell,
often one from each segment. Where the creeping filament is near
to a firm substratum, the rhizoids are short and stout; where there is
no such stratum near, the rhizoids may be much elongated, up to
3 mm. long, becoming very slender. In the actively growing tips,
the segments may have a length of only one fifth their diameter;
in older parts the segments may be slightly longer than their diameter;
the usual length is about one half a diam. Leaves are abundant,
branches being produced from their axils.
At Heron Bay we found a plant agreeing quite closely with P. fracta
Harvey, 1853, p. 38, and with an authentic specimen in the Farlow
herbarium; it seems to us, however, to be only an old and battered
form of P. ferulacea. Authentic specimens of the latter, in the Farlow
herbarium, confirm this view.
5.	P. opaca (Ag.) Zanardini, 1842, p. 165; P. B.-A., No. 1891;
Hutchinsia opaca Agardh, 1824, p. 148. Kemp, as P. fibrillosa; Rein,
as P nigrescens, in part; On rocks, Heron Bay, Jan., March, Ely’s
Harbor, April, Hervey; in grotto, Tucker’s Town, April, Fairyland,
Dec., Collins. We have included under this name all the many-
tubed Polysiphonias that we have found in Bermuda. Some speci-
mens agree well with the European form, others, specially those from
Fairyland, considerably resemble P. simulans Harvey, but we have
not been able to draw any line between these and the more typical
forms. Tetraspores were found in April. Branches arise in the axils
of the leaves.
Digenea Agardh.
D. simplex (Wulfen) Agardh, 1822, p. 389; Harvey, 1853, p. 29,
PI. XIII. D; P. B.-A., No. 1939; Conferva simplex Wulfen, 1803, p. 7.
Castle Harbor, Farlow; Gravelly Bay, Feb., Mangrove Bay, Feb.,
Harris Bay, April, Dec., Hervey; St. David’s Island, April, Collins.
Fairly common at various places, but plants usually small compared
with ordinary forms of Florida and the Mediterranean.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
125
Wrightiella Schmitz.
1. Main axes virgate, except in the older parts beset with short, subequal
ramuli.	1. W. Blodgettii.
1. Branches of successive orders diminishing in size; ramuli of varying length.
2. W. Tumanowiczi.
1.	W. Blodgettii (Harv.) Schmitz, 1893, p. 222; P. B.-A., No.
1942; Alsidium Blodgettii Harvey, 1853, p. 16, PI. XV. B. Kemp,
specimen in herb, as Dasya mucronata, also unnamed specimen; Shelly
Bay, Feb., Harris Bay, Walsingham, April, Hervey; in pot-hole,
Gravelly Bay, April, Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins; tetraspores in
Jan. and April.
2.	W. Tumanowiczi (Gatty) Schmitz, 1893, p. 222; P. B.-A., No.
2095. Dasya Tumanowiczi Gatty in Harvey, 1853, p. 64. Moseley;
Buildings Bay, April, with cystocarps, Hervey. In this collecting a
single plant was found, dense and bushy and over 7 dm. high; over 30
good mounted specimens were made from it, but it was throughout
more slender than much smaller individuals of W. Blodgettii. In
appearance the two species are quite different, the stout spinous
branches of the latter are quite visible to the naked eye, and set all
over the plant; in W. Tumanowiczi they are hardly visible without a
lens. Technically, it is hard to find distinguishing characters; tetra-
spores and cystocarps are quite alike, and as suggested by Falkenberg,
1901, p. 559, they are certainly closely related.
Murrayella Schmitz.
M. periclados (Ag.) Schmitz, 1893, p. 227; P. B.-A., No. 2096;
Hutchinsia ■periclados Agardh, 1828, p. 101; Bostrychia Tuomeyi
Harvey, 1853, p. 58, PI. XIV. E. Among Bostrychia species, on man-
groves and rocks, Tucker’s Town, Hungry Bay etc., Common as
scattered individuals among other species, rarely pure or constituting
the greater part of the growth.
Herposiphonia Nageli.
1. Branches recurved.	3. H. pecten-veneris.
1. Branches straight.	2.
2. Determinate branches about the same size as the axis. 1. H. secunda.
2. Determinate branches about half the size of the axis. 2. H. tenella.126
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
1.	H. secunda (Ag.) Falkenberg, 1901, p. 307, PI. Ill, figs. 10-12;
P. B.-A., Xo. 2041; Hutchinsia secunda Agardh, 1824, p. 149; Poly-
siphonia peden-veneris Var. 5 Harvey, 1853, p. 46, PI. X\ I. D. On
reef, Ely’s Harbor, Aug., Collins. In this material the erect branches
are often abortive, and the regularity of position of branches charac-
teristic of the species is obscured.
2.	H. texella (Ag.) Nageli, 1846, PI. VII, fig. 2; P. B.-A., No.
1943; Hutchinsia tenella Agardh, 1828, p. 105. On rocks, corallines
and other algae, Harrington Sound, Bailey’s Bay, Gibbet Island,
Jan., Smith’s Bay, Feb., Nov., Harris Bay, April, Tucker’s Town,
Dec., Hervey.
3.	H. pecten-veneris (Harv.) Falkenberg, 1901, p. 315; Polysi-
phonia peden-veneris Harvey, 1853, p. 46, PI. XVI. C. Among
Gelidiopsis, Harris Bay, April, Hervey. A delicate and attractive
species; the graceful recurving of the branches easily distinguishes it.
Lophosiphonia Falkenberg.
1. Pericentral cells 10-16.	3. L. obscura.
1. Pericentral cells 4.	2.
2. Basal filament attached to substratum by filiform rhizoids, with or
without disks.	1. L. bermudensis.
2. Basal filaments penetrating the host by rhizoids much inflated below.
2. L. Saccorhiza.
1. L. bermudensis sp. nov.; Cellulis pericentralibus 4, interdum
5 aut 6; filamentis prostratis 100-110/t diam., cellulis 1-2 diam.
longis; filamentis erectis numerosis, ad 6Q segmentis longis, 60-80 p
diam. a basi ad prope apicem; cellulis l§-2 diam. longis, interdum
solummodo § diam.; ramis plus minusve ramosis, aliquando densissime;
ramis brevibus. Antheridiis conicocylindricis, 160-200 p X 40-50 p,
ad apicibus ramorum aggregatis; cystocarpiis subglobosis, lateraliter
sessilibus, vel ad pedicellum perbreve, circa 250/1 diam.; tetraspor-
angiis circa 80 p diam., 2-5 in seriem rectilineam, in ramulis subin-
crassatis, saepe cur vis. Plate III, figs. 18-21.
Pericentral cells 4, occasionally 5 or 6; prostrate filaments 100-110 p
diam., cells 1-2 diam. long; erect filaments numerous, up to 60 cells
long, 60-80 p diam. from base to near apex, cells l|-2 diam. long,
occasionally only \ diam.; more or less branched, sometimes quite
densely, branches short. Antheridia conical-cylindric, 160-200 X
40-50 p, clustered at apices of branches; cystocarps subglobose,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
127
sessile or lateral on very short pedicels, about 250 /x diam.; tetra-
sporangia about 80 g. diam., 2-5 in a straight series, in somewhat
swollen, often curved ramuli. Rhizoids filiform, varying in size but
usually slender, attached to the substratum by a terminal disk. Type
in Collins herbarium. Gravelly Bay, Feb., Hervey, Fairyland, Cave
at Agar’s Island, Aug., and dredged in 6 m., Collins. A rather delicate
plant, usually on Sargassum or Zonaria, but also on limpet shells.
The variation in number of pericentral cells is something exceptional
in a plant of normally four. The increased number does not seem to
be limited to any part of the plant, but may occur in horizontal or
erect filaments, younger or older. It has some resemblance to L.
subadunca (Kiitz.) Falk., but that has uniformly six pericentral cells.
2. L. Saccorhiza sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2042. Cellulis peri-
centralibus 4; filamentis prostratis 50-70 /x diam., segmentis 1-2
diam. longis; filamentis erectis numerosis, ad 2 mm. longis, 25-45/x
diam., ad basin abrupte, apicem versus longissime attenuatis, prope
apicem folia bene evoluta sed fugacissima gerentibus; segmentis 2-3
diam. longis, ad apicem diametro brevioribus; filamento prostrato
ad plantem hospitem rhizoideis numerosis affixo a parte inferiore fila-
menti ortis, primo cylindraceis vel ortu complanatis axis filamenti
sensu, mox in saccos ovoideos expansis, ad 800 /x longis, 160 /x diam.,
inter utriculos plantae hospitis penetrantes. Tetrasporangiis uniseri-
atis in parte superiore filamenti erecti sitis, diametrum filamenti
ad duplo superantibus; cystocarpiis subsphaericis, circa 100/x diam.,
apicibus ramorum proximis, segmentis proxime inferioribus saepe
ramulos breves solitarios vel paucos gerentibus. Antheridiis folio-
rum evolutione ortis, conico-ovoideis. Colore roseo; substantia
molli. Plate II, figs. 13-14, Plate III, figs.15-17.
Pericentral cells 4; prostrate filaments 50-70/x diam., segments
1-	2 diam. long, erect filaments numerous, up to 2 mm. long, 25-45 /x
diam., contracted abruptly at base, gradually towards apex, segments
2-	3 diam. long, at growing tip shorter than the diam.; well developed
but very fugacious leaves formed on the upper part; prostrate fila-
ments attached to the host by numerous rhizoids issuing from the
lower pericentral cells of the prostrate filament, one or more from a
segment, at first cyclindrical in section, or flattened in a line with the
axis of the filament, below expanding into an ovoid sac, up to 800 /x
long, 160 /x wide, penetrating between the utricles of the host. Tetra-
sporangia in a single series in the upper part of a filament, up to twice
the diameter of the filament. Cystocarps subspherical, about 100 ju
diam., near end of erect filament, one or more short branches issuing128
COLLINS AND HERYEY.
from the segments next below. Antheridia developed from leaves,
conical-ovoid. Color rosy red; substance soft.
From the few 4-tubed species of Lophosiphonia this is distinguished
by branching characters, but specially by the great development of
the rhizoids, which show a remarkable adaptation to its habitat, the
fronds of Codium. The rhizoids take the shape of utricles, of much the
same shape and size as those of the host, but in reversed position. At
first a relatively slender cell, cyclindrieal, or occasionally flattened in
a line with the axis of the filament, as soon as the rhizoid has pene-
trated between the stouter parts of the Codiuvi utricles it expands,
and wedges itself in tightly among the latter. As seen under the
microscope, there is a striking contrast between the rosy color of one
set of utricles, and the green of the other. Type in Collins herbarium,
No. 7456, Gibbet Island, March, 1913, Hervey; also from Gibbet
Island, Jan., Smith’s Bay, March, Hervey; Tucker’s Town, April,
Cave near Ducking Stool, Hungry Bay, May, Collins.
3. L. obscura (Ag.) Falkenberg, 1901, p. 500; P. B.-A., No. 1892;
Hutchinsia obscura Agardh, 1828, p. 108; Polysiphonia obscura
Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CII. A. Moseley, as Polysiphonia exilis;
Smith’s Bay, Spanish Rock, Jan., Gibbet Island, March, Harrington
Sound, Dec., Hervey; North and South Shores, April, May, July,
Aug., Collins. Common everywhere on rocks between tide marks,
and in caves, where in well sheltered places it reaches even above
ordinary tides. It varies considerably in size and in luxuriance of
branching, but is not likely to be mistaken for any other species.
Young plants bear long hairs (leaves) in dense branching tufts.
Bostrtchia Montagne.
1.	Main axis ecorticate.
1.	Main axis corticate.
2.	Long monosiphonous ramuli present.
2.	Only a few terminal segments monosiphonous.
3.	Tips of branches incurved; rather coarse.
3.	Branches straight; slender.
1. B. rivularis.
2.
2. B. tenella.
3.
4. B. Montagnei.
3. B. sertularia.
1. B. rivtjlaris Harvey, 1853, p. 57, PI. XIV. D. VValsingham,
April, Hervey. This species, the only one occurring as far north as
New England, has been found only once in Bermuda, and then in a
quite small form, not over 2 cm. high. It was sparingly scattered
among B. Montagnei.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
129
2.	B. tenella (Vahl) J. G. Agardh, 1863, p. 869; P. B.-A., No.
1894; Alg. Amer.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 137, as B. calamistrata; Fucus
tenellus Vahl, 1802, p. 45. Common on roofs and walls of caves, flat
rocks, under mangroves, etc., at all seasons; tetraspores in Nov.
The most common species of the genus; the species of Bostrychia
usually grow intermixed with each other, and with Caloglossa and
Catenella; it is exceptional to find any one species pure, while the
combination of two or more, in varying proportions, is to be found
everywhere in the stations noted for this species. B. tenella is quite
variable, and the extreme forms seem quite distinct. Forma tenwior
J. G. Agardh, 1863, p. 869; B. calamistrata Harvey, 1853, p. 56, PI.
XIV. C, and forma densa J. G. Agardh, 1863, p. 869; Rhcjdomela
calamistrata Montagne, 1846, p. 36, PI. IV, fig. 1, both occur, often
in the same collecting, connected by intermediate forms.
3.	B. sertularia Montagne, 1859, p. 176; P. B.-A., No. 2094;
Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 138. Grotto, Tucker’s Town, Dec.,
Hervey; Gravelly Bay, April, Collins. The tetraspores of this species,
of which there seems to have been no record, were found in material
from the cave at Gravelly Bay, and are also in material distributed
by Farlow, in Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc. _ A stichidium is formed in the
limited branch of a main axis, usually occupying only a small part of
its length, in the majority of cases below the middle, the unchanged
branch extending both above and below the stichidium, bearing
both above and below ramuli of normal construction; this appears
to be an exception to the usual formation in this genus. B. sertularia
has been considered by some as a synonym of B. tenella, e. g., De Toni,
1903, p. 1162, but the two seem quite distinct. B. tenella is a plant
of softer substance, with long monosiphonous ramuli, and long-
lanceolate or linear-lanceolate stickidia; B. sertularia is firmer, only
a few of the extreme segments of a ramulus being monosiphonous;
the branching is strictly distichous, and the stichidium occupies the
middle part of the otherwise unchanged ramulus of the penultimate
or ultimate order.
4.	B. Montagnei Harvey, 1853, p. 55, PI. XIV. B; P. B.-A., No.
1893; Alg. Am.-Bor. Exsicc., No. 136. H. Kennedy, Feb. in Farlow
herb.; July, Kemp, as B. scorpioides; Hungry Bay, April, May,
Collins; Causeway, Nov., with cystocarps, Hervey. The largest and
coarsest species. The cystocarps are large, depressed-globose, and
terminal on rather long ultimate ramuli.130
COLLIXS AX'D HEKYEY.
Dasta Agardh.
1.	Divisions few, subsimple, ramelli very dense at tips. 1. D. oeellata.
1.	More branched,' ramelli less dense at tips.	2.
2.	Ramelli all unbranched or forkings narrow.	3.
2.	Ramelli divaricately or squarrosely branched, at least near base. 5.
3.	Ramelli deciduous, leaving short, acute, spinous branches.
3.	D. spinuligera.
3. Ramelli more persistent; no spinous branches.	4.
4.	Ramelli very slender, short-celled, generally distributed on all but the
oldest parts.	2. D. pedicellata.
4.	Ramelli larger, longer-celled, in more or less distinct whorls.
4. D. punicea.
5.	Ramelli stout near their base, diminishing at each forking, very slender
at apex.	6.
5.	Ramelli nearly uniform in size throughout.	5. D. arbuscula.
6.	Ramelli forming a very dense coating, especially near tips of branches.
6.	D. ramosissima.
6. Ramelli in minute, subcorymbose clusters, not denser near apices.
7.	D. corymbifera.
1.	D. ocellata (Grat.) Harvey in Hooker, 1833, p. 335; 1846-51,
PI. XL; Ceramium ocellatum Grateloup, 1807, p. 34. Cooper’s
Island, Feb., Farlow; on Sargassum, Gibbet Island, Jan., Gravelly
Bay, Feb., Hervey; tetraspores in Jan.
2.	D. pedicellata Agardh, 1824, p. 211; D. elegans Harvey,
1853, p. 60; Kiitzing, 1864, p. 21, PI. LIX. Kemp, as D. pediculata;
Merriman; Miss Peniston; Miss Wilkinson; Shelly Bay, April,
Collins; Buildings Bay, March, Hervey. The common Dasya of the
Atlantic coast from Cape Cod to Florida, but evidently not common
here. Though the name D. elegans has been long familiar, it will
have to be given up for D. pedicellata, the priority of which is unques-
tionable.
3.	D. spinuligera sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2188. Cellulis peri-
centralibus 5, corticatis, cortice glabro, continuo, cellularum minorum,
elongatarum; ramis paucis, elongatis, ramulos breves, patentes,
acutos, gerentibus; apice ramuli junioris fasciculum densum ramel-
lorum ferente, adultioris nudo; ramellis densissimis, deciduis, mono-
siphoniis, dichotomis, rectis nec divaricatis, cellulis 2-3 diam. longis,
superne 1 diam. modo, diametro ubique aequali; stichidiis conicis
vel cylindro-conicis, prope basin fasciculi ramellorum ortis; tetra-
sporangiis 2-4 in verticillo; frondis substantia firma; colore rubro
obscuro. Plate IV, figs. 24-25.
Pericentral cells 5, corticate, cortex smooth, even, of small elongateTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
131
cells; with few elongate branches, bearing patent, acute ramuli, the
younger with a dense fascicle of ramelli at the tip, the older naked;
ramelli very dense, deciduous, monosiphonous, dichotomous, straight,
not divaricate; cells 2-3 diam. long, above only 1 diam.; diameter
the same throughout; stichidia conical or cyclindric-conical, arising
near the base of a fascicle of ramuli; tetrasporangia 2-4 in a whorl.
Substance of the frond firm; color dark red. Type in Collins her-
barium, No. 7243; collected at Shelly Bay, May 4, 1912, Collins.
When ramelli are abundant, this plant somewhat resembles D. punicea,
but the ramelli show no tendency to a verticillate arrangement, and
fall off more easily. The surface of the frond after the ramelli have
fallen is smooth and even, not knotted and irregular as in D. punicea;
the cells are small and regular, not large and irregular as in that species.
4.	D. punicea Meneghini in Zanardini, 1842, p. 171; 1865, PI.
LII. Dingle Bay, March, Hervey; Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins;
both with tetraspores. In habit somewhat resembling D. pedicellata,
but the ramelli are larger, of longer cells, and with a distinct tendency
to issue in whorls.
5.	D. arbuscula (Dillw.) Agardh, 1828, p. 121; Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. CCXXIV; P. B.-A., No. 1944; Conferva arbuscula Dillwyn, 1809,
PI. G. Shelly Bay, Jan., Smith’s Bay, March, Harris Bay, April,
Hervey; Hungry Bay, April, in dense floating masses and attached to
mangroves, Collins.
6.	D. ramosissima Harvey, 1853, p. 61; Kutzing, 1S64, PI. LXIX,
figs, d-e; P. B.-A., No. 1945. On vertical rock between tides, Pink
Beach, Jan., Feb., Smith’s Bay, March, Gibbet Island, Dec., Hervey.
In habit not unlike D. corymbifera, but the divisions of the ramelli are
incurved.
7.	D. corymbifera J. G. Agardh, 1841, p. 31; D. venusta Harvey,
1846-51, PI. CCXXV; D. arbuscula P. B.-A., No. 1097b, not 1097a; D.
arbuscula forma subarticulata P. B.-A., No. 493. Washed ashore from
deep water, Buildings Bay, Feb., Hervey; dredged in 4 m., Nov.,
Collins. Sometimes confused with D. arbuscula which it resembles
in habit; both have a dense coating of divaricately branching ramelli,
but in D. corymbifera the tips of the ramelli are much more slender
than their bases.
Heterosiphonia Montagne.
H. Wurdemanni (Bailey) Falkenberg, 1901, p. 638, PI. XVI, fig. 11;
P. B.-A., No. 2097; Dasya Wurdemanni Bailey in Harvey, 1853, p. 64,
PI. XV. C. Cooper’s Island, Feb., Farlow; Harrington Sound, Jan.,132
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
March, Gibbet Island, Dec., Hervey; Hungry Bay, April, Cooper’s
Island, Aug., Little Agar’s Island, Nov., Collins. On Gelidium and
other algae, but most frequently on Sargassum; a careful search would
probably discover it in any lot of old Sargassum, but it is seldom found
in large quantity.
Family CERAMIACEAE.
Spermothamnion Areschoug.
1.	Cells 5-20 diam. long; tetraspores usually in corymbose clusters.
3. S. macromeres.
1. Cells 2-7 diam. long; tetraspores solitary.	2.
2.	Filaments 15-20 n diam.	1. S. investiens.
2. Filaments 40-50 p diam.	2. S. gorgoneum.
1.	S. investiens (Crouan) Vickers, 1905, p. 64; Callithamnion
investiens Crouan in Maze & Schramm, 1870-1877, p. 141. On
Galaxaura squalida, Gravelly Bay, April, St. David’s Island, April,
Collins; Harris Bay, Dec., Hervey. The dimensions of the Bermuda
plant agree with those given by Miss Vickers for the Barbados plant;
Borgesen, 1909, p. 17, fig. 10, describes and figures var. cidaricola from
the Danish Vest Indies; the dimensions are considerably larger than
in the typical form, but the habit and the tetraspores are the same as
in the Bermuda plant.
2.	S. gorgoneum (Mont.) Bornet in Vickers, 1905, p. 64; Callith-
manion gorgoneum Montague, 1857, p. 289. Common on fronds of
species of Codium. Tetraspores with tripartite division were found
in Bermuda material, borne on an upcurved pedicel.
3.	S. macromeres sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2044. Filamentis pros-
tratis circa 65 p diam., cellulis 3-5 diam. longis, rhizoideis magnum
discum terminalem ferentibus, affixis; filamentis erectis 5-8 mm.
longis, basi circa 50 p diam., sensim diminutis, in rarnis ultimis circa
30 p; cellulis 5-20 diam. longis, cylindricis vel leviter clavatis, cellulis
ramiferis valide clavatis; ramificatione distante, apparenter dicho-
toma, axi ramoque subaequalibus, minime divergentibus; tetraspor-
angiis in ramo laterali evolutis, ramum vegetativum referente, vel in
ramis brevibus oppositis; ramis tetrasporangiferis raro simplicibus,
vulgo di- trichotome ad cellulam quamque repetite divisis, cellulis
brevibus, clavatis; tetrasporangiis terminalibus, tripartitis, 50-55 p
diam., globosis vel paullo elongatis, membrana crassa; antheridioTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
133
latere interiore rami evoluto, loco rami vegetativi, ovoideo-cylindrico,
125-130 X 50—60 /a; cystocarpio cellula brevi clavata suffulto, loco
rami vegetativi evoluta.
Prostrate filaments about 65 u diam., cells 3-5 diam. long, attached
by rhizoids with a large terminal disk; erect filaments 5-8 mm. long,
about 50 n diam. at base, gradually diminishing to about 30 /j. in
ultimate divisions, cells 5-20 diam. long, cylindrical or somewhat
clavate, branch-bearing cells strongly clavate; branching usually
distant, apparently dichotomous, the axis and branch nearly equal in
size and diverging very slightly; tetrasporangia produced on a short
branch arising like a vegetative branch, or on two short branches
opposite on the axis; tetrasporic branches rarely simple, usually di- or
trichotomously divided, the divisions each of a short, clavate cell;
tetraspores borne on the ultimate divisions, tripartite, 50-55 y diam.,
globose or slightly elongate, with wide pellucid wall; antheridium on
the inner side of a branch, occupying the place of a vegetative branch,
ovoid-cylindrical, 125-150 X 50-60 n; cystocarp borne on a short,
clavate cell, taking the place of a vegetative branch. Type in Collins
herbarium, Smith’s Bay, Jan. 18, 1913, Hervey. Also at the same
place, Feb., March, Nov., Dec., Hervey.
The extremely long cells in this species, 20 diameters long being not
uncommon, distinguish it from other species of the genus. The erect
filaments are usually very sparingly branched, though in the upper
half there may sometimes be a branch from every cell; in other cases
the erect filament branches only two or three times in its whole length;
the branch is hardly distinguishable from the axis, either by size or
direction. The tetrasporangium may be terminal on a relatively
short cell, 2-3 diam. long, arising from the axis; or this cell may divide
one to several times, in the latter case twenty to thirty tetrasporangia
being borne at the apices of the divisions, forming a dense, corymb-
like cluster. The anthcridia appear sessile, as they take the place of
normal branches on the inner side of a secondary axis, the unmodified
cells of which are shorter than the normal, though not as short as in
the tetrasporic clusters; occasionally both branches of a forking are
transformed into antheridia. Cystocarps are formed in the same
position as antheridia, but the lower cell of the transformed branch
remains unchanged. Antheridia were plentiful in material collected
in January, tetraspores at all seasons; cystocarps were found in Jan-
uary material only, scarce and somewhat immature. The prostrate
filaments are affixed by numerous short, stout rhizoids with much
expanded terminal disks; occasionally a more slender rhizoid is pro-134
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
duced by the lowest cell of an erect filament. The plant grew on
the top of sand-covered rocks, covered at high tide; the coral sand
sifted in among the alga, forming a dense fibrous mass.
Ceramothamnion Richards.
C. Codii Richards, 1901, p. 264, PI. XXI; P. B.-A., No. 1899;
Plate III, fig. 22; plate IV, fig. 23. Common on Codium tomentosum
and other species of Codium all about the islands, at all times of the
year, almost always in abundant fruit. It was once found on Lauren-
cia cervicornis. A few notes can be added to the quite full description
of Richards. He observed only a single ripe tetrasporangium at a
node; we have found not uncommonly two, rarely three, in one
instance four, of apparently equal age, side by side; branches occa-
sionally occur independently of the polyspores; we have found organs
quite agreeing with his figures of the latter, but also similar organs,
larger, up to 160 n diam., spherical, containing up to 45 spores, and in
appearance quite indistinguishable from cystocarps of Ceramium-17
Against the identification of these organs as cystocarps must be
reckoned our failure to discover anything like procarps, and the
question must be left open. The rhizoids offer some interesting
peculiarities, doubtless due to adaptation to their position, between
the closely-packed utricles of the host; at first terete, they soon
become flattened, and often two or more unite laterally, in a mem-
branous expansion, which may be as much as 10 cells wide. In one
case three rhizoids from one individual united with two from another
to form one membrane. The cross wralls in these rhizoidal membranes
are often much oblique, and the arrangement of the cells reminds one
somew'hat of that in the leaf of a moss. See Figures 22 and 23.
The material from which this species was described was collected in
Bermuda in 1898 and 1899; the only other record of its occurrence
is at Barbados, Vickers, 1905, p. 65.
17 Schiller, 1913, has made extensive observations on organs of this char-
acter in genera allied to Ceramothamnion, and he reports that in every case
they were accompanied by tetraspores of normal character on the same
individual. This is not the case with this species.
Griffithsia Agardh.
1. Vegetative cells cylindrical throughout.
1. Lower cells subcylindrical, upper ovoid.
1. All cells subspherical.
1. G. tenuis.
2. G. Schousboei.
3. G. monilis.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
135
1.	G. tenuis Agardh, 1828, p. 131; P. B.-A., No. 1895; Plate VI,
figs. 38-39; G. thyrsigera Askenasy, 1888, p. 36, PI. IX, figs. 1 & 4;
Vickers, 1905, p. 64; Callithamnion tenue, Harvey, 1858, p. 130.
Inlet, above and below Flatts Bridge, Jan., Feb., March, April, Dec.,
Heron Bay, Jan., Hervey. Common at these stations in late winter
and early spring; cystocarps, antheridia and tetraspores all produced
from January to March. The similarity between Griffithsia tenuis Ag.
and Callithamnion thyrsigera Thwaites has been noticed more than
once. Harvey, 1858, p. 130, kept up the distinction with some doubt.
Grunow, 1874, p. 8, considers the latter merely a robust form of the
former. Harvey had compared the plant from Beesley’s Point,
New Jersey, with an authentic Mediterranean specimen; we have
compared with a Beesley’s Point specimen of the original collecting
specimens from Atlantic City, N. J. (S. R. Morse), Nantucket (L.
L. Dame), Falmouth, Massachusetts (Collins), and G. thyrsigera,
Vickers, Algues de la Barbade, No. 182. All agree in essential details
with each other, and with the figures and text of Askenasy. The
Bermuda material seems to be more luxuriant, especially the tetra-
sporic; it is not uncommon to find 15 tetrasporangia in a whorl, five
whorls of tetrasporangia, mature or nearly mature, and two whorls of
immature, at once on an axis. Antheridia are borne on a pedicel of
one to three cells; Askenasy reports one-celled pedicels only. The
cystocarps were unknown until found on our Bermuda material; they
are characteristic of Griffithsia, and the generic position of the species
may now be regarded settled. Rhizoids were frequent on the older
plants, of the usual form, unicellular, longer or shorter as required to
reach the substratum, where an expanded disk was formed. They
have thicker walls than the filament cells, and contain nearly as deeply
colored chromatophores.
2.	G. Schousboei Montagnein Webb, 1839, p. 11, PI. X. Washed
ashore, St. George’s, Feb., sand covered rock, Pink Bay, March,
Hervey. Agrees with the European plant in vegetative characters,
but in the absence of fruit the identification is only provisional.
3.	G. monilis Harvey, 1855, p. 559; in Hooker & Harvey, 1855-
1860, p. 332, PI. CXCV. B. In cave, Gravelly Bay, Dec., Jan.,
March, on sand-covered rocks, Smith’s Bay, March, Hervey;
Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins. Tetraspores in Jan. G. monilis is
an Australian species, and its occurrence here is of interest. Agardh
calls attention to its similarity to G. Schousboei, but while what we
take for that species occurs in Bermuda, it has most of the cells
cylindrical, a few ovoid, while in G. monilis the cells are strictly
globose, or a little elongated or depressed.136
COLLINS AND HEEVET.
Callithamnion Lyngbye.
1.	Branching distichous, pinnate.	2.
1.	Branching radial or dichotomous.	3.
2.	Little cortication, cells long, ultimate ramuli long, slender.
4. C. roseum.
2.	Much cortication, cells short, pinnae decompound, ultimate ramuli,
short, stout.	5. C. Hookeri.
3.	Branching alternate throughout.	1. C. byssoideum.
3.	Branching at least in part dichotomous.	4.
4.	Ultimate divisions long, slender.	6. C. cordatum.
4.	Ultimate divisions shorter and stouter.	5.
5.	Alternate branching usually confined to axis and branches of first order,
otherwise dichotomous.	3. C. Halliae.
5.	Only smaller divisions dichotomous; distance very short between forkings.
2. C. corymbosum.
1.	C. byssoideum Arnott var. jamaicense Collins, 1901, p. 258;
P. B.-A., No. 2045. Gravelly Bay, Jan., Feb., March, Oct., Hervey;
April, Aug., Collins. Growing in dense patches, not over 3 cm. high,
just below low water mark, in a small cave. In the water it shows
a peculiar bluish iridescence, like the bloom on a plum.
2.	C. corymbosum (Eng. Bot.) Lyngbye, 1819, p. 125, PI.
XXXVIII. C.; Harvey, 1846-51, PI. CCLXXII; Conferva corymbosa
Eng. Bot., 1811, PI. MMCCCLII. Washed ashore, Cooper’s Island,
Feb., Farlow; on Wrightiella Blodgettii, Harris Bay, April, Collins.
In both cases with abundant tetraspores.
3.	C. Halliae Collins in P. B.-A., No. 698; 1906, p. Ill; P. B.-A.,
No. 1896. Outlet of Harrington Sound, Jan., Feb., March., Hervey,
large and handsome plants; tetraspores in Jan., no other fruit;
Burchell’s Cove, Feb., large rich purple patches on bottom in shallow
water, Hervey; shore of Agar’s Island, Dec., Collins.
4.	C. roseum (Roth) Harvey in Hooker, 1833, p. 341; Harvey,
1846-51, PI. CCXXX; Ceramium roseum Roth, 1798, p. 46. On
Codium, near Causeway, Feb., Hervey, with tetraspores. The plants
are attached to the Codium by a dense mass of slender filaments with
red protoplasts, penetrating deeply the tissue of the host. They are
continuations of the descending growths from the bases of the branches,
which cover the lower part of the axis, as a cortex.
5.	C. Hookeri (Dillw.) Agardh, 1828, p. 178; Harvey, 1846-51,
PL CCLXXIX; P. B.-A., No. 2046; Conferva Hookeri Dillwyn,
1809, PI. CVI. Kemp, as C. spongiosum. Pink Beach, Jan., Feb.,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
137
March, Gravelly Bay, Feb., March, April, Hervey. At Pink Beach
this plant grew buried in fine sand, on an exposed rock; at Gravelly
Bay in the cave with C. byssoideum var. jamaicense, not as large nor
as well fruiting as at Pink Beach. At that station it bore tetraspores
along the upper edge of the ramuli, as figured by Harvey; antheridia
in rounded tufts at the same points; cystocarps large, spherical to
ovoid, on opposite sides of a branch; the three on separate individuals.
Paraspores were often found at the ends of the ramuli, ovoid, of
varying size, up to 50 X 35 y including the rather thick wall. Tetra-
spores were occasionally found on the individuals producing the
paraspores, but no other organ of fructification. We saw no seriate
paraspores, such as are found in Seirospora Griffithsiana Harv., but
sometimes two were side by side, touching each other, at the end of an
ordinary cell. Kylin, 1907, p. 152, figures and describes paraspores
of C. Hookeri, but of quite a different type; they take each the place
of a tetrasporangium, dividing to produce an indefinite number of
spores, “polyspores” of most authors. De Toni, 1903, p. 1317,
describes C. Hookeri with tetraspores and cystocarps, and vegetative
characters quite as above, and adds “Cautissime haec a Seirospora?
Gaillonii, quacum characteribus plurimis congruit, dignoscatur.”
The latter species is described by him, p. 1352, by vegetative char-
acters and tetraspores only. There is practically no distinction as
regards these characters between the descriptions of the two species.
The final note under S. Gaillonii is “Seirosporae et cystocarpia (sec.
Crouan) presentia.” De Toni includes under Seirospora, with or
without a ?, a number of species which do not seem to us to belong to
that genus, and without any statement of his reasons for so assigning
them; among them Callithamnion byssoideum, with var. jamaicense
and three other varieties.
C. cordatum Borgesen, 1909, p. 10, figs. 5-6; P. B.-A., No.
2189. Washed ashore, Buildings Bay, Feb., Hervey. Abundant, but
entirely sterile, so that the determination must remain doubtful,
although the vegetative characters agree with Borgesen’s description
and figures.
Gymnothamnion J. G. Agardh.
Plumaria Schmitz, not Stackhouse. The genus Plumaria was
founded by Stackhouse, 1809, p. 58, P. pectinata type, with synonym
Fucus plumosus Linnaeus. C. A. Agardh, apparently not knowing of
this publication, proposed, 1817, p. XIX, the genus Ptilota, founded13S
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
on the same Fucus plumosus L.; Agardh’s genus has been generally-
accepted, and many recent species have been included in it.
Ruprecht, however, 1856, p. 335, calls attention to the priority of
Stackhouse’s name, and makes the combination Plumaria aspleni-
oides, and also uses the P. pectinata of Stackhouse. Otto Kunze,
1891, p. 911, takes the same position, and makes new combinations
for 16 species of Ptilota, some of which, however, are unnecessary,
as the species had already been properly transferred to Euptilota
Kiitz. ’ Schmitz, 1889, p. 450, retains Ptilota for most of the
species, including Stackhouse’s type for Plumaria, but revivies
Plumaria for Ptilota elegans, Bonnemaison, a species unknown to
Stackhouse; and in 1S96, p. 7, transfers to Plumaria, Ptilota Schous-
boei Bornet in Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 34, Callithamnion elegans
Schousboei in Agardh, 1828, p. 162. Under the international rules of
nomenclature, and probably under any rule, the name Plumaria
must be retained for Stackhouse’s type, P. plumosa and its congeners;
Ptilota founded on the same species, has no standing, and the only
name we find available for the species placed under Plumaria by
Schmitz is Gymnothamnion J. G. Agardh, 1892, p. 27, type Callitham-
nion elegans Schousboe. Accepting this in place of Plumaria Schmitz,
not Stackhouse, it will include Gymnothamnion elegans (Schousboe)
J. G. Agardh, 1892, p. 27; Callithamnion elegans Schousboe in Agardh,
1828, p. 162; Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 32, PI. X; Ptilota Schousboei
Bornet in Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 34; Plumaria Schousboei Schmitz,
1896, p. 7. G. sericeum (Harvey) comb, nov.; Ptilota sericea
Harvey,18 1846-1851, PI. CXCI; P. elegans Bonnemaison 1828, p. 70;
Plumaria elegans Schmitz, 1889, p. 450. G. Harveyi (Hooker)
comb, nov.; Ptilota Harveyi Hooker, 1845, p. 271; Plumaria Harveyi
Schmitz, 1896, p. 7. G. pellucidum (Harvey) comb, nov.; Ptilota
pellucida Harvey in Hooker & Harvey, 1853-1855, p. 257; Plumaria
pellucida Schmitz, 1896, p. 7; also a new species, described below.
The taxonomy is somewhat complicated; of the five species credited
to this genus, two were published in 1828, Ptilota elegans and Calli-
thamnion elegans; in 1876 Bornet transferred the latter to Ptilota,
but as the specific name elegans was preoccupied, changed it to P.
Schousboei. In 1896 Schmitz transferred both to Plumaria with
specific names unchanged, but in 1892 J. G. Agardh had used Calli-
thamnion elegans as the type of his new genus Gymnothamnion, hence
18 Fucus sericeus Gmelin, 1768, p. 149, PL XV, fig. 3, from Kamtsehatka,
can hardly be a Gymnothamnion. See Ruprecht, 1856, p. 337.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
139
in transferring to the latter the other species of Schmitz’s Plumaria,
a new specific name is needed for Ptilota elegans, and we have taken
Harvey’s name as the next in order.
G. bipinnatum sp. nov.; filamentis basalibus circa 20-25 p diam.,
ramificatione opposita, cellulis diam. 4-5, raro 6-7 longis, membrana
crassa, nodis subconstrictis; axibus erectis basi 20-25 yu diam. superne
attenuatis, ad apicem circa 12 n, cellulis cylindricis vel subclavatis,
inferioribus circa 3 diam. longis, apicem prope 1-1| diam.; ramis
oppositis apice cellulae singulae exeuntibus, parallelis, angula 50°-60°,
rectis vel leviter recurvatis, axi referentibus sed minoribus, raro 15 g.
diam. superantibus; ramorum aliis simplicibus, aliis et pluribus ramu-
los secundatos latere superiore ferentibus; ramulis 1-2-cellularibus,
perraro magis; circumscriptione frondis ovata vel lanceolata; cellulis
terminalibus rotundatis. Filamentis prostratis ramulos rhizoideos
descendentes ferentibus, axibus erectis oppositis, cellula terminali ad
substratum disco affixa. Tetrasporangiis in ramis et ramulis termi-
nalibus, sphaericis vel subovoideis, 30-35 g diam., tripartitis. Plate
IV, fig. 26.
Basal filaments about 20-25 g diam., with opposite branching,
cells 4-5 diam. long, rarely 6-7, wall thick, nodes somewhat con-
stricted; erect axes of about the same size near the base as the pros-
trate filaments, diminishing to 12 g at apex; cells about 3 diam. long
at base, near apex 1-1| diam., cylindrical or slightly clavate, each
bearing at the upper end a pair of opposite branches, forming an
angle of 50-60° with the axis, straight or slightly recurved, similar
to the axis, but averaging smaller, seldom over 15 g diam.; these
branches either simple or more commonly bearing on the upper side,
on part or all of the cells, a second series of branches, 1-2 cells long,
rarely more, 8-10 g diam.; outline of frond ovate or lanceolate;
terminal cells all rounded. Basal filaments producing, opposite to
the erect axes, rhizoids of one or many cells, the end cell forming a
disk of attachment when it reaches the substratum. The end of a
basal filament sometimes becoming erect and developing into a frond
similar to the erect axes; the erect axis sometimes extending beyond
the pinnation, and after an indefinite number of unbranched cells,
developing a second series of branches; or the prolonged naked axis
descending and forming a prostrate filament bearing erect axes and
rhizoids. Tetrasporangia terminal on the branches of the first and
second orders, spherical or slightly ovoid, 30-35 g diam., tripartite.
Cystocarps? Antheridia? On wall of cave, Gravelly Bay, April,
Hervey, type in Collins herbarium; on Wurdemannia, Harrington140
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Sound, Jan., cave, Agar’s Island, July, Aug., shore of Gibbet Island,
Aug., cave, Ducking Stool, Dec., Collins. Tetraspores in April, Aug.
and Dec.
Growing on walls and roofs of caves, or in smaller cavities in rocks,
usually among other algae with a creeping base, such as Rhodochorton
and Spermothamnion. We have found this quite a puzzling form, as
there are three European species, in different genera, of similar size
and habit, and with tetraspores similarly placed. Two of these,
Ptilothamnion pluma Bornet in LeJolis, 1863, p. 118 and Plumaria
Schousboei (Bornet) Schmitz, 1S96, p. 7, while differing in cystocarps
and antheridia, are almost identical otherwise, but a comparison of
the plates, Bornet & Thuret, 1876, p. 32, PI. X, and Bornet & Thuret,
1SS0, p. 179, PI. XLVI, shows that the Plumaria has shorter cells
throughout, and that the branches arise at the upper edge of the cells
of the axis, while in the Ptilothamnion they are distinctly lower.
The Bermuda plant agrees exactly with Plumaria Schousboei in form
and proportions of cells, and place of insertion of branches; on that
account we have placed it in the genus Gymnothamnion, recognizing,
however, that when the sexual fruit is discovered, a different disposi-
tion may be necessary. The uniformly opposite character of the
branching is quite noticeable; even in the prostrate filaments any
other branching is rare and evidently abnormal, though in most
species with opposite branching in the erect parts, the basal part is
apt to vary from this. Moreover, every rhizoid that we have observed
is opposite to an erect axis. Bornet and Thuret, describing P. Schous-
boei, say “ ils adherent par des crampons semblables a eeux des Spermo-
thamnion et des Polysiphonia”; but an examination of PI. X, fig. 1,
shows all the rhizoids opposite to erect axes, while this is not the case
in Spermothamnion flabellatum shown in PL VIII, fig. 1. We are led
to keep the Bermuda plant separate from P. Schousboei principally
from the fact that all well developed fronds bear erect branches of a
second order, in luxuriant individuals one such branch from every
cell of a branch of the first order, always on the upper side of the
latter. If these branches were in pairs, the distinction would be less
important, and might mean merely a repetition of the normal branch-
ing in luxuriant individuals, but we have never seen an outgrowth
from the under side of a branch of the first order. Curiously enough,
this mode of branching is identical with that of Antithamnion ptero-
ton (Schousb.) Bornet, 1892, p. 331, PI. Ill, figs. 8-9, in regard to
which the author says, “ Cette elegante petite Algue ressemble beau-
coup aux Callithamnion pluma et elegans mais elle est plus delicate,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
141
d’une couleur plus rose. Elle s’en distingue surtout, parce que ses
pinnules, lorsqu’elles sont bien developpees, portent des pinnules de
second ordre sur leur bord superieur et que les t^traspores sont divises
en croix.” The tetraspores in the Bermuda plant are distinctly
tripartite. As a secondary distinction we would note that a prostrate
axis can become erect and an erect axis prolong itself and either de-
velop a new branch system at some distance from the old, or be trans-
formed into a prostrate axis.
The type specimen of the species is No. 7521 in the Collins her-
barium; from the cave at Gravelly Bay, collected by Hervey in April,
1913.
Antithamnion Nageli.
A. cruciatum (Ag.) Nageli, 1847, p. 200; P. B.-A., No. 2191
Callithamnion cruciatum. Agardh, 1827, p. 637; Harvey, 1846-51, PI.
CLXIV. Abundant and luxuriant on an old wreck, Castle Harbor,
St. George’s, April, on rock, Spanish Point, March, May, small form
in cave, Gravelly Bay, Dec., Hervey.
Var. radicans (J. Ag.) comb, nov.; 19 P. B.-A., No. 2047; A. crucia-
tum F. radicans Hauck, 1885, p. 71; Callithamnion cruciatum var.
radicans J. G. Agardh, 1841, p. 44. Creeping on perpendicular or
overhanging rocks between tides, North Shore opposite Gibbet
Island, Aug., Collins; Dec., Hervey. The main axis is prostrate,
about 40 y diani., the cells cylindrical, 2-5 diam. long; near the upper
end of each cell is a pair of opposite branches; whorled branches were
not seen. Successive pairs of branches are not in the same plane,
but are more or less exactly decussate. The lower cell of each branch
is short, no longer than broad, more or less rounded; the following
cells are 2M diam. long, growing shorter upward; the diam. at the
base of the branch, 20-25 y. The short basal cell often bears a long,
simple, rhizoidal branch, the cells up to 10 diam. long, about 15 y diam.,
of paler color than cells elsewhere in the plant; the terminal cell of
this rhizoid may form a discoid expansion, attaching itself to the
substratum. All normal branches, whether issuing from the upper
or the lower surface of the main filament, turn upwards; their branch-
ing is always alternate, a ramulus from each cell, all nearly or quite
19 This combination occurs in Collins, 1900, p. 48, attributed by error to
J. G. Agardh. No synon3uny being given, it can hardly be considered a
publication. The difference from the typical A. cruciatum seems too great
to consider it as a form, as was done by Hauck.142
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
in the same plane; these branches are of 2 or 3 orders, the ultimate
about 12 fx diam., the cells about 2 diam. long, nodes more or less
constricted; the end cell is distinctly acuminate or subulate. “Dru-
senzellen” are abundant, borne usually on the inner side of the lower
cell of an ultimate branch, in the same way as a tetrasporangium; they
are spherical, about 20 y diam., or slightly elongate, 18 X 24 y, with
rather thin wall, strongly refringent, yellowish or pale aeruginous
contents. Occasionally the cells of a branch or of a system of branches
assume a spherical form, as if becoming seirospores, but the contents
do not seem to become darker or denser; the end cell rounds the lower
end, but remains pointed above. No fructification was observed.
The plant is' very small, the axis seldom over 1 cm. long, the branches
hardly 1 mm. ; it is possible that this is not the variety radicans of
J. G. Agardh, of which we have not seen type specimens. Descrip-
tions as far as we know have been short and imperfect, which has led
us to describe the Bermuda plant in rather full detail.
Crouania J. G. Agardh.
C. ATTENUATA (Bohnern.) J. G. Agardh, 1842, p. 83; Harvey, 1853,
p. 226, PI. XXXI. D; P. B.-A., Xo. 2048; Batrachospermum attenua-
tum Bonnemaison in Agardh, 1824, p. 51, as synonym under Mesogloia
attenuata. Very young plants on Caulerpa, Harris Bay, Jan., Nov.,
plants up to 1 dm. high, washed ashore, Buildings Bay, Feb., March,
Hervey.
Spyridia Harvey.
1. Branching mostly distichous.
1. Branching radial.
2. Recurved prickles at ends of ramuli.
2. Xo recurved prickles.
3. S. complanata.
2.
2. S. aculeata.
1. S. filamentosa.
1.	S. filamentosa (Wulf.) Harvey in Hooker, 1833, p. 337;
Harvey, 1846-51, PI. XLVI; P. B.-A., Xo. 1897; Fucus filamentosus
Wulfen, 1803, p. 64. Kemp; Tucker’s Town, Feb., Harrington
Sound, Jan., Feb., Nov., Hervey. Abundant, probably everywhere
about the islands. Occasionally handsome plants can be found, but
they are mostly matted and unattractive. The three species of
Spyridia are much alike in habit; but generally easily distinguished
on microscopic examination.
2.	S. aculeata (Schimper) Kiitzing, 1843, p. 327; 1862, PI. LI;THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
143
Ceramium aculeatum Schimper in Decaisne, 1841, p. 179. Kemp;
Merriman; Harris Bay, Nov., Harrington Sound, Aug., Hervey.
Tetraspores in Nov.
Var. Berkeleyana (Mont.) J. G. Agardh, 1876, p. 272; S. Berlce-
leyana Montagne, 1846, p. 141, PI. XV, fig. 8. Dense tufts on ex-
posed flat rocks at low water, Gravelly Bay, April, Collins, with
tetraspores. In this variety the recurved prickles characteristic of
the species are usually present, but may sometimes be lacking, in
which case it approaches S. filameniosa.
Var. hypneoides J. G. Agardh, 1876, p. 272; P. B.-A., No. 1946.
Castle Harbor, near Walsingham House, April, Harris Bay, March,
April, Hervey; tetraspores in collections of both months. The
hooked tips of some of the branches, similar to those of Hypnea
musciformis, characterize this form. The specimen marked C.
aculeata in the Kemp herbarium belongs to this variety.
3. S. complanata J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 343; 1876, p. 271; P. B.-
A., No. 1947. Harris Bay, Jan., Feb., April, Pink Bay, March,
Hervey; Hungry Bay, Nov., Elbow Bay, Dec., Collins. Growing in
dense tufts on flat rocks near low water.
Ceramium Agardh.
1.	Cortication continuous.
1.	Cortication at nodes only.
2.	Corticating cells in longitudinal series.
2.	Corticating cells not in series.
3.	Main axis creeping, attached by rhizoids.
3.	Main axis erect.
4. Tetraspores cruciate.
4.	Tetraspores tripartite.
2.
3.
5. C. clavulatum.
4. C. nitens.
4.
1. C. tenuissimum.
2. C. cruciatum.
3. C. transversale.
1. C. tenuissimum (Lyng.) J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 120; 1876, p.
94; P. B.-A., No. 1898. C. diaphanum var. tenuissimum Lyngbye,
1819, p. 120, PI. XXXVII. B, fig. 4; C. nodosum Harvey, 1846-51,
PI. XC. Miss Peniston; Harrington Sound, March, Wadsworth;
Harris Bay, Jan., Heron Bay, March, Harrington Sound, April,
Hervey; Hungry Bay, May, Fairyland, Dec., floating, Collins. This
is the plant that passes by this name on the New England coast, and
also Miss Vickers Algues de la Barbade, No. 199; it does not have
the reniform cells considered characteristic of C. tenuissimum by
Petersen, 1908, p. 54, PI. Ill; but in the present uncertainty of specific
limitations in Ceramium, it had better retain the present name. No
fruit of any kind has been observed by us.144
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Yar. patentissimum (Harv.) Farlow, 1881, p. 138; C. arachnoideum
var. patentissimum Harvey, 1853, p. 217, PL XXXIII. B. Heron
Bay, Jan., Hervey. The frequent wide forkings give a habit quite
different from the typical form, but there is agreement in essentials.
Var. arachnoideum (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 117; 1876, p. 94;
P. B.-A., No. 2098. C. arachnoideum Harvey, 1853, p. 217; C. dia-
phanum var. arachnoideum Agardh, 1824, p. 134. On Cymodocea
and various algae, Grasmere, Feb., Harvey. A very slender and
delicate form, but otherwise like the typical form.
Yar. pygmaeum (Kiitz.) Hauck, 1888, p. 460; P. B.-A., No. 2193;
Hormoceras pygmaeum Kiitzing, 1862, p. 23, PI. LXXV. On Codium
decorticatum, Cooper’s Island, Aug., Collins. With tetraspores.
2. C. cruciatum sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2192. Minuta, ad
algas alias repens; filamentis prostratis circa 200 y diam., cylindricis
vel ad nodos leviter constrictis, rhizoidis unicellularibus incoloratis
affixis; filamentis erectis passim ad nodos evolutis; apice filamenti
prostrati assurgente, in filamentum erectum transformato; cellulis
infeme circa 3 diam. longis, superne brevioribus, prope apicem diam-
etro brevioribus; ramulis penultimis 80-100 y diam.; ramis repetite
dichotomis, cellulis cylindricis vel plus minusve ad nodos constrictis;
apicibus forcipatis; corticatione cellulis sensu filamenti elongatis
constante, irregulariter positis, zonam arctam formante margine
inaequali. Protoplasma cellularum inferiorum subcylindricum,
superiorum subsphaericum, fasciis tenuissimis longitudinalibus notata,
raro anastomosantibus, nec longitudinem cellulae aequantibus,
plerumque spatio latitudinem fasciae aequali separatis. Tetra-
sporangiis ovoideis, circa 50 X 35 y, membrana 6 y crassa non in-
clusa, 1 4 ad nodum, cruciatis, modo regulariter, modo decussate;
aut singulis ad nodum, seriem externalem longitudinalem formantibus,
aut pluribus nodum circumdantibus; dimidio sporangii extra corticem
emergente. Plate IV, figs. 27-28.
Minute, creeping on other algae; prostrate filaments of about
200 y diam., cylindrical or slightly constricted at nodes, attached by
unicellular, colorless rhizoids, issuing from the nodes; erect filaments
occasionally arising at nodes; apex of prostrate filament becoming
erect and assuming the character of an erect filament; cells about
3 diam. long below, diminishing towards the apex, to less than one
diam.; penultimate branches 80-100 y diam.; branches repeatedly
forking, cells cylindrical or with nodes more or less constricted;
apices forcipate; cortication consisting of cells elongate in the direc-
tion of the filament, in no definite order, band narrow, edge uneven.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
145
Protoplast subcylindrical in the lower cells, subspherical in the upper,
marked with a pattern of delicate, longitudinal bands, seldom anasto-
mosing or extending the length of the cell, usually separated by spaces
of about their own width. Tetrasporangia ovoid, about 50 X 35 p,
excluding wall about 6 p thick, 1-4 at a node, cruciate, sometimes
regularly, sometimes decussately; when singly at a node they form an
external longitudinal series; when more than one, they are irregularly
placed about the node; about half of the sporangium projecting
beyond the cortication. On Padina variegata, Gibbet Island, Jan.
16, 1913, Hervey, type in Collins herbarium, No. 7418a; also on
Galaxaura, Gravelly Bay, April, on various algae, Hamilton Harbor,
Dec., Collins.
In habit like the following species, C. transversale, but a larger plant,
and distinct by the division and position of the tetraspores, and the
character of the cortication. Only tripartite tetraspores have been
recorded for any of the numerous species of Ceramium, but as other
characters agree, it does not seem desirable to remove it from the
genus.
3. C. transversale sp. nov.; P. B.-A., No. 2049. Minuta, ad
alias algas saxaque repens; filamento prostrato 60-90 p diam., cel-
lulis sesqui-8 diam. longis, cylindricis vel ad nodos leviter contractis,
rhizoidis unicellularibus, incoloratis affixis, ad nodos singulis pluri-
busve ortis; filamentis erectis passim ad nodos evolutis; filamenti
prostrati apice assurgente, in filamentum erectum transformato;
ramulis penultimis circa 60/x diam.; filamentorum erectorum cel-
lulis ad 2 diam. longis, non amplius; prope apicem diametrum
non aequantibus; filamentis erectis repetite dichotomis; cellulis
inferioribus cylindricis, superioribus adparenter brevissime clavatis,
causa corticationis ad apicem; corticatione a parte corticata distinctis-
sima, super seriem cellularum transverse elongatarum series 2 vel
3 cellularum rotundo-angulatarum irregulariter positarum gerente.
Protoplasma uniformiter granulosum vel striis tenuibus, parallelis,
longitudinalibus notatum per to tarn longitudinem cellulae; in
cellulis inferioribus cylindrica, in superioribus subsphaerica. Cysto-
carpio evoluto ad apicem segmenti 2-5-cellularis, cellulis supra in-
crassatis, cellula summa cellulam imam duplo plusve majore, non-
nullos ramos paucicellulares involucrales, cystocarpios 1-2 includentes
gerente; cystocarpiis adparenter terminalibus, atque axi plerumque
ultra cystocarpios et involucrem protenso, ex cellulas paucas constante,
cellula basali 2-3 diam. longa, ceteris, ut cellulis involucri, vix 1 diam.
Tetrasporangiis tripartitis, ad 60 p diam., membrana 8 p crassa non146
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
inclusa; uno, raro duobus ad nodum, eorticatione fere liberis, secun-
dum ramum longitudinaliter seriatis. Plate V, figs. 29-31.
Minute, creeping over other algae or rocks; prostrate filaments
60-90 n diam., cells lf-8 diam. long, cylindrical or slightly con-
stricted at nodes, attached by colorless, unicellular rhizoids issuing
one or more at a node; an erect branch occasionally issuing at a node;
apex of prostrate filament becoming erect and similar to an erect
branch; penultimate branches about 60 g. diam.; cells in erect part
not over 2 diam. long, near the apex less than one diam.; repeatedly
forking; lower cells cylindrical, upper apparently very shortly clavate
by the growth of cortication at the upper end; cortication sharply
marked off from uncorticated portion, the lower portion of each band
showing a series of transversely elongate cells passing around the
central cell; the upper part of 2-3 series of irregularly placed roundish-
angular cells. Protoplast uniformly granular, or with slender, paral-
lel, longitudinal striations the whole length of the cell; the protoplast
cylindrical in the lower cells, subspherical in the upper. Cystocarp
borne at the end of a segment of 2-5 cells, which increase in size up-
ward, the upper cell being twice the diam. of the lower or even more;
on this are borne several wide-spread, few-celled involucral branches
with one or two cystocarps between them, the cystocarps appearing
terminal, but with usually an axis extended beyond them and the
involucre, of few cells, the basal cell 2-3 diam. long, the others, as all
the cells in the involucre, hardly 1 diam. long. Tetrasporangia tri-
partite, up to 60 /i diam. not including the wall 8 fi thick; one, occa-
sionally two at a node, in longitudinal series, nearly free from the
cortication.
On Galaxaura, Spanish Rock, April 10, 1914, Hervey, type in
Collins herbarium, No. 8107. Also occurring on Zonaria variegata,
Harrington Sound, May, on Padina variegata, Agar’s Island, Nov.,
on Thalassia, Fairyland, Dec., Collins; on Ascothamnion, Tucker’s
Town, July, Howe.
The peculiar form of cortication, from which we have taken the
specific name, does not seem to occur in any other species. C. minia-
tum Suhr, resembling it in some respects, has distichous branching, and
small tetrasporangia sessile on both sides of the branches. Specially
characteristic of C. transversale are the serrate outlines near the apices,
due to the sharp limitation of the cortical growth there, and the tetra-
spores unusually large in proportion to the size of the frond. When two
tetrasporangia are formed at a node, they are set side by side, the line
made by the series of single sporangia passing between them. TheTHE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
147
cystocarps appear as if terminal, as the short prolongation of the axis
is liable to be mistaken for an involucral branch. In younger parts
the cells of the basal layer are seldom over 2 diam. long; in older parts
these cells may be up to 8 diam.; the corticating band does not in-
crease in width, but is as narrow and sharply limited in the longest
cells as in the others.
4.	C. nitens (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 130; P. B.-A., No. 1949;
C. rubrurn var. nitens Agardh, 1824, p. 136. Harrington Sound, Jan.,
Dec., Hervey; Inlet, Aug., Agar’s Island, Fairyland, Nov., Dec.,
and dredged down to 18 m., Dec., Collins.
5.	C. clavulatum Agardh in Kunth, 1822, p. 2; P. B.-A., No.
1948; Centroceras clavulatum 'Harvey, 1853, p. 211, PI. XXXIII. C.
Rein; Kemp; Wadsworth, Harrington Sound, No. 18. As this
plant is abundant practically everywhere, we give no detail of stations
of our own collecting. It is very variable, and many species have been
proposed in the past, only to be found unworkable; it may be that
some time a successful segregation will be made, but it can hardly
be done with habit characters, which are very inconstant. Tetra-
spores were found in Nov. & Dec., but no other fructification has been
observed by us. In the Kemp herbarium are specimens marked
respectively C. rubrurn and C. fastigiatum, which belong to this species.
C. cryptacanthum reported by Moseley is a synonym.
Rhodochorton Nageli.
1. Saxicolous; prostrate filaments bearing erect filaments.
1. R. speluncarum.
1. Endozoic; in tubes of bryozoans etc.	2. R. membranaceum.
1. R. speluncarum sp. nov. Filamentis prostratis 30-40 y diam.,
membrana 4-5 y crassa, cellulis 2-3 diam. longis; rhizoideis brevibus
affixis, a parte media cellulae exeuntibus, in discum majorem min-
oremve desinentibus. Filamentis erectis cylindricis vel minime
diminutis apicem versus, e superficie superiore filamenti prostrati
exeuntibus, prope mediam partem cellulae, saepius rhizoideis oppositis,
24-30 y diam., membrana 2-3 y crassa, cellula inferiore 2-2| diam.
longa, cellulis ceteris 3-4 diam. longis, cellula terminali rotundata;
filamentis erectis aut simplicibus aut ramis paucis alternatis vel
secundis prope apicem munitis. Fructificatio ignota.
Prostrate filaments 30-40 y diam., wall 4-5 y thick, cells 2-3 diam.
long, attached by short rhizoidal branches issuing from the middle part148
COLLINS AND HERVET.
of a cell, ending below in a larger or smaller disk. Erect filaments
cylindrical or very slightly tapering, issuing from the upper surface
of the prostrate filament, near the middle of a cell, usually opposite
a rhizoid, 24-30 y diam., walls 2-3 y thick, lower cell 2-2J diam.
long, other cells 3—4 diam. long, terminal cell rounded; erect filaments
sometimes unbranched, sometimes with a few alternate or secund
branches near the apex. Fructification unknown. On rocks between
tides, cave, Agar’s Island, Aug., Nov., Collins.
This plant forms a plush on flat rocks a little above low water mark,
as does R. Rothii (Turton) Nag. in similar stations on the shores of the
North Atlantic, and its manner of branching resembles that of the
latter species but its dimensions are" about double. We have ex-
amined many specimens of R. Rothii, from both coasts of North Amer-
ica as well as from Europe, and find very little variation in size among
them. In R. speluncarum the chromatophores are numerous small
granules, usually densely packed, occasionally looser and showing
something like a network. Type in Collins herbarium, No. 8401,
Nov. 23, 1915.
2. R. membranaceum (Magnus) Hauck, 1885, p. 69; Callitham-
nion membranaceum Magnus, 1874, p. 67, PI. II, figs. 7-15. In bryo-
zoans, Bethel’s Island, Dec., Collins.
Family GRATELOUPIACEAE.
Halymenia Agardh.
1.	Frond many times dichotomous, digitate, cylindrical.
1. Frond plane, simple or proliferous.
2.	Thin, not gelatinous.	1.
2. Thicker, gelatinous.
3. Large echinate cells in subcortex.	2.
3.	Few or no echinate cells in subcortex.	3.
4. H. Agardhii.
2.
H. bermudensis.
3.
H. echinophysa.
H. pseudofloresia.
1. H. bermudensis Collins & Howe, 1916, p. 169; P. B.-A., No.
2050; Plate V, fig. 34, plate VI, fig. 37. In shallow water in clefts of
rocks and among roots of mangroves, often in loose, unattached
masses. Kemp. Aug., as Rhodymenia palmata; Walsingham, Feb.,
Farlow; Oct., Miss Peniston; near Hamilton, June, Tucker’s Town,
July, Howe; Green Bay, March, Wadsworth; Harrington Sound,
Jan., Tucker’s Town, Feb., Dec., Dingle Bay, March, Grasmere,THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
119
March, Old Ferry, April, Hervey; Castle Harbor, April, Tucker’s
Town, May, Collins.
2.	H. echinophtsa Collins & Howe, 1916, p. ISO. Dredged in
31 fathoms off Bermuda by members of the Challenger Expedition,
1S73, and reported, Moseley, 1884, p. 117, as Kallymenia reniformis
J. Ag. Type and only specimen in herbarium of Royal Botanic
Garden, Kew, England.
3.	H. pseudofloresia Collins & Howe, 1916, p. 177; P. B.-A.,
No. 2099; Plate V, fig. 35, plate VI, fig. 36. Faxon; Feb., Farlow;
Green Bay, Feb., Shark’s Hole, March, Wadsworth; Castle Harbor
near Tucker’s Town, April, Collins; Walsingham, Jan., Hervey;
Aug., H. A. Cross. At Castle Harbor in narrow shaded clefts of
rocks, well below low water mark; at Walsingham loose and unat-
tached, the older parts darker and coarser than the young growth.
The three preceding species show some superficial resemblance in
habit, but we consider them distinct. Full details will be found in
Collins & Howe, 1916.	^
4.	H. Agardhii De Toni, 1905, p. 1543; H. decipiens of American
authors, not of J. Ag. Oct., Miss Peniston; W. Faxon; Castle Harbor,
in 2-3 meters water, July, Howe; at low water mark, under over-
hanging rocks, shore near Gibbet Island, Aug., Collins.
Cryptonemia J. G. Agardh.
1. Midrib distinct.	2. C. luxurians.
1. No midrib.	1. C. crenulata.
1.	C. crenulata J. G. Agardh, 1847, p. 11; Kiitzing, 1869, PI.
XXXI; P. B.-A., No. 2100. Kemp; Gravelly Bay, April, Collins,
Dec., Hervey. In somewhat matted masses in the cave at this station,
on a sand-covered rock; a smaller form than that commonly found in
Florida.
2.	C. luxurians (Ag.) J. G. Agardh, 1851, p. 228; Sphaerococcus
Lactuca var. luxurians Agardh, 1S22, p. 232; Euhymenia luxurians
Kiitzing, 1869, PI. XXXII. Kemp, as Botryoglossum platycarpum;
Cooper’s Island, Miss Wilkinson; Buildings Bay, Jan., Hervey.
Apparently not common.150
COLLINS AND HERVET.
Family DUMONTIACEAE.
Dudresnaya Bonnemaison.
1. Peripheral filaments cylindrical or nearly so.	1. D. crassa.
1. Peripheral filaments distinctly moniliform.	2.
2. Auxiliary cell terminating the auxiliary branch.	3. D. caribaea.
2. Auxiliary cell in middle of auxiliary branch.	2. D. bermudensis.
1.	D. crassa Howe, 1905, p. 572, PI. XXVIII, XXIX, figs. 12-26;
P. B.-A., Nos. 1900, 2196. Castle Harbor, Spanish Point, July,
Howe; Castle Harbor, A. E. Wight in Farlow herb.; Salt Kettle,
Feb., Buildings Bay, March, Spanish Point, March, Hervey; Shelly
Bay, April, Collins. The plants from Buildings Bay, Spanish Point
and Shelly Bay were washed ashore; at Salt Kettle, Paget, it grew just
below low water mark; at the type station in Castle Harbor it grew
at 3 m. depth at low water. It varies much in habit, from the form
with short, stout branches, figured by Howe, to forms with slender,
acute branches; from generally rounded outline to loosely pyramidal;
from forms so dense that when spread out on paper they cover it
continuously, without interstices between the branches, to quite
open specimens, all branches distinct. The largest plant noted was
about 25 cm. high and 15 cm. broad. Howe had only cystocarpic
plants when describing the species, but we have found antheridia
equally abundant, always on separate individuals. The antheridia
are formed near the ends of the peripheral filaments, which here bear
short, erect lateral branches, usually covered with minute densely
branched ramuli of a few cells each, the terminal cell becoming the
antheridium. According to the length of the axis and the amount of
branching in the ramulus, the antheridia may be cylindrical, conical
or ovoid. Sometimes the antheridia are so abundant on the peri-
pheral filaments as to form a dense continuous mass, through which it
is difficult to see the filaments, except the tips, which project beyond the
antheridia. Both antheridial and cystocarpic plants were distributed
as P. B.-A., No. 1900. Some forms are habitually not unlike D. caribaea
and D. bermudensis, but are easily distinguished microscopically by
the character of the peripheral filaments. It is often overgrown with
Acrochaetium corymbiferum, and when both have abundant antheridia,
it may be perplexing to one unfamiliar with the species.
2.	D. bermudensis Setchell, 1912, p. 244, PL XXVII, fig. 8;
P. B.-A., No. 2195. Cooper’s Island, Feb., Farlow, washed ashore
in abundance; St. George’s, washed ashore, March, Hervey.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
151
3. D. caribaea (J. Ag.) Setchell, 1912, p. 241, PI. XXVI; Calo-
siphonia caribaea J. G. Agardh, 1899, p. 84. Cooper’s Island, Feb.,
Farlow; washed ashore in abundance. This species and the pre-
ceding are very much alike in habit, and can be distinguished with
certainty only by microscopic examination of plants in fruit.
These three species of Dudresnaya illustrate the possibilities of algae
collecting. D. bermudensis is known only from Bermuda, from the
material collected by Farlow on a single day in 1881 at Cooper’s
Island, and from a single collecting at St. George’s in 1916 by Hervey;
the Bermudian material of D. caribaea was all collected on the same
day in 1881, and only one other station, Tortugas, Florida, is known;
Calosiphonia verticillifera was collected at the same day and place,
and is known elsewhere from the Tortugas station only. Material
of all three species was abundant that day, but there is no record of
any one of the species since, except the single collecting of D. bermuden-
sis, though we have both been on the watch for them for the past five
years, and have made visits to Cooper’s Island at the same time of
year as Farlow’s collecting and at other times, to search for them.
On the other hand we have found D. crassa, not known until 1905, in
abundance at distant stations.
Family NEMASTOMACEAE.
Calosiphonia Crouan.
C. verticillifera (J. Ag.) Setchell, 1912, p. 247, PI. XXVIII;
Helminthiopsis verticillifera J. G. Agardh, 1899, p. 9S. Cooper’s
Island, Feb., Farlow. As noted under Dudresnaya, this is one of the
three species of handsome red fleshy algae, found in abundance on the
same day in 1881, at Cooper’s Island, and not observed since. In
habit it is not unlikeJDudresnaya, but is distinguished on microscopic
examination by the shorter and stouter peripheral branches, forming
a definite cortical layer.
Platoma Schmitz.
P. cyclocolpa (Mont.) Schmitz, 1889, p. 453; Halymenia cyclo-
colpa Montagne, 1840, p. 163; 1846, p. 116, PI. XI, fig. b; Nema-
stoma cervicornis J. G. Agardh, 1879, PI. IV, figs. 1-4. Cooper’s1.52
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Island, Feb., Farlow, washed ashore; Castle Harbor, Gravelly Bay,
April, Collins; Gravelly Bay, Dec., Hervey. Two large plants were
collected in a narrow “chasm” in the rocky shore between Tucker’s
Town and Walsingham House, growing in company with Halymenia
bermudensis, but while the latter grew plentifully at low water mark,
the Platoma began about 5 dm. below, and seemed to extend down.
Farlow’s plants and ours from the cave at Gravelly Bay are smaller
and of firmer substance; the Castle Harbor plants larger and looser,
probably on account of being more developed.
Genus incertae sedis.
Porphtridium Nageli.
P. cruentoi (Eng. Bot.) Xageli, 1849, pp. 71 & 139, PI. IV. H;
Tretnella cruenta Eng., Bot., 1807, PI. 1800. Roadside, Jan., Farlow.
Forms a bright red film on the ground; is widely distributed and in
northern countries is common in hothouses. It has been placed by
different authors among green, blue-green and red algae respectively,
but the latest investigations incline to the last. See Brand, 1908,
p. 413.
SUMMARY.
Class.	Genera.	Species, marine.	Species, fresh water.
Myxophyceae	43	48	40
Chlorophyceae	56	95	28
Phaeophyceae	24	56	
Rhodophyceae	62	143	
Total	185	342	68
Total species
410THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
153
List of Works to which Reference is Made.
Agardh, C. A.
1820. Species Algarum rite cognitae, Vol. I, pars prior.20 Lund.
1822. Species Algarum rite cognitae, Vol. I, pars posterior.
Lund.
1824. Systema Algarum. Lund.
1827.	Aufzahlung einiger in oestreischen Landern gefundenen
neuen Gattungen und Arten von Algen. Flora, Vol. X,
p. 625.
1828.	Species Algarum rite cognitae, Vol. II. Greifswald.
1828-1835. leones Algarum Europearum. Leipzig.
Agardh, J. G.
1841.	In historiam algarum Symbolae. Linnaea, Vol. XV, p. 1.
1842.	Algae maris Mediterranei et Adriatici. Paris.
1847.	Nya alger fran Mexico. Ofv. Kongl. Vet-Akad. Forh.
Stockholm, Vol. IV, p. 1.
1848.	Species Algarum, Vol. I.
1851.	Species Algarum, Vol. II.
1852.	Species Algarum, Vol. II, pars III. 1.
1854. Nya algformer. Ofv. Kongl. Vet-Akad. Forh. Stock-
holm, Vol. XI, p. 107.
1863. Species Algarum, Vol. II, pars III. 2.
1871.	Bidrag till Florideernes Systematik. Lunds Univ. Ars-
skrift, Vol. VIII.
1872.	Till algernes systematik, p. 1. Lunds. Univ. Arsskrift,
Vol. IX.
1876. Species Algarum, Vol. III.
1879.	Florideernes Morfologi. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl.
Stockholm. Vol. XV, No. 6.
1880.	Till algernes systematik, p. 2. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift,
Vol. XVII.
1882. Till algernes systematik, p. 3. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift,
Vol. XIX.
1886. Till algernes systematik, p. 5. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift,
Vol. XXIII.
20 Though really only one edition was published of the Species Algarum of
C. A. Agardh, copies are found with title pages of varying dates. As to actual
dates of publication, see O. Nordstedt, The date of C. Agardh’s Species
Algarum, Bot. Notiser, 1914, p. 144.154
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
1889. Species Sargassorum Australiae. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. Handl. Stockholm, Vol. XXIII, No. 3.
1892. Analecta Algologica. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift, Vol.
XXVIII.
1894. Analecta Algologica, Cont. I. Lunds Univ. Arsskrift,
Vol. XXIX.
1896. Analecta Algologica, Cont. III. Act. Reg. Soc. Phys.
Lund, Vol. VII.
1898.	Species Algarum, Vol. Ill, pars 3.
1899.	Analecta Algologica, Cont. V. Act. Reg. Soc. Phys.
Lund, Vol. X.
Ardissone, F.
1883. Phycologia Mediterranea, p. 1. Varese.
Ardissone, F. and Strafiorello, I.
1877. Enumerazione delle alghe di Liguria. Milano.
Askenasy, E.
1888. Forschungsreise S. M. S. Gazelle, IV Theil, Botanik.
Berlin.
Barton, E. S.
1891. A systematic and structural account of the genus Turbi-
naria. Trans. Linn. Soc. Ser. 2, Bot., Vol. Ill, p. 215.
1901. Siboga Expeditie, Monogr. LX. The genus Halimeda.
Leiden.
Bonnemaison, T.
1828. Essai sur les hydrophytes locellees ou articulees de la
famille des Epidermees et les Ceramiees. Mem. Mus.
Hist. Nat., Vol. XVI, p. 49. Paris.
Borgesen, F.
1905. Contributions a la connaissance du genre Siphonocladus
Schmitz. Ofv. Kgl. Dansk. Akad. Vidensk. Selsk. Forh.,
p. 259.
1907. An ecological and systematic account of the Caulerpas of
the Danish West Indies. Kgl. Dansk. Vidensk. Selsk.
Skrifter, Ser. 7, Vol. IV, p. 339.
1909.	Some new or little known West Indian Florideae. Bot.
Tidsskrift, Vol. XXX, p. 1.
1910.	Some new or little known West Indian Florideae. II.
Bot. Tidsskrift, Vol. XXX, p. 177.
1911.	Some Chlorophyceae from the Danish West Indies.
Bot. Tidsskrift, Vol. XXXI, p. 127.
1912.	Some Chlorophyceae from the Danish West Indies. II.
Bot. Tidsskrift, Vol. XXXII, p. 241.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
155
1913.	The marine algae of the Danish West Indies, Vol. I, part 1.
Chlorophyceae. Dansk. Bot. Arkiv, Vol. II, p. 1.
1914.	The marine algae of the Danish WTest Indies, Vol. I,
part 2. Phaeophyceae. Dansk. Bot. Arkiv, Vol. II,
p. 157.
1914a. The species of Sargassum. Mindeskrift for Japetus
Steenstrup, XXXII. Kobehavn.
1915.	The marine algae of the Danish West Indies, Vol. II,
part 1, Florideae. Dansk. Bot. Arkiv, Vol. II, p. 1.
1916.	The marine algae of the Danish West Indies, Vol. II,
part 2. Florideae. Dansk. Bot. Arkiv, Vol. II, p. 81.
Bornet, E.
1889. Les Nostocacees Heterocystees du System Algarum.
Bull. Soc. Bot. de France, Vol. XXXVI, p. 144.
1891.	Note sur quelques Ectocarpus. Bull. Soc. Bot. de
France, Vol. XXXVIII, p. 353.
1892.	Les algues de P.-K.-A. Schousboe. Mem. Soc. Nat.
Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, Vol.-XXVIII, p. 165.
1904. Deux Chantransia corymbifera Thuret. Bull. Soc. Bot.
de France, Vol. LI, session extraordinaire.
Bornet, E. and Flahault C.
1886.	Revision des Nostocacees heterocystees. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 7, Bot., Vol. Ill, p. 323.
1886a. Revision des Nostocacees heterocystees. Ann. Sci.
Nat. Ser. 7, Bot., Vol. IV, p. 343.
1887.	Revision des Nostocacees heterocystees. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 7, Bot., Vol. V, p. 51.
1888.	Revision des Nostocacees heterocystees. Ann. Sci.
Nat. Ser. 7, Bot., Vol. VII, p. 177.
1888a. Note sur deux nouveaux genres d’algues perforantes.
Jour, de Bot., Vol. II., p. 161.
1889.	Sur quelques plantes vivant dans le test calcaire des
mollusques. Bull. Soc. Bot. de France, Vol. XXVI,
p. CXLVII.
Bornet, E. and Thuret, G.
1876. Notes Algologiques. Fasc. I. Paris.
1880. Notes Algologiques. Fasc. II. Paris.
Bory J. B. de St. Vincent.
1825. Article “ Hydroclathrus ”, Diet. Class. Sci. Nat., Vol.
VIII, p. 319.'
1832. Expedition scientifique de Moree. Paris.156
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Bouvier,
1907.	Quelques impressions d’un naturaliste au cours d’une
campagne scientifique de S. A. S. le prince de Monaco.
Bull. Inst. Oceanographique, No. 93.
Brand, F.
1908.	Tiber das Chromatopbor und die systematische Stellung
der Blutalge (Porphyridium cruentum). Ber. Deutsch.
Bot. Ges., Vol. XXVI, p. 413.
Braun, A.
1851. Betrachtungen liber die Erscheinung der Verjiingung in
der Natur. Leipzig.
1882. Fragmente einer Monograpbie der Cbaraceen. Abb.
Kgl. Akad. V iss. Berlin.
Burman, N. L.
1768. Prodromus florae capensis. Leyden.
Castagne, L.
1851. Supplement au catalogue des plantes qui croissent
naturellement aux environs de Marseille. Aix.
Chauvin, J. F.
1842. Recherches sur l’organisation etc. de plusieurs genres
d’algues. Caen.
Cienkowski, L.
1876. Zur Morpbologie der Ulotricheen. Bull. Acad.,Sci. St.
Petersbourg, Vol. XXI, p. 531.
Clementi, S. R. 1804. Essai sur les varietes de la Vigne qui
vegetent en Andalusie, traduit de l’Espagnol par Caumont.
Paris.
Collins, F. S.
1900.	Preliminary list of N. E. plants. V. Marine Algae. ’
Rbodora, Vol. II, p. 41.
1901.	Tbe Algae of Jamaica. Proc. Amer. Acad., Vol. XXXVII,
p. 231.
1903. Tbe Ulvaceae of North America. Rbodora, Vol. V, p. 1.
1906. New species, etc. issued in tbe Pbycotheca Boreali-Ameri-
cana. Rbodora, Vol. VIII, p. 104.
1909.	Tbe Green Algae of North America. Tufts College
Studies, Vol. II, p. 79.
1909a. New species of Cladopbora. Rbodora, Vol. XI, p. 17.
1911.	Notes on Algae. X. Rbodora, Vol. XIII, p. 197.
1912.	Tbe Green Algae of North America, supplementary paper.
Tufts College Studies, Vol. II, p. 67.
1917. Tbe Sargasso Sea. Rbodora, Vol. XIX, p. 77.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
157
Collins, F. S. and Howe, M. A.
1916. Notes on species of Halymenia. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club,
Vol. XLIII, p. 169.
Cotton, A. D.
1907. New and little known marine algae from the east. Kew
Bulletin, No. 7.
Crouan, P. L. and H. M.
1859. Notes sur quelques esp&ces et genres nouveaux d’algues
marines de la rade de Brest. Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 4, Bot.,
Vol. XII, p. 288.
Davis, B. M.
1894.	Notes on the life history of a blue green motile cell. Bot.
Gazette, Vol. XIX, p. 96.
Decaisne, J.
1839. Plantes de l’Arabie Hereuse. Archives du Museum
Nat. Hist., Vol. II, p. 88. Paris.
1842. Essai sur une classification des algues et des polypiers
calciferes. Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 2, Bot., Vol. XVI, p.
297.
DeCandolle, A. P.
1805. Flore Fran9aise, Ed. 3. Vol. II. Paris.
De Toni, G. B.
1889. Sylloge Algarum omnium hucusque cognitarum. Vol. I.
Patavii.
1895.	Sylloge Algarum omnium hucusque cognitarum. Vol.
III.	Patavii.
1897. Sylloge Algarum omnium hucusque cognitarum. Vol.
IV.	Sect. I. Patavii.
1903. Sylloge Algarutn omnium hucusque cognitarum. Vol.
IV, Sect. III. Patavii
1905. Sylloge Algarum omnium hucusque cognitarum. Vol.
IV, Sect. IV. Patavii.
Delile, A. R.
1813. Flore d’Egypte. Paris.
Derbls, A. and Solier, A. J. J.
1850. Sur les organes reproducteurs des algues. Ann. Sci.
Nat. Ser. 3, Bot., Vol. XIV, p. 261.
1856. Memoire sur quelques points de la physiologie des algues.
Comptes Rendus, Acad. Sci., Suppl. Paris.
Desfontaines, R.
1798. Flora Atlantica. Vol. II.158
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Dickie, G.
1874. On the marine algae of Mauritius. Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot.,
Vol. XIV, p. 198.
1874a. On the marine algae of St. Thomas and the Bermudas.
Jour. Linn. Soc. Bot., Vol. XIV, p. 311.
Dillwyn, L. W.
1809. British Confervae. London.
Duby, J.
1830. Botanieon gallicum. Pars secunda.
Ehrenberg, C. G.
1838. Die Infusionsthierchen als volkommene Organismen.
Leipzig.
Ellis, J. and Solander, D.
1786. The natural history of many curious and uncommon
zoophytes. . . .London.
Engler, A. and Prantl, K.
1897. Die naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien. 1 Teil. 2 Abt. Leip-
zig.
English Botany.
1807. Vol. XXVI.
1811. Vol. XXXIII.
Falkenberg, P.
1901. Die Rhodomelaceen. Fauna & Flora des Golfes von
Neapel. 26 Monogr.
Farlow, W. G.
1881. The marine algae of New England and adjacent coast.
Report of U. S. Fish Commission for 1879.
Flora Danica.
1782. Vol. V.
Forskal, P.
1775, Flora aegyptiaco-arabica. Hafniae.
Forti, A.
1907. Sylloge Myxophycearum in De Toni, Syll. Alg., Vol. V.
Patavii.
Gaillon, B.
1828. Article “ Thallassiophytes,” Diet, des Sci. Nat., Vol.
LIII, p. 350.
Gepp, A. and E. S.
1905. Notes on Penicillus & Rhipocephalus. Jour, of Bot.,
Vol. XLIII, p. 1.
1911. Siboga Expeditie. Monogr. LXII. Die Codiaceae.
Leiden.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
159
Gmelin, S. G.
1768. Historia fucorum. Petropoli.
Gomont, M.
1893. Monographie des Oscillariees (Nostocacees homocystees)
Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 7, Bot., Vols. XV, XVI.
1895. Note sur le “ Scytonema ambiguum ” Kiitzing. Jour,
de Bot., Vol. IX, p. 48.
1901. Myxophyeeae hormogoneae in Flora of Koh Chang.
Bot. Tidsskrift, Vol. XXIV, p. 119.
Grateloup, J. P. A. G.
1807. Hist. Soc. Med. de Montpellier.
Greville, R. K.
1830. Algae Britannicae. Edinburgh.
Grunow, A.
1861. Specimen florae cryptogamae septem insularum. IV.
Algae. Verh. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien, Vol. XI, p. 416. j
1867. Reise seiner Majestat Fregatte Novara um die Erde.
Algen. Wien.
1874. Algen der Fidschi-, Tonga- und Samoa-Inseln. Jour.
Mus. Godeffroy, Heft VI.
1915. Additamenta ad cognitionem Sargassi. Verh. k. k.
Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien, Vol. LXV.
Hansgirg, A.
1886. Prodromus der Algenflora von Bohmen. Archiv. Naturw.
Landes. Bohmen, Vol. V, p. 1.
1889. Beitrage zur Kentniss der quarnarischen und dalma-
tischen Meeresalgen. Oest. Bot. Zeit., Vol. XXXIX,
p. 4.
1892. Neue Beitrage zur Kentniss der Meeresalgen und Bac-
terien-Flora der osterreichiseh-ungarischen Kiistenlander.
Sitzungsb. der Kgl. bohm. Ges. der Wissenschaften.
Hariot, P.
1891. Liste des algues marines rapportees de Yokoska (Japon)
par M. le Dr. Savatier. Mem. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg,
Vol. XXVII, p. 211.
Harvey, W. H.
1846-1851. Phycologia Britannica. London.
1852. Nereis Boreali-Americana. part 1. Smiths. Contrib.
Knowl., Vol. III.
1853. Nereis Boreali-Americana. part 2. Smiths. Contrib.
Knowl., Vol. V.
1855. Some account of the marine botany of the colony of160
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Western Australia. Trans. Roy. Irish Acad., Vol. XXII,
p. 525.
1858. Nereis Boreali-Americana. Part 3. Smiths. Contrib.
Knowl., Vol. X.
Hassall, A. H.
1845. A history of British freshwater algae. London.
Hauck, F.
1876. Verzeichniss der in Golfe von Triest gesammelten Meeres-
algen. Oest. Bot. Zeit., Vol. XXVI, p. 54.
1879. Beitrage zur Kentniss der adriatischen algen. Oest.
Bot. Zeit., Vol. XXIX, p. 242.
1885. Die Meeresalgen Deutschlands und Oesterreichs. Leipzig.
1887.	Uber einige von J. M. Hildebrandt in Rothen Meere und
Indische Ocean gesammelten Algen. Hedwigia, Vol.
XXVIII, p. 42.
1888.	Meeresalgen von Puerto Rico. Engler’s Bot. Jahrb.,
Vol. IX, p. 457.
Hazen, T. E.
1902. The Ulothrichaceae and Chaetophoraceae of the United
States. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol. XI, p. 135.
Heydrich, F.
1892. Beitrage zur Kentniss der Algenflora von Kaiser Wil-
helm-Land (Deutsch Neu-Guinea). Ber. Deutsch. Bot.
Ges., Vol. X, p. 458.
Hirn, K.
1900. Monographie und Iconographie der Oedogoniaceen.
Acta Soc. Sci. Fennicae, Vol. XXVII.
Hooker, J. D. and Harvey, W. H.
1845-1847. Flora Antarctica. London.
1853-1855. Flora Novae Zelandiae. London.
1855-1860. Flora Tasmaniae. London.
Hooker, W. J.
1833. British Flora, Vol. II, part 1. London.
Howe, M. A.
1904.	Notes on Bahaman Algae. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club,
Vol. XXXI, p. 93.
1905.	Phycological Studies, I. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol.
XXXII, p. 241.
1905a. Phycological Studies, II. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol.
XXXII, p. 563.
1907. Phycological Studies, III. Bull. Torrev Bot. Club,
Vol. XXXIV, p. 491.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
161
1909. Phycological Studies, IV. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol.
XXXVI, p. 75.
1911.	Phycological Studies, V. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol.
XXXVIII, p. 459.
1912.	The building of “Coral” reefs. Science, Vol. XXXV,
p. 837.
1917. A note on the structural dimorphism of sexual and tetra-
sporic plants of Galaxaura obtusata. Bull. Torrey Bot.
Club, Vol. XIII, p. 621.
Hudson, W.
1762. Flora Anglica. London.
1798. Flora Anglica, 3d ed. London.
Jacquin, N. J.
1786. Collectanea ad botanicam, chemiam et historiam natu-
ralem spectantia. Vol. I. Vienna.
1789. Collectanea ad botanicam, chemiam et historiam natu-
ralem spectantia. Vol. III. Vienna.
Kemp, A. F.
1857. Notes on the Bermudas and their natural history. Can-
adian Naturalist, Vol. II, p. 145.
Kjellman, F. R.
1883. The algae of the Arctic Sea. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handl. Stockholm, Vol. XX, No. 5.
1900. Om Florideslagtet Galaxaura. Kgl. Svenska Vet-.Akad.
Handl. Stockholm, Vol. XXXIII, No. 1.
Klercker, J. af.
1896. Uber zwei Wasserformen von Stichococcus. Flora,
Vol. LXXXII, p. 90.
Kuckuck, P.
1891. Beitrage zur Kentniss einiger Ectocarpus-Arten der
Kieler Fohrde. Bot. Centralblatt, Vol. XLVIII.
1899. Beitrage zur Kentniss der Meeresalgen. Wiss. Meer-
esuntersuchungen, Neue Folge, Vol. III.
1905. Ueber Schwarmsporenbildung bei den Tilopterideen.
Prings. Jahrb., Vol. XXVIII, p. 290.
1907. Abhandlungen uber Meeresalgen. I. Bot. Zeit., Vol.
LXV, p. 139.
Kutzing, F. T.
1843. Phycologia generalis. Leipzig.
1845. Phycologia germanica. Nordhausen.
1845-1849. Tabulae Phycologicae. Vol. I. Nordhausen.162
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
1847. Diagnosen und Bemerkungen ■ zu neuen oder kritischen
Algen. Bot. Zeit., Vol. V, p. 166.
1849. Species Algarum. Leipzig.
1850-1852. Tabulae Phycologicae. Vol. II.
1853.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. III.
1854.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. IV.
1855.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. V.
1856.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. VI.
1857.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. VII.
1858.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. VIII.
1859.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. IX.
1862.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. XII.
1864.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. XIV.
1865.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. XV.
1868.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. XVIII.
1869.	Tabulae Phycologicae.	Vol. XIX.
Kunth, C.	S.	
1822. Synopsis plantarum quas in itinere ad plagam aequi-
noctialem orbis novi collegerunt Al. d. Humboldt et Aug.
Bonpland. Vol. I. Paris.
Kunze, O.
1891. Revisio generum plantarum. Pars. II.
Kylin, H.
1907. Studien iiber die Algenflora der schwedischer West-
kiiste. Upsala.
Lagerheim, G. von.
1883. Bidrag till Sveriges Algflora. Ofv. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. Forh. Stockholm, Vol. XL, No. 2.
1885. Codiolum polyrhizum, n. sp. Ofv. Kgl. Svenska Vet.-
Akad. Forh. Stockholm, Vol. XLII, No. 8.
1887. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte einiger Confervaceen. Ber.
Deutsch. Bot. Ges., Vol. V, p. 409.
Lamarck, J. P. B. de.
1813. Sur les polypiers empates. Ann. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol.
XX, p. 294.
Lamouroux, J. V.
1805. Dissertation sur plusieurs espfeces de Fucus. Caen.
1809. Observations sur la physiologie des algues marines.
Nouveau Bull, des Sciences par la Soc. philomathique
de Paris. Vol. I, p. 331.
1809a. Exposition des caracteres du genre Dictyota. Jour,
de Bot., Vol. II, p. 38.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
163
1809b. Memoire sur trois nouveaux genres de la famille des
algues marines. Jour, de Bot., Vol. II, p. 129.
1809c. Memoire sur les Caulerpes, nouveau genre de la famille
des algues marines. Jour, de Bot., Vol. II, p. 136.
1812.	Sur la classification des polypes corallines. Bull. Soc.
philomathique, Vol. Ill, p. 186.
1813.	Essai sur les genres de la famille des thalassiophytes
non articulees. Mem. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. XX, p. 21.
1816.	Histoire des polypiers coralligenes flexibles, vulgairement
nommes zoophytes. Caen.
1821. Exposition methodique des genres de 1’ordre des poly-
piers. Paris.
1825.	Article “ Gelidium,” Diet. Class. Hist. Nat., Vol. VII.
Le Jolis, A.
1863. Liste des algues marines de Cherbourg. Cherbourg.
Linnaeus, C.
1753. Species plantarum. Vol. II. Stockholm.
1763. Species plantarum. Ed. 2. Vol. II. Holmiae.
1767. Systema naturae. Ed. 12. Vol. II. Holmiae.
1771. Mantissa plantarum. Holmiae.
Lyngbye, H. C.
1819. Tentamen hydrophytologiae Danicae. Copenhagen.
Mackay, J. F.
1836.	Flora hibernica. Dublin.
Magnus, P.
1874. Die botanischer Ergebnisse der Nordseefahrt. II Jahres-
bericht Kommis. Unters. deutscher Meeres, p. 61.
Martens, G. von.
1866. Die Preussische Expedition nach Ost-Asien. Botan-
ischer Theil. Die Tange. Berlin.
Martius, C. F. P. von.
1817.	Flora cryptogamica Erlangensis. Niirnberg.
1826.	Flora brasiliensis. Vol. I, pars prior.
1827.	leones selectae plantarum cryptogamicarum. pars 1.
Monachiae.
Maze, H. and Schramm, A.
1870-1877. Essai de classification des algues de la Guadeloupe.
Ed. II. Basse Terre.
Meneghini, G.
1837.	Conspectus algologiae Euganeae. Padua.
1840. Lettera a Dr. Corinaldi. Pisa.164
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
1842. Monographia nostochinearum Italicarum. Atti. R. Accad.
Sci. Torino, Ser. 2, Vol. V., p. 1.
Meyen, J.
1838. Jahresbericht liber die Resultate der physiologisehen
Botanik v. d. Jahre 1837. Wiegmann, Archiv fur
Naturgeschichte, Vierter Jahrgang, Zweiter Band. Berlin.
Mobius, M.
1889. Bearbeitung von der von H. Schenck in Brasilien gesam-
melte Algen. Hedwigia, Yol. XXVIII, p. 309.
Mohr, D. M. H.
1810. Bemerkungen liber die Rothischen Rivularien. Weber,
Beitrage zur Naturkunde, Vol. II, p. 343.
Montagne, J. F. C.
1837.	Centurie de plantes cellulaires exotiques nouvelles. Ann.
Sci. Nat. Ser. 2, Bot., Vol. VIII, p. 345.
1838.	Cryptogamia; plantas cellulares in La Sagra, Historia
di Cuba. Paris.
1840. Phytographia canariensis, in P. Barker-Webb & S.
Bertbelot, Histoire Naturelle des Canaries. Paris.
1840a. Seconde centurie de plantes cellulaires. Dec. I & II.
Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 2, Bot., Vol. XIII, p. 193.
1842. Prodromus generum specierumque phycearum novarum.
Paris.
1846. Algues, in Exploration scientifique de l’Algerie. Paris.
1850. Cryptogamia Guyanensis. Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser. 3, Bot.,
Vol. XIV, p. 283.
1856.	Sylloge generum specierumque cryptogamarum. Paris.
1857.	Centurie VIII de plantes cellulaires. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 4, Bot., Vol. VIII, p. 283.
1859.	Centurie VIII de plantes cellulaires. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 4, Bot., Vol. XI, p. 167.
1860.	Centurie IX de plantes cellulaires. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 4, Bot., Vol. XIV, p. 167.
Moore, G. F.
1900. New or little known unicellular algae. I. Bot. Gazette,
Vol. XXX, p. 100.
Moseley, H. N.
1884. Report on the Voyage of the Challenger, Bot., Vol. I.
Murray, G.
1889. Catalogue of the marine algae of the West Indian region.
London.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
165
Murray, G. and Boodle, L. A.
1888.	A structural and systematic account of the genus Struvea.
Ann. of Bot., Vol. II, p. 265.
1889.	A systematic and structural account of the genus Avrain-
villea. Jour, of Bot., Yol. XXVII, p. 67.
Nageli, C.
1846.	Polysiphonia und Herposiphonia. Schleiden & Nageli,
Zeitsehrift fur Microscopie, Heft 3.
1847.	Die neueren Algensysteme. Neue Denkschr. Allg.
Schweiz. Ges., Yol. IX. Zurich.
1849. Gattungen einzelliger Algen. Neue Denkschr. Allg.
Schweiz. Ges., Vol. X. Zurich.
Nordstedt, O.
1873. Bidrag till kannedomen om sydligare Norges Desmideer.
Lunds. Univ. Arsskrift, Vol. IX.
1878. Algologiske sm&saker, I. Bot. Notiser, p. 176.
Okamura, K.
1901. Illustrations of the marine algae of Japan, No. 5.
Tokyo.
Olivi, G.
1791. DeH’Ulva atropurpurea, specie nuova e tintoria delle
lagune Venete. Nuovi Saggi dell’Accad. di Padova,
III, 1, p. 144.
Petersen, H. E.
1908. Danske Arter af Slagten Ceramium. Kgl. Dansk. Vid.
Selsk. Skr., Ser. 7, Vol. V, p. 41.
Piccone, A.
1884. Contribuzione all’algologia eritrea. Nuovo Giornale Bot.
I tab, Vol. XVI, p. 2S1.
1884a. Crociera del Corsaro alle isole Madera e Canarie. Genova.
Pirsson, L. V.
1914. Geology of Bermuda Island. Am. Jour. Sci., Ser. 4,
Vol. XXXVIII, p. 189.
Rabenhorst, L.
1865. Flora europaea algarum aquae dulcis et submarinae.
Vol. II. Leipzig.
Ralfs, J.
1848.	The British Desmidieae. London.
Rein, J. J.
1873. Uber die Vegetations-Verhaltnisse der Bermudas-Inseln.
Ber. Senckenb. naturf. Ges., p. 131.166
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Reinbold, T.
1893. Revision von Jurgens Algae Aquaticae. I. Nuova
Notarisia, Ser. 4, p. 192.
Reinhard, L.
1885. Contributiones ad morphologiam et systematicam alga-
rum maris nigri. Odessa.
Reinke, J.
1878.	Entwicklungsgeschichtliche Untersuchungen liber die
Dictyotaceen des Golfes von Neapel. Nova Acta Acad.
Leop.-Carol., Vol. XL, p. 1.
1879.	Zwei parasitische Algen. Bot. Zeit., Vol. XXXVII, p.
473.
1889. Algenflora der westlicher Ostsee. Ber. Kommission Unter-
suchung deutseh. Meere. Kiel.
1889a. Atlas deutscher Meeresalgen, part I. Berlin.
Reinsch, P. F.
1867. Die Algenflora des mittleren Theiles von Franken. Niirn-
berg.
1875. Contributiones ad algologiam et fungologiam. Vol. I.
Leipzig.
Richards, H. M.
1901. Ceramothamnion Codii.— A new rhodophyceous alga.
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club., Vol. XXVIII, p. 257.
Rosenvinge, L. Kolderup-
1898. Deuxieme memoire sur les algues marines de Groenland.
Meddelelser om Gronland, Vol. XX.
1909. The marine algae of Denmark. Kgl. Dansk. Vidensk.
Selsk. Skrifter, Ser. 7, Vol. VII, No. 1.
Roth, A. W.
1797.	Catalecta Botanica, Vol. I. Leipzig.
1798.	Nova plantarum species. Roemer, Archiv. fiir die
Botanik., Vol. I, Drittes Stuck. Leipzig.
1806. Catalecta Botanica, Vol. III. Leipzig.
Ruprecht, F. J.
1856. Tange des Ochotskischen Meeres. Middendorf’s Reise
in Sibirien, Vol. I, part 2, p. 193.
Sauvageau, C.
1892. Sur quelques algues phaeosporees parasites. Jour, de
Bot., Vol. VI, p. 90.
1892a. Sur les algues d’eau douce recoltees en Algerie. Bull.
Soc. Bot. de France, Vol. XXXIX, p. CIV.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
167
1896.	Sur 1 “Ectocarpus virescens” Thuret. Jour, de Bot., Vol.
X, p. 98.
1896a. Note sur l’Ectocarpus (Pylaiella) fulvescens Thuret.
Jour, de Bot., Vol. X, p. 48.
1897.	Note preliminaire sur les algues marines du golfe de Gas-
cogne. Jour, de Bot., Vol. XI, p. 166.
1901. Remarques sur les Sphacelariacees, part 1.
1905. Observations sur quelques Dictyotacees. Bull, de la
Station biologique d’Arcachon, 8e annee.
1907.	Le Sargassum bacciferum. Comptes Rendus des seances
de la Societe de Biologie. Vol. LXII, p. 108.
1908.	Sur les Myxophycees roses. Comptes Rendus des seances
de la Societe de Biologie. Seance de la Reunion biolo-
gique de Bordeaux, p. 9.
Schiller, J.
1913.	Uber Bau, Entwicklung, Keimung und Bedeutung der
Parasporen der Ceramiaceen. Oest. Bot. Zeit., Vol.
LXIII, p. 144.
Schmitz, F.
1889. Systematische Uebersicht der Florideen. Flora, Vol.
LXXII, p. 435.
1893. Die Gattung Lophothalia. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges.,
Vol. XI, p. 212.
1896. Kleine Beitrage. VI. Nuova Notarisia, Ser. VII, p. 1.
Setchell, W. A.
1912. Algae novae et minus cognitae. I. Univ. Calif. Publ.,
Bot., Vol. IV, p. 230.
1914.	The Scinaia assemblage. Univ. Calif. Publ., Bot., Vol.
VI, p. 79.
Snow, J. W.
1903. The plankton algae of Lake Erie. Bull. U. S. Fish Com.,
1902, p. 369.
Solier, A. J. J.
1847. Memoire sur deux algues zoosporees devant former un
genre distinct, le genre Derbesia. Ann. Sci. Nat. Ser.
3, Bot., Vol. VII, p. 158.
Solms-Laubach, H., Graf zu.
1895. Monograph of Acetabularia, etc. Trans. Linn. Soc.
Bot., Ser. 2, Vol. V, p. 1.
Sonder, G.
1845. Nova algarum genera et species, quas in itinere ad ora168
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
occidentales Novae Hollandiae coUegit L. Preiss, Ph. Dr.
Bot. Zeit., Vol. Ill, p. 49.
1871. Die algen des tropischen Australiens. Hamburg.
Stackhouse, J.
1795. Nereis Britannica. Bath.
1809. Tentamen marino-cryptogamicum. Mem. Soc. Nat.
Moscou, Vol. II, p. 50.
Stockmayer, S.
1890. Ueber die Algengattung Rhizoclonium. Verh. k. k. Zool.-
Bot. Ges. Wien, Vol. XL, p. 571.
Suringar, W. F. R.
1870. Algae Japonicae Musei Botanici Lugduno-Batavi. Haar-
lem.
Svedelius, N.
1906. Ecological and systematic studies of the Ceylon species
of Caulerpa. Ceylon marine biological reports, No. 4.
Thuret, G.
1854. Sur quelques algues nouvelles decouvertes aux environs
de Cherbourg. Mem. Soc. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, Vol. II,
p. 387.
Tilden, J.
1910. Minnesota Algae, Vol. I. Univ. of Minnesota.
Transeau, E. N.
1915. Notes on the Zygnemales. Ohio Jour. Sci., Vol. XVI,
p. 17.
Turner, D.
1808. leones Fucorum, Vol. I. London.
1811. leones Fucorum, Vol. II. London.
1819. leones Fucorum, Vol. IV. London.
Turpin, P. J. F.
1830. Organographie microscopique, elementaire et comparee
des vegetaux. Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris., Vol.
XVIII, p. 161.
Vahl, M.
1802. Endeel cryptogiske planter fra St. Croix. Skrivten af
Naturhistoriker-Selskabet, Vol. V, Heft 2, Kjobehavn.
Vickers, A.
1905. Liste des algues marines de la Barbade. Ann. Sci. Nat.
Ser. 9, Bot., Vol. I, p. 45.
1908. Phycologia Barbadensis. Paris.
Webb, P. B.
1839. Otia Hispanica. Paris.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
169
Weber-Van Bosse, A.
1898. Monographic des Caulerpes. Ann. Buitenzorg, Vol. XV,
p. 243.
1904. Note sur deux algues de l’archipel Malaisien. Recueil
des travaux botaniques Neerlandaises, No. 1.
1913. Siboga Expeditie. Monogr. LIXa. Liste des algues.
Leiden.
West, G. S.
1904.	A monograph of the British Desmidiaceae. Vol. I.
London.
1904a. West Indian fresh water algae. Jour, of Bot., Vol.
XLII, p. 281.
1905.	A monograph of the British Desmidiaceae. Vol. II.
London.
1911. A monograph of the British Desmidiaceae. Vol. IV.
London.
West, W. and G. S.
1895. On some fresh water algae from the West Indies. Jour.
Linn. Soc. Bot., Vol. XXX, p. 264.
1897. Welwitsch’s African freshwater algae. Jour, of Bot.,
Vol. XXXV, p. 33.
Wille, J. N. F.
1887. Algologische Mittheilungen. Prings. Jahrb., Vol. XVIII,
p. 425.
1900. Algologische Notizen. I-VI. Nyt Mag. for Naturvi-
denskaberne, Vol. XXXVIII, p. 1.
1904. Die Schizophyceae. Ergebnisse des Plankton Expedi-
tion der Humboldt Stiftung, Vol. IV. Kiel & Leipzig.
1913. Algologischen Notizen. XXII-XXIV. Nyt Mag. for
Naturvidenskaberne, Vol. LI, p. 1.
Wittrock, V. B.
1866. Forsok till en Monographi ofver algslagtet Monostroma.
Upsala.
1877. On the development and systematic arrangement of the
Pithophoraceae. Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sci. Upsala,
Ser. 3, Vol. X.
Wolle, F.
1877. Fresh water algae. II. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, Vol. VI,
p. 137.
1884. Desmids of the United States. Bethlehem, Pa.
1887. Fresh water algae of the United States. Bethlehem, Pa.170
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Woodward, T. J.
1794. Description of Fucus dasyphyllus. Trans. Linn. Soc.,
Yol. II, p. 239.
1797. Observations upon the generic character of Ulva. Trans.
Linn. Soc., Vol. Ill, p. 46.
Wright, F. E.
1877. On a new species of parasitic algae belonging to the
genus Chlorochytrium of Cohn. Trans. Roy. Irish Acad.,
Vol. XXVI, p. 355.
Wulfen, F. X. von.
1803. Cryptogamia aquatica. Romer, Archiv. fur die Botanik,
Vol. III. Leipzig.
Zanardini, G.
1840. Sopra le alghe del mare Adriatico. Lettera 2. Biblio-
theca Italiana, Vol. XCIV. Milano.
1842.	Synopsis algarum in mari Adriatico hucusque collectarum.
Mem. R. Acad. Sci., Torino, Ser. 2, Vol. IV, p. 105.
1843.	Saggio di classificazione naturale delle ficee. Venezia.
1851. Algae novae vel minus cognitae in mari rubro a Portiero
collectae. Flora, Vol. XXXIV, p. 33.
1858. Plantarum in mari rubro hucusque collectarum enumera-
tio. Mem. I. R. 1st. Venet., Vol. VII, p. 209.
1865. Iconographia phycologica adriatica. Vol. II.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
171
EXPLANATION OF PLATES.172
COLLINS AND HERVET.
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
PLATE I.
Oedogonium consociatum Collins & Hervey.
. Large cluster of young filaments. 255 X 1.
. Smaller cluster of same. 255 X 1.
. Single filament with attached basal cell. 550 X 1.
. Filament with oogonium (immature). 550 X 1.
Chaetomorpha minima Collins & Hervey.
. Filament of two cells. 800 X 1.
. Filament of five cells. 550 X 1.
. Filament of five emptied cells. 550 X 1.
Nitophyllum Wilkinsoniae Collins & Hervey.
. Whole plant, f nat. size.Plate I174
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
PLATE II.
Nitophyllum Wilkinsoniae Collins & Hervey.
Margin of frond. 120 X 1.
Chondria curvilineata Collins & Hervey.
Portion of branch with ramulus and terminal leaves. 255 X 1.
Optical section of branch. 255 X 1.
Chondria polyrhiza Collins & Hervey.
Branch with rhizoids and tetraspores. 240 X 1.
Lophosiphonia Saccorhiza Collins & Hervey.
Tip of erect axis. 600 X 1.
Ramulus with tetraspores. 600 X 1.Flate II.176
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
	PLATE III.
Figure 15. Figure 16. Figure 17.	Lophosiphonia Saceorhiza Collins & Hervey. Tip of erect axis with antheridium and leaves. 330 X 1. Cystocarp. 330 X 1. Prostrate filament with rhizoids. 120 X 1.
Figure 18. Figure 19. Figure 20. Figure 21.	Lophosiphonia bermudensis Collins & Hervey. Prostrate filament with rhizoids and erect branches. 160 X 1. Antheridia. 160 X 1. Cystocarp. 160 X 1. Tetrasporangia. 160 X 1.
Figure 22.	Ceramothamnion Codii H. M. Richards. Lateral union of two rhizoids from same node. 310 X 1.Plate III178
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
PLATE IV.
Ceramothanmion Codii H. M. Richards.
Union of three rhizoids from different nodes. 310 X 1.
Dasya spinuligera Collins & Hervey.
Branch with ramelli and young and mature stichidia. 120 X 1.
Cross section of branch. 160 X 1.
Gymnothamnion bipinnatum Collins & Hervey.
Prostrate filament with two erect and two descending axes.
300 X 1.
Ceramium crueiatum Collins & Hervey.
Prostrate filament with rhizoids and base of erect filament.
65 X 1.
Branch with tetraspores. 120 X 1.Plate IV.180
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
PLATE V.
Ceramium transversale Collins & Hervey.
Prostrate filament with erect filament and rhizoids. 120 X 1.
Erect filament with branch. 255 X 1.
Branch with tetraspores. 160 X 1.
Nitophyllum Wilkinsoniae Collins & Hervey.
Section of frond through a sorus. 160 X 1.
Superficial view of a sorus. 160 X 1.
Halymenia bermudensis Collins & Howe.
Cross section. 255 X 1.
Halymenia pseudofloresia Collins & Howe.
Cross section. 130X1.Plate V.182
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
PLATE VI.
Halymenia pseudofloresia Collins & Howe.
Figure 36. Whole frond, f nat. size.
Halymenia bermudensis Collins & Howe.
Figure 37. Whole frond. If X 1.
Griffithsia tenuis Agardh.
Figure 38. Tip of tetrasporic branch. 160 X 1.
Figure 39. Node with antheridia. 300 X 1.
Habit figures were drawn from herbarium specimens, all others by camera
lucida. Figures 5, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 22, and 23 are by F. D.
Lambert; the others by A. C. Walton.INDEX.
Synonyms are printed in italics, also names of species, etc., not found in
Bermuda, but which are incidentally mentioned. Full-face type indicates
the principal reference for a species.
Acanthophora, 122.
spieifera, 62, 122.
Thierii, 122.
Acetabularia, 53.
crenulata, 9, 53.
Schenckii, 53.
Achnanthes bijuga, 31.
Acieularia, 53.
Schenckii, 12, 53.
Acrochaetium, 96.
barbadense, 97.
corymbiferum, 97, 150.
crassipes, 96, 98.
Dufourii, 96.
Hypneae, 98.
leptonema, 97.
Nemalionis, 98.
Sagraenaum, 97.
Thuretii, 98.
Acrocarpus spathulatus, 104.
Aegagropila repens, 48.
Alsidium Blodgettii, 125.
Anacystis marginata, 16.
Anabaena, 24.
flos-aquae, 24.
torulosa, 24.
variabilis, 24.
Anadyomene, 50.
flabellata, 50.
stellata, 50.
Antithamnion, 141.
crueiatum, 11, 141.
var. radicans, 9,141.
pteroton, 140.
Aphanothece microscopica, 16.
Apjohnia tropica, 52.
Aseocyclus, 72.
orbicularis, 72.
Ascophyllum, 78.
nodosum, 78.
Asparagopsis, 117.
Delilei, 117.
taxiformis, 117.
Asperococcus intricatus, 74.
sinuosus, 73.
Avrainvillea, 57.
longicaulis, 57.
Mazei, 57.
nigricans, 57.
var. fulva, 57.
sordida, 57.
Bangia, 94.
elegans, 95.
fuscopurpurea, 94.
Bangiaceae, 94.
Bangiopsis subsimplex, 95.
Batophora, 54.
Oerstedi, 54.
var. occidentalis, 54.
Batrachospermum attenuatum, 142.
Blastophysa, 38.
rhizopus, 38.
Blodgettia Borneti, 48.
conjervoides, 48.
Bonnemaisoniaceae, 117.
Bostrychia, 128.
calamistrata, 129.
Montagnei, 128, 129.
rivularis, 128.
scorpioides, 129.
sertularia, 129.
tenella, 129.
forma densa, 129.
forma tenuior, 129.
Tuomeyi, 125.
Botryoglossum platycarpum, 149.
Brachycladia marginata, 102.
Brachytrichia, 28.
maculans, 28.
Bryopsidaceae, 60.
Bryopsis, 60.
Balbisiana var. Lamourouxii, 62.
Duchassaingii, 60.
forma filicina, 61.
Harveyana, 61, 62.
hypnoides, 60.
forma prolongata, 60.
Leprieurii, 61, 62.
pachynema, 51.
pennata, 61, 95.
var. Leprieurii, 62.186
COLLINS AND HEEVEY.
var. secunda, 62.
plumosa, 61.
var. secunda, 62.
Byssus aureus, 41.
Callithamnion, 136.
byssoideum, 137.
var. jamaicense, 136.
eordatum, 137.
coryrnbosuiQ, 136.
cruciatum, 141.
var. radicans, 141.
elegans, 138, 140.
gorgoneum, 132.
Halliae, 9, 10, 136.
Hookeri, 95, 136.
investiens, 132.
membranaceum, 148.
Nemalionis, 98.
pluma, 140.
roseum, 136.
spongiosum, 136.
tenue, 135.
thyrsigerum, 13 5.
Caloglossa, 116.
Leprieurii, 11, 106, 116.
mnioides, 116.
Calosiphonia, 151.
caribaea, 151.
verticillifera, 12, 151.
Calothrix, 27.
aeruginea, 27.
confervicola, 27.
Crustacea, 27.
fusco-violacea, 27, 95.
parasitica, 27.
pilosa, 27.
seopulorum, 27.
Castagnea, 74.
mediterranea, 74, 75, 76.
trirescens, 75, 76.
Zosterae, 71, 74, 75.
Catagnymene pelagica, 20.
Catenellh, 105.
Opuntia, 106.
var. pinnata, 11, 18, 105.
pinnata, 105.
Caulerpa, 62.
Ashmeadii, 66.
chemnitzia var. occidentalis, 65.
clavifera, 65.
crassifolia, 64, 65, 95.
forma laxior, 64.
forma mexicana, 64.
cupressoides, 66.
var. ericifolia, 66.
var. mamillosa, 66.
ericifolia, 66.
fastigiata, 63.
var. confervoides, 63.
laetevirens, 66.
mamillosa, 66.
mexicana, 64.
peltata, 65.
pinnata forma laxior, 65.
plumaris forma longiseta, 65.
prolifera, 63.
forma obovata, 63.
forma zosterifolia, 64.
pusilla, 63.
racemosa, 64, 65.
var. clavifera, 65.
var. laetevirens, 66.
var. occidentalis, 65.
var. uvifera, 66.
sertularioides, 11, 64, 66.
forma brevipes, 66.
forma longiseta, 65.
taxifolia, 65.
verticillata, 11, 63.
Caulerpaceae, 62.
Centroceras clavulatum, 147.
Ceramiaceae, 32.
Ceramium, 143.
aculeatum, 143.
arachnoideum, 144.
var. patentissimum, 144.
clavulatum, 96, 98, 147.
confervoides, 69.
cruciatum, 144.
cryptacanthum, 147.
diaphanum var. arachnoideum, 144.
var. tenuissimum, 143.
fastigiatum, 147.
miniatum, 146.
nitens, 9, 147.
nodosum, 143.
ocellatum, 130.
roseum, 136.
rubrum, 147.
var. nitens, 147.
tenuissimum, 143.
var. arachnoideum, 144.
var. patentissimum, 144.
var. pygmaeum, 144.
transversale, 145.
Ceramothamnion, 134.
Codii, 18, 134.
Chaetomorpha, 41.
aerea forma Lihum, 42.
brachvgona, 42.
californica, 41.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
187
crassa, 42.
geniculata, 42.
gracilis, 42.
Linum, 42.
minima, 41.
Chaetophoraceae, 38.
Champia, 115.
parvula, 9, 116.
Chantransia barbadensis, 97.
collopoda, 37, 96.
corymbifera, 97.
crassipes, 96.
Ditfourii, 96.
efflorescens forma Thuretii, 98.
Hypneae, 98.
leptonema, 97.
Nemalionis, 98.
Thuretii, 98.
Chara, 67.
gymnopus var. Berteroi, 67.
Characeae, 67.
Chlamydomonas, 30.
Chlorochytrium Cohnii, 31.
Chlorocystis, 31.
Cohnii, 31.
Chlorodesmis vaucheriaeformis, 62.
Chlorogloea, 17.
tuberculosa, 17.
Chlorophyceae, 29.
Chondria, 120.
atropurpurea, 121.
curvilineata, 8, 13, 120.
dasyphylla, 121.
obtusa var. paniculata, 120.
parvula, 115.
polyrhiza, 10, 113, 121.
succulenta, 121.
Chorda Lomentaria, 73.
Chroococcaceae, 14.
Chroococcus, 14.
membraninus, 14.
turgidus, 14.
Chroothece, 14.
cryptarum, 15.
Richteriana forma marina, 14.
Chrysymenia, 113.
Agardhii, 113.
dichotomo-flabellata, 110.
Enteromorpha, 114.
halvmenioides, 110, 114.
Lomentaria, 114.
pyriformis, 114.
uvaria, 11, 114.
Chylocladia A Ibertisii, 114.
Baileyana var. filiformis, 115.
parvula, 115.
rigens, 113.
rosea, 113.
Cladophora, 43.
brachyclona, 46.
catenifera, 48, 95.
constricta, 44.
corallicola, 45.
crispula, 44.
crvstallina, 27, 46.
delicatula, 44.
expansa, 28, 45.
fascicularis, 46.
flavescens, 45.
flexuosa, 45.
fracta, 49.
var. marina, 45.
frascatii, 49.
fuliginosa, 48.
glaucescens, 46.
heteronema, 45.
Howei, 48.
luteola, 44.
Macallana, 46.
patens, 46.
piscinae, 46, 47.
repens, 48.
rigidula, 47.
Sagraeana, 97.
trichotoma, 48.
utriculosa, 47, 48.
Cladophoraceae, 41.
Cladophoropsis, 49.
membranacea, 49, 106.
Cladosiphon mediterraneus, 74, 76.
Cladostephus dubius, 101.
Closterium, 29.
Leibleinii, 29.
moniliferum, 29.
Codiaceae, 54.
Codiolum polyrhizum, 50.
Codium, 54.
adhaerens, 55.
decorticatum, 11, 18, 55, 70, 98,
144.
var. clavatum, 66.
elongatum, 55.
difforme, 55.
isthmocladum, 57.
intertextum, 64.
repens, 55.
tomentosum, 20, 24, 41, 55, 134.
Coelarthrum, 114.
Albertisii, 9, 114.
Coelochondria, 121.
Colpomenia, 73.
sinuosa, 12, 73.18S
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
Compsopogon subsimplex, 95.
Conferva arbuscula, 131.
carnea, 94.
clavaeformis, 53.
corymbosa, 136.
crassa, 42.
crystallina, 46.
expansa, 45.
fascicularis, 46.
flexuosa, 33, 45.
fracta, 49.
fulvescens, 68.
fusca, 72.
fuscopurpurea, 94.
hieroglyphica, 43.
Hookeri, 136.
Linum, 42.
menibranacea, 49.
mirabilis, 25.
repens, 48.
riparia, 43.
simplex, 124.
tomentosa, 55.
utricularis, 51.
Wittrockii, 32.
Corallina conglutinata, 58.
cylindrica, 132.
flabellum, 58.
marginata, 102.
monilis, 59.
obtusata, 102.
tridens, 59.
Tuna, 59.
Cordylecladia, 113.
irregularis, 113.
rigens, 113.
Corticularia arcla, 69.
Cosmarium, 29.
botrytis, 30.
Cucumis, 29.
granatum, 29.
pseudonitidulum, 29.
subcucumis, 29.
Crouania, 142.
attenuata, 11, 142.
Cryptoglaena, 28.
americana, 28.
Cryptoglenaceae, 28.
Cryptonemia, 149.
erenulata, 149.
luxurians, 149.
Cylindrocapsa, 35.
geminella, 35.
var. minor, 35.
involuta, 35.
Cylindrocapsaceae, 35.
Cystoclonium purpurascens, 71.
Cystoseira concatenata, 78.
Dasya, 130.
arbuscula, 131.
forma subarticulata, 131.
corymbifera, 131.
Delilei, 117.
elegans, 130.
mucronata, 125.
ocellata, 130.
pedicellata, 11, 130, 131.
punicea, 131.
ramosissima, 131.
spinuligera, 9, 130.
Tumanowiczi, 125.
venusta, 131.
Wurdemanni, 131.
Dasycladaceae, 53.
Dasycladus, 53.
clavaeformis, 53.
occidentalis, 54.
Delesseria Hypoglossum, 116.
Leprieurii, 116.
Delesseriaceae, 115.
Derbesia, 62.
Lamourouxii, 62.
marina, 62.
tenuissima, 62.
vaucheriaeformis, 62.
Derbesiaceae, 62.
Dermocarpa, 17.
Farlowii, 18.
Leibleinii var. pelagica, 20.
prasina, 18.
solitaria, 17.
Desmidiaceae, 29.
Dichosporangium repens, 74.
Dichothrix, 28.
Baueriana, 28.
fucicola, 28.
Dichotomosiphon, 67.
pusillus, 67, 123.
Dictyopteris, 88.
delicatula, 88.
Justii, 12, 16, 62, 71, 88, 97.
plagiogramma, 88.
Dictyosphaeria, 50.
favulosa, 60.
Dictyota, 88.
acutiloba, 91.
Bartayresii, 90.
Bartayresiana, 90.
Brongniartii, 92.
cervicornis, 90.
ciliata, 91, 93, 96.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
189
crenulata, 91, 92.
dentata, 91, 92, 93.
dichotoma, 89, 92.
divaricata, 90, 91.
fasciola, 89, 90.
indica, 89.
linearis, 89, 91.
Mertensii, 92.
subdentata, 92.
variegata, 85, 87.
volubilis, 90.
Dictyotaceae, 84.
Digenea, 124.
simplex, 12, 124.
Dilophus, 93.
guineensis, 12, 93.
Diplochaete, 38.
solitaria, 38.
Dudresnaya, 150.
bermudensis, 12,150,151.
caribaea, 12,150,151.
crassa, 9, 11, 97, 150, 151.
Dumontia calvadosii, 98.
Dumontiaceae, 150.
Ectocarpaeeae, 68.
Eetoearpus, 68.
acanthoides, 69.
arctus, 69.
confervoides, 69.
coniferus, 69.
crinitus, 77.
Duchassaingianus, 70.
elachistaeformis, 70.
elegans, 70.
Hooperi, 68.
indicus, 70.
luteolus, 71.
Mitehellae, 69, 95.
parasiticus, 71.
Rallsiae, 71.
Sandrianus, 70.
siliculosus, 69.
forma arctus, 69.
Vidovichii, 77.
virescens, 69.
Encoeliaceae, 73.
Endoderma, 39.
filiforme, 39.
viride, 39.
Enteromorpha, 32.
compressa, 33.
flexuosa, 33.
forma submarina, 34.
Hopkirkii, 33.
intestinalis, 34.
var. tenuis, 34.
marginata, 33.
minima, 33.
percursa, 33.
plumosa, 33.
prolifera, 33.
Entocladia viridis, 39.
Entophysalis, 16.
granulosa, 16.
Ernodesmis, 52.
verticillata, 12, 52.
Erythrocladia, 95.
subintegra, 95.
Erythrotrichia, 94.
carnea, 94.
ceramicola, 94.
Eucheuma, 106.
denticulatum, 10, 11, 106.
Gelidium, 11, 106.
isiforme, 106.
spinosum, 106.
Euchondria, 122.
Eudesme virescens, 75.
Euhymenia luxurious, 149.
Euliagora, 99.
Euptilota, 138.
Falkenbergia, 122.
Hillebrandi, 122.
Fischerella, 26.
ambigua, 26.
Fucaceae, 78.
Fucus, 79.
acicularis, 105.
bacciferus, 81.
ceranoideS, 88.
chemnitzia var. peltatus, 65.
clavifer, 65.
confervoides, 109.
corneus, 103.
crinalis, 104.
cupressoides, 66.
dasyphyllus, 121.
denticulatus, 106.
ericifolius, 66.
filamentosus, 142.
folio sis simus, 83.
gelatinosus, 119.
hypoglossoides, 116.
lendigerus, 82.
linifolius, 81.
multipartitus, 110.
musciformis, 112.
natans, 81.
nodosus, 78.
obtusus, 119.190
COLLINS AND HEKVEY.
papillosus, 118.
pavonius, 86.
plumosus, 137, 138.
Poitei, 110, 118.
proliferus, 63.
pseudociliatus, 91.
pusillus, 104.
racemosus, 65.
rigidus, 108.
sericeus, 138.
sertularioides, 65.
spiciferus, 122.
spinosus, 116.
taxifolius, 65.
taxiformis, 117.
tenellus, 129.
uvarius, 113.
uvifer, 65.
vesiculosus, 79.
Wrightii, 109.
Galaxaura, 101.
cylindrica, 102.
fasciculata, 102.
fastigiata, 102.
flagelliformis, 102.
fruticulosa, 102.
lapidescens, 102.
marginata, 102.
obtusata, 11, 102.
ramulosa, 102.
squalida, 70, 102, 132.
rugosa, 102.
Gelidiaceae, 103.
Gelidiopsis, 108.
gracilis, 105.
rigida, 108.
Gelidium, 103.
corneum, 103.
crinale, 103.
var. spathulatum, 104.
pulvinatum, 104.
pusillum, 11, 17, 104.
var. eonchieola, 104.
repens, 104.
rigidum var. radicans, 108.
spathulatum, 104.
Geminella, 31.
scalariformis var. marina, 12, 31.
Gigartina, 105.
acicularis, 105.
Teedii, 105.
Gigartinaceae, 105.
Gloeocapsa, 15.
ambigua var. fusco-lutea, 15.
atrata, 15.
fusco-lutea, 15.
montana, 15.
Gloeothece, 15.
confluens, 15.
membranacea, 15.
rupestris, 15.
Globulina atrata, 15.
Gloiococcus, 40.
mucosus, 40.
Gomontia, 50.
polyrhiza, 50.
Gomontiaceae, 50.
Goniotrichum, 95.
elegans, 95.
Humphreyi, 95.
Gonium glaucum, 16.
Goralia, 99.
Gracilaria, 108.
armata, 109.
compressa, 109.
cornea, 109.
confervoides, 109.
damaecornis, 109.
diehotomo-flabellata, 11, 110, 111.
divaricata, 109.
ferox, 109.
horizontalis, 12, 111.
multipartita, 110.
Poitei, 109.
Textorii, 110.
Wrightii, 109.
Grateloupiaceae, 148.
Griffithsia, 134.
monilis, 135.
Schousboei, 135.
tenuis, 9, 135.
thyrsigera, 135.
Gymnothamnion, 137.
bipinnatum, 139.
elegans, 138.
Harveyi, 138.
pellucidum, 138.
sericeum, 138.
Haematococcus insignis, 40.
Haliseris plagiogramma, 88.
polypodioides, 88.
Halimeda, 59.
incrassata, 59.
forma monilis, 60.
forma typica, 59.
forma tripartita, 59.
Monile, 60.
forma cylindrica, 60.
forma robusta, 60.
simulans, 59.THE ALGAE OF BEBMUDA.
191
tridens, 59.	cornuta, 113.
forma gracilis, 60.	musciformis, 9,112, 143
forma tripartita, 59.	spinella, 112.
Tuna, 59.	Hypoglossum, 116.
Halymenia, 148.	hypoglossoides, 116.
Agardhn, 9, 149.	Woodwardi, 116.
bermudensis, 8, 11, 39, 148, 152.
cyclocolpa, 151.
decipiens, 148.
echinophysa, 149.
pseudofloresia, 11, 71, 149.
Hapalosiphon, 26.
intricatus, 26.
Haplospora'Vidovichii, 77.
Hassallia, 26.
byssoidea, 26.
Helminthiopsis verticillifera, 151.
Helminthocladia, 98.
calvadosii, 10, 70, 71, 97, 98.
divaricata, 98.
purpurea, 98.
Helminthocladiaceae, 96.
Helminthora divaricata, 98.
Herpochondria, 122.
Herposiphonia, 125.
pecten-veneris, 126.
secunda, 126.
tenella, 126.
Heterospora, 77.
Vidovichii, 9, 77.
Heterosiphonia, 131.
Wurdemanni, 131.
Himanthalia, 78.
Hormoceras pygmaeum, 144.
Hormospora geminella, 35.
scalariformis, 32.
Hormothamnion, 24.
convolutum, 24.
Hormotrichum. bermudianum, 32.
Hutchinsia obscura, 128.
opaca, 124.
periclados, 125.
secunda, 126.
tenella, 126.
Hydrococcus marinus, 16.
Hyella, 17.
caespitosa, 17.
Hydroclathrus, 73.
caneellatus, 12, 73.
Hydrocoleum, 23.
comoides, 23.
glutinosum, 23.
lvngbyaceum, 23.
var. rupestre, 23.
Hypnea, 111.
cervicornis, 112.
KaUymenia, 105.
perforata, 12, 105.
reniformis, 149.
Laurencia, 117.
cervicornis, 118, 134.
dasyphylla, 119, 121.
gemmifera, 118.
implicata, 118, 120.
intricata, 119.
obtusa, 119.
var. gelatinosa, 119.
var. gracilis, 119.
paniculata, 120.
papillosa, 118.
perforata, 118.
Poitei, 118.
setacea, 119.
tuberculosa, 118.
Leibleinia, 21.
Liagora, 99.
corymbosa, 99.
dubia, 101.
elongata, 97, 99.
pectinata, 100.
pulverulenta, 100.
valida, 99.
Lomentaria, 115.
uncinata, 115.
var. filiformis, 115.
Lophosiphonia, 126.
bermudensis, 126.
obscura, 128.
Saecorhiza, 9, 127.
subadunca, 127.
Lyngbya, 21.
confervoides, 18, 21, 39.
Lagerheimii, 22.
lutea, 22.
majuscula, 21.
Meneghiniana, 18, 21.
semiplena, 22.
Mastigocoleus, 26.
testarum, 26.
Merismopedium, 16.
convolutum, 16.
glaucum, 16.
Meristotheca, 106.192
COLLINS AND HEKVEY.
Duchassaingii, 106.
Mesogloia attenuata, 142.
Chordariae, 74.
Griffithsiana, 74.
vermicularis, 74.
virescens, 75.
var. zostericola, 75.
Zosterae, 75.
Mesogloiaceae, 74.
Mesotaenium, 30.
Endlicherianum, 30.
Microchaete, 25.
vitiensis, 25.
Microcoleus, 23.
chthonoplastes, 23.
corymbosus, 28.
tenerrimus, 23.
vaginatus var. monticola, 23.
Microcystis, 16.
marginata, 16.
microspora, 16.
Microspora, 32.
Willeana, 32.
Wittrockii, 32.
Microthamnion, 40.
Kuetzingianum, 40.
Monostroma, 34.
latissimum, 34, 94.
orbiculatum, 34.
Murrayella, 125.
periclados, 125.
Myriocladia Zosterae, 75.
Myrionema orbiculare, 72.
Myriotrichia, 74.
repens, 74.
Myriotrichiaceae, 74.
Myxophyceae, 14.
Naccaria, 103.
corymbosa, 10,11,103.
Wigghii, 103.
Nemacystus, 76.
Nemalion purpureum, 98.
Nemastoma cervicornis, 151.
Nemastomaceae, 151.
Neomeris, 53.
annulata, 9, 53.
Kelleri, 53.
Nitophyllum, 115.
marginatum, 116.
venulosum, 116.
Wilkinsoniae, 9, 115.
Nostoc, 25.
ciniflonum, 25.
commune, 25.
Nostochaeeae, 24.
Ochtodes filiformis, 109.
Oedogoniaceae, 36.
Oedogonium, 36.
consociatum, 36.
Itzigsohnii, 29, 31, 38.
inversum, 38.
pachyandrium, 37.
Pringsheimii, 36.
Oncobyrsa, 16.
marina, 16.
Oocystis, 31.
Borgei, 31.
Oseillatoria, 19.
amoena; 20.
amphibia, 20.
Bonnemaisonii, 19.
Corallinae, 20.
formosa, 20.
laetevirens, 20.
longearticulata, 20.
margaritifera, 19.
miniata, 19.
nigro-viridis, 19.
tenuis var. tergestina, 20.
Oseillatoriaceae, 18.
Padina, 86.
Durvillaei, 87.
gymnospora, 87.
Pavonia, 86, 87.
sanctae-crucis, 86.
variegata, 87, 145, 146.
Palmellaconferta, 17.
rupestris, 15.
tuberculosa, 17.
Penicillus, 57.
capitatus, 58.
forma elongatus, 58.
forma laxus, 58.
elongatus, 58.
pyriformis, 58.
Petrosiphon, 52.
adhaerens, 52.
Phaeophila, 38.
floridearum, 38.
Phaeophyceae, 68.
Phormidium, 20.
fragile, 20.
luridum, 20.
Retzii, 21.
valderianum, 21.
Pithophora, 49.
kewensis, 37, 49.
Platoma, 151.
cyclocolpa, 151.
Plectonema, 22.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
193
nostocorum, 22.
Pleurocapsa, 17.
conferta, 17.
Pleurococcus membraninus, 14.
vulgaris, 31.
Plumaria asplenioides, 138.
elegans, 138.
Harveyi, 138.
pellucida, 138.
pectinata, 138.
plumosa, 138.
Schousboei, 138, 140.
Polysiphonia, 123.
breviarticulata, 124.
exilis, 128.
fastigiata, 47.
ferulacea, 96, 124.
fibrillosa, 124.
foetidissima, 13, 123.
fracta, 124.
havanensis, 123.
forma mucosa, 123.
Hillebrandi, 122.
macrocarpa, 115, 123.
nigrescens, 124.
obscura, 128.
opaca, 124.
pecten-veneris, 126.
perpusilla, 117.
pulvinata, 123.
simulans, 124.
subtilissima, 123, 124.
violacea, 47.
Polythrix, 28.
corymbosa, 28.
Porphyra, 94.
atropurpurea, 13, 94.
laciniata, 94.
leucosticta, 94.
vulgaris, 94.
Porphyridium, 152.
cruentum, 152.
Porphyrosiphon, 22.
Notarisii, 22.
Pringsheimia, 40.
scutata, 40.
Protococcaceae, 31.
Protococcus, 31.
turgidus, 14.
viridis, 31.
Protoderma, 35.
marinum, 35.
Ptilota elegans, 138.
Harveyi, 138.
pellucida, 138.
plumosa, 138.
Schousboei, 138.
sericea, 138.
Ptilothamnion pluma, 140.
Pylaiella, 68.
fulvescens, 68.
Hooperi, 68.
Rhipilia longicaulis, 57.
nigricans, 57.
Rhizoclonium, 42.
crassipellitum, 43.
hieroglyphicum, 31, 35, 38, 43.
Hookeri, 43.
Kerneri, 43.
riparium, 43.
var. implexum, 43.
Rhodochorton, 147.
membranaceum, 148.
Rothii, 148.
speluncarum, 17, 147.
Rhodomela calamistrata, 129.
Rhodomelaceae, 117.
Rhodophyceae, 94.
Rhodophyllidaceae, 105.
Rhodymenia palmata, 110, 148.
Rhodymeniaeeae, 113.
Rivularia, 28.
hospita, 28.
polyotis, 28.
Zosterae, 75.
Rivulariaceae, 27.
Rosenvingia, 74.
intricata, 12, 74.
Sargassum, 80.
bacciferum, 80.
Filipendula, 84.
var. Montagnei, 83.
forma subedentatum, 83.
fluitans, 81.
Hystrix, 81, 84.
var. fluitans, 81.
lendigerum, 82.
linifolium, 81.
Montagnei, 83.
natans, 8, 80.
platycarpum, 84.
var. bermudense, 84.
vulgare, 78, 83.
var. foliosissimum, 83.
var. Montagnei, 83.
Scenedesmaceae, 31.
Scenedesmus, 31.
bijuga, 31.
Schizosiphonfucicola, 28.
Schizothrix, 23.194
COLLINS AND HERVEY.
calcicola, 24.
vaginata, 23.
Seinaia, 101.
complanata, 101.
furcellata, 101.
var. complanata, 101.
Scytonema, 25.
crustaceum, 26.
figuratum, 25.
mlrabile, 25.
myochrous, 26.
ocellatum, 25.
therniale, 25.
varium, 25.
Scytonemaeeae, 25.
Seytosiphon, 73.
Lomentaria, 73.
Seirospora Gaillonii, 137.
Griffith siana, 137.
Siphonocladus, 52.
rigidus, 52.
tropicus, 52.
Spatoglossum, 84.
Areschougii, 84.
guineensis, 93.
Schroederi, 84.
Spermothamnion, 132.
flabellatum, 140.
gorgoneum, 18, 132.
investiens, 132.
var. cidaricola, 132.
macromeres, 132.
Sphacelaria, 72.
furcigera, 72.
fusca, 72.
novae-hollandiae, 72.
tribuloides, 38, 72.
Sphacelariaceae, 72.
Sphaenosiphon prasinus, 18.
Sphaeroeoccaceae, 108.
jSphaerococcus Gelidium, 106.
isiformis, 107.
hactuca var. luxurious, 149.
■rigens, 113.
rspinellus, 112.
Textorii, 110.
Sphaerozyga Thwaitesii, 24.
Spirop-ra, 30.
decimina, 30.
var. submarina, 30.
submarina, 30.
Spirulina, 18.
rosea, 18.
subsalsa var. oceanica, 19.
tenerrima, 18.
Sporoehnaceae, 77.
Sporochnus, 77.
adriaticus, 77.
Bolleanus, 77.
pedunculatus, 77.
Spyridia, 142.
aculeata, 142.
var. Berkeleyana, 143.
var. hypneoides, 11,143.
Berkeleyana, 143.
complanata, 143.
filamentosa, 142.
Stephanocoelium pusillum, 63.
Stiehocoecus, 32.
subtilis, 32.
Stigonema, 26.
informe, 26.
Stigonemaceae, 26.
Stilophora, 77.
rhizodes var. adriatica, 77.
Stilophoraceae, 77.
Streblonema, 71.
parasiticum, 71.
sphaericum, 71, 74.
Striaria intricata, 74.
Struvea, 52.
ramosa, 52.
Symploea, 22.
muscorum, 22.
violaeea, 22.
Synechocoecus, 14.
aeruginosus, 14.
Syneehocystis, 14.
aquatills, 14, 15.
Taenioma, 117.
macrourum, 117.
perpusillum, 117.
Taonia atomaria, 91.
Schroederi, 84.
Tetraspora, 30.
lubrica, 30, 40.
Tetrasporaceae, 30.
Tilopteridaceae, 77.
Tolypothrix, 26.
tenuis, 26.
Tremella cruenta, 152.
Trentepohlia, 41.
aurea, 41.
Trentepohliaceae, 41.
Trichodesmium, 20.
Thiebaultii, 20.
Trichogloea, 98.
Hervejd, 11, 12, 27, 98.
Trichosolen antillarum, 61.
Turbinaria, 79.
trialata, 79.THE ALGAE OF BERMUDA.
195
tricostata, 12, 79.
Udotea, 58.
conglutinata, 12, 58.
flabellum, 10, 11, 58.
Ulothrichaceae, 31.
Ulothrix subtilis, 32.
Ulva, 34.
atropurpurea, 94.
decorticata, 55.
dichotoma, 89.
fasciata, 35.
Laotuca, 31, 34, 35, 38.
var. latissima, 34.
var. rigida, 35.
latissima, 34.
lima, 34.
lubrica, 30.
Mertensii, 92.
prolifera, 33.
rigida, 35.
Schroederi, 84.
sinuosa, 73.
stellata, 50.
Ulvaceae, 32.
Urococcus, 40.
insignis, 40.
Valonia, 50.
confervoides, 51.
favulosa, 50.
macrophysa, 8, 51, 114.
pachynema, 5i.
utriculosa, 61.
forma Crustacea, 51.
ventricosa, 51.
verticillata, 52.
Valoniaceae, 50.
Vaucheria, 66.
marina, 62.
sphaerospora, 66.
Vaucheriaceae, 66.
Volvocaceae, 30.
Wrangelia, 103.
penicillata, 9, 25,103.
Wrightiella, 125.
Blodgett.ii, 10, 12,125, 1.36.
Tumanowiczi, 125.
Wurdemannia, 104.
setacea, 104.
Xenocoecus, 18.
Schousboei, 18.
var. pallida, 18.
Zonaria, S5.
gymnospora, 87.
linearis, 89.
lobata, 12, 85, 97.
variegata, 85, 87, 146.
Zj'gnemaeeae, 30.CONTRIBUTION'S FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL
STATION FOR RESEARCH.
VOL. 3.
25.	Mark, K. L.— Preliminary Study of the Salinity of Sea-water in the Bermudas.
Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 48 (18) : 669-678. April, 1913.
26.	Smallwood, W. M., and Clark, E. G. — Chromodoris zebra Ileilprin: a Distinct
Species. Jour, of Morpli., 218(4): 625-636. Dec., 1912.
27.	Chester, W. M. — The Structure of the Gorgonian Coral Pseudoplexaura crassa
Wright and Studer. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 48(20): 737-773, 4 pis.
May, 1913.	'
28.	Kutchin, H. L. — Studies on the Peripheral Nervous System of Amphioxus.
Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 49(10) : 569-626, 8 pis. Oct., 1913.
29.	Hilton, W. A. — The Central Nervous System of Tunica nigra. Zool. Jahrb.,
Abt. f. Anat., 37 (1): 113-130. Dec., 1913.
30.	Crozier, W. J.—Note on the Pigment of a Bermuda Nudibranch, Chromodoris
zebra Heilprin. Jour, of Physiol., 47 (6): 491-492. Febr., 1914.
31.	Parker, G. H. — The Locomotion of Chiton. 2p. April, 1914.
32.	Parker, G. II. — On the Strength and the Volume of the Water Currents produced
by Sponges. Jour, of Exp. Zool. 16(3): 443-445. April, 1914.
33.	Crozier, W. J. — The Sensory Reactions of Holothuria surinamensis Ludwig.
Zool. Jahrb., Abt. f. Physiol., 35 (3): 233-297. Aug., 1915.
34.. Crozier, W. J. — The Orientation of a Holothurian by Light. Amer. Jour, ol
Physiol., 30 (1) : 8-20. Dec., 1914.
35.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Number of Rays in Asterias tenuispina Lamk. at Ber-
muda. Amer. Nat., 49 (577) : 28-36. Jan., 1915.
36.	Arey, L. B. — The Orientation of Amphioxus during Locomotion. Jour, of Exp.
Zool., 19 (1) : 37-44. July, 1915.
37.	Crozier, W. J. — A Note on the Physiology of the Cuvierian Organs of Holo
thuria captiva Ludw. Amer. Jour, of Physiol., 36 (2) : 196-202. Jan., 1915.
38.	Mayor, J. W. — On the Development of the Coral Agaricia fragilis Dana. Proc.
Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 51 (9): 183-211, 6 pis. Dec., 1915.
39.	Crozier, W. J. — On Cell Penetration by Acids. Science, N. S., 42 (1090) :735-
736. Nov. 19, 1,915.
Vol. 4.
40.	Crozier, W. J. — Regarding the Existence of the ‘Common Chemical Sense’ in
Vertebrates. Jour. Comp. Neurol., 26 (1) :l-8. Feb., 1916.
41.	Crozier, W. J. —Cell Penetration by Acids. Jour. Biol. Chem., 24 (3): 255-279.
Mar., 1916.
42.	IIeoht, S.—The Water Current produced by Ascidia atra Lesueur. Jour, of
Exp. Zool., 20 (3) :429-434. Apr., 1916.
43.	Crozier, W. J. — The Rhythmic Pulsation of the Cloaca of Ilolothurians. Jour.
of Exp. Zool., 20 (3): 297-356. Apr., 1916.
44.	Crozier, W. J. —Some Indicators from Animal Tissues. Jour. Biol. Chem., 24
(4): 443-445. Apr., 1916.
45.	Galloway, T. W., and Welch, P. S. — Studies on a Phosphorescent Bermudian
Annelid, Odontosyllis enopla Vcrrill. (Reprinted from Trans. Amer. Micros.
Soc., 30 (1) : 13-39, 5 pis. Jan., 1911.) Reprint, 26 pp., 5 pis. June, 1916.
46.	Crozier, W. J. —The Taste of Acids. Jour. Comp. Neurol., 26 (4): 453-462.
Aug., 1916.
47.	Wenrich, D. H. — Notes on the Reactions of Bivalve Mollusks to Changes in
Light Intensity: Image Formation in Pecten. Jour. Anim. Behavior, 6 (4):
297-318. July-Aug., 1916.
48.	Crozier, W. J. —Cell Penetration by Acids. II Further Observations on the
Blue Pigment of Chromodoris zebra. Jour. Biol. Chem., 26 (1): 217-223.
Sept., 1916.
49.	Crozier, W. J. — Cell Penetration by Acids. III. Data on some Additional Acids
Jour. Biol. Chem., 26 (1): 225-230. Sept., 1916.
50.	Crozier, W. J. —On a Barnacle, Conchoderma virgatum, attached to a FiSh,
Diodon hystrix. Amer. Nat., 50 (598): 636-639. Oct., 1916.CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL
STATION FOR RESEARCH. (Continued.)
51.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Immunity Coloration of some Nudibranchs. Proc. Nat-
Acad. Sci., 2 (12): 672-675. Dec., 1916.
52.	Aret, L. B. —The Sensory Potentialities of the Nudibranch * Rhinophore/ Anat.
Record, 11 (6): 514^516. Jan., 1917.
53.	Crozier, W. J. — Studies on Amphioxus by E. L. Mark and W. J. Crozier. I.
The Photoreceptors of Amphioxus. Anat. Record, 11 (6) : 520. Jan., 1917.
54.	Parker, G. H. —The Movements of the Tentacles in Actinians. Jour. EJxp. Zool.,
22 (1): 95-110. Jan., 1917.
55.	Parker, G. H.—Pedal Locomotion in Actinians. Jour. Exp. Zool., 22 (1): 111-
124. Jan.,1917.
56.	Jordan, H. — Rheotropism of Epinephelus striatus Bloch. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci.,
3 (3) : 157-159. Mar., 1917.
57.	Crozier, W. J. — The Nature of the Conical Bodies on the Mantle of Certain
Nudibranchs; Nautilus, 30 (9) : 103-106. Jan., 1917.
58.	Walton, A. C.—A Case of Regeneration in Panulirus argus. Amer. Nat., 51
(605): 308-310. May, 1917.
59.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Periodic Shoreward Migration of Tropical Nudibranchs.
Amer. Nat., 51 (606) : 377-382. June, 1917.
60.	Wodehouse, R. P.—Direct Determinations of Permeability. Jour. Biol. Chem.,
29	(3) : 453-458. Apr., 1917.
61.	Crozier, W. J. — Occurrence of a Holothurian new to the Fauna of Bermuda.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 19 (113): 405-406. May, 1917.
62.	Crozeeb, W. J.— On the Pigmentation of a Polyclad. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts
and Sci., 52 (11) .*725-730, 1 pi. May, 1917.
63.	Pope, P. H. — The Introduction of West Indian Anura into Bermuda. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zo51., 61 (6): 117-131, 2 pis. May, 1917.
64.	Crozier, W. J. — Some Structural Variations in Chromodoris zebra. Nautilus,
30	(12) : 140-142. Apr., 1917.
65.	Crozier, W. J. — A Method of Preserving large Nudibranchs. Nautilus, 30
(12): 142-144. Apr., 1917.
66.	Crozier, W. J.—Multiplication by Fission in Holothurians. Amer. Nat., 51.
67.	Jordan, H. — Rheotropic Responses of Epinephelus striatus Bloch. Amer. Jour.
Physiol., 43 (3) : 438-454. June, 1917.
68.	Crozier, W. J.—The Behavior of Holothurians in Balanced Illumination. Amer.
Jour. Physiol., 43 (4) : 510-513. July, 1917.
69.	Collins, F. S.f and Hervey, A. B. — The Algae of Bermuda. Proc. Amer. Acad.
Arts and Sci., 53 (1) : 1-195, 6 pis. Aug., 1917.CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL
STATION FOR RESEARCH.
Vol. 3.
25.	Mark, K. L. — Preliminary-Study of the Salinity of Sea-water in the Bermudas.
Proc. Ainer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 48 (18): 069-678. April, 1913.
26.	Smallwood, W. M., and Clark, E. G. —Chromodoris zebra Heilprin : a Distinct
Species. Jour, of Morpli., 23(4) : 625-636. Dec., 1912.
27.	Chester, W. M.—The Structure of the Gorgonian Coral Pseudoplexaura crassa
Wright and Studer. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 48(20) : 737-773, 4 pis.
May, 1913.
28.	Kutchin, H. L. — Studies on the Peripheral Nervous System of Amphioxus.
Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 40(10) : 569-626, 8 pis. Oct., 1913.
29.	Hilton, W. A. — The Central Nervous System of Tunica nigra. Zool. Jahrb.,
Abt. f. Anat., 37 (1): 113-130. Dec., 1913.
30.	Crozier, W. J.—Note on the Pigment of a Bermuda Nudibranch, Chromodoris
zebra Heilprin, Jour, of Physiol., 47 (6): 491-492. Febr., 1914. '
31.	Parker, G. H. — The Locomotion of Chiton. 2 p. April, 1914.
32.	Parker, G. H. — On the Strength and the Volume of the Water Currents produced
by Sponges. Jour, of Exp. Zool. 10(3) : 443-445. April, 1914.
33.	Crozier, W. J. — The Sensory Reactions of Holothuria surinamensis Ludwig.
. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. f. Physiol., 3.1 (3) : 233-297. Aug., 1915.
34.	Crozier, W. J. — The Orientation of a Holothurian by Light. Artier. Jour, of
Physiol., 30 (1) : 8-20. Dec., 1914.
35.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Number of Rays in Asterias tenuispina Lamk. at Ber-
muda. Amer. Nat., 49 (577): 28-36. Jan., 1915.
36.	Arey, L. B. — The Orientation of Amphiexus during Locomotion. Jour, of Exp.
Zool., 19 (1) : 37-44. July, 1915.
37.	Crozier, W. J. — A Note on the Physiology of the Cuvierian Organs of Holo
' thuria captiva Ludw. Amer. Jour, of Physiol., 39 (2) : 196-202. Jan., 1915.
38.	Mavor, J. W. —On the Development of the Coral Agaricia fragilis Dana. Proc.
Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., 51 (9): 183-211, 6 pis. Dec., 1915.
39.	Crozier, W. J. — On Cell Penetration by Acids. Science, N. S., 42 (1090) :735-
736. Nov. 19, 1915.
VOL. 4.	_
40.	Crozier, W. J. — Regarding the Existence of the ‘Common Chemical Sense’ in
Vertebrates. Jour. Comp. Neurol., 29 (1): 1-8. Feb., 1916.
41.	Crozier, W. J.—Cell Penetration by Acids. Jour. Biol. Chem., 24 (3) : 255-279.
Mar., 1916.
42.	Hecht, S. — The Water Current produced by Ascidia atra Lesueur. Jour, of
Exp. Zool., 20 (3) :429-434. Apr., 1916.
43.	Crozier, W. J.—The Rhythmic'Pulsation of the Cloaca of Holothurians. Jour.
of Exp. Zool., 20 (3): 297-356. Apr., 1916.
44.	Crozier, W. J. —Some Indicators from Animal Tissues. Jour. Biol Chem., 24
(4): 443-445. Apr., 1916.
45.	Galloway, T. W., and Welch, P. S.—Studies on a Phosphorescent Bermudian
Annelid, Odontosyllis enopla Verrill. (Reprinted from Trans. Amer. Micros.
Soe., 30 (1) : 13-39, 5 pis. Jan., 1911.) Reprint, 26 pp., 5 pis. June, 1916.
46.	Crozier, W. J. — The Taste of Acids. Jour. Comp. Neurol., 29 (4): 453-462.
Aug., 1916.
47.	Wenrich, D. H. — Notes on the Reactions of Bivalve Mollusks to Changes in
Light Intensity: Image Formation in Pecten. Jour. Anim. Behavior, 9 (4):
297-318. July-Aug., 1916.
48.	Crozfer, W. J. — Cell Penetration by1 Acids. ( II Further Observations on'the
Blue Pigment cf Chromodoris zebra. Jour. Biol. Chem., 29 (1): 217-223.
Sept., 1916.
49.	Crozier, W. J. — Cell Penetration by Acids. III. Data on some Additional Acids
Jour. Biol. Chem., 29 (1): 225-230. Sept., 1916.
50.	Crozier, W. J. — On a Barnacle, Conchodcrma virgatum, attached to a Fish,
Diodon hystrix. Amer. Nat., 50 (598): 636-639. Oct., 1916.CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE BERMUDA BIOLOGICAL
STATION FOR RESEARCH.	(iContinued.)
51.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Immunity Coloration of some Nndibranchs. Proc. Nat.
Acad. Sci., 2 (12): 672-675. Dec., 1916.
52.	Arey, L. B. —The Sensory Potentialities of the Nudibranch ‘ Rhinophore.’ Anat.
Record, 11 (6): 514-516. Jan., 1917.
53.	Crozier, W. J. — Studies on Amphioxus by E. L. Mark and W. J. pfozier. I.
The Photoreceptors of Amphioxus. Anat. Record, 11 (6): 520. Jah., 1917.
54.	Parker, G. H. — The Movements of the Tentacles in Actinians. Jonr. Exp. Zool.,
v 22 (1): 95-110. Jan., 1917.
55.	Parker, G. H. — Pedal Locomotion in Actinians. Jour. Exp. Zool., 22 (1) : 111-
124. Jan., 1917.
56.	Jordan, H. — Rheotropism of Epinephelus striatus Bloch. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci.,
3 (3): 157-159. Mar., 1917.
57.	Crozier, W. J. — The Nature of the Conical Bodies on the Mantle of Certain
Nndibranchs. Nautilus, 30 (9): 103-106. Jan., 1917.
58.	Walton, A. C.—A Case of Regeneration in Panulirus argus. Amer. Nat., 51
(605): 308-310. May, 1917.
59.	Crozier, W. J. — On the Periodic Shoreward Migration of Tropical Nndibranchs.
Amer. Nat., 51 (606) : 377-382. June, 1917.
60.	Wodehouse, R. P. — Direct Determinations of Permeability. Jour. Biol. Chem.,
•29 (3) : 453-458. Apr., 1917.
61.	Crozier, W. J. — Occurrence of a Holothurian new to the Fauna of Bermuda.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 19 (113): 405-406. May, 1917.
62.	Crozier, W. J.— On the Pigmentation of a Polyclad. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts
and Sci., 52 (11) : 725-730, 1 pi. May, 1917.
63.	Pope, P. H. — The Introduction of West Indian Anura into Bermuda. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool., 61 (6) : 117-131, 2 pis. May, 1917.
64.	Crozceb, W. J. — Some Structural Variations in Chromodoris zebra. Nautilus,
30 (12): 140-142. Apr., 1917.
65.	Crozier, W. J. — A Method of Preserving large Nndibranchs. Nautilus, 30
(12) : 142-144. Apr., 1917.
66.	Crozier, W. J.— Multiplication by Fission in Holothurians. Amer. Nat., 51.
67.	Jordan, H. — Rheotropic Responses of Epinephelns striatus Bloch. Amer. Jour.
Physiol., 43 (3) : 438-454. June, 1917.
68.	Crozier, W. J.—The Behavior of Holothurians in Balanced Illumination. Amer.
Jour. Physiol., 43 (4) : 510-513. July, 1917.
69.	Collins, F. S., and Hervey, A. B. — The Algae of Bermuda. Proc. Amer. Acad.
Arts and Sci., 53 (1) : 1-195, 6 pis. Aug., 1917.